Home

Honda Power Equipment GXV520 Automobile Parts User Manual

Contents

1. Point Name Network Variable Field Point Type Nvo D I Sensor _on Off7 nvoDI Sensor data onOff7 EnumPoint Nvo D I Sensor _on Off8 nvoDISensor data onOff8 EnumPoint Nvo Cal Cnt _ Cal Count0 nvoCalCnt data CalCountO NumericPoint Nvo Cal Cnt _ Cal Count1 nvoCalCnt data CalCount1 NumericPoint Nvo Cal Cnt _ Cal Count2 nvoCalCnt data CalCount2 NumericPoint Nvo Cal Cnt _ Cal Count3 nvoCalCnt data CalCount3 NumericPoint Nvo Cal Cnt _ Cal Count4 nvoCalCnt data CalCount4 NumericPoint Nvo Cal Cnt _ Cal Count5 nvoCalCnt data CalCount5 NumericPoint Nvo Cal Cnt _ Cal Count6 nvoCalCnt data CalCount6 NumericPoint Nvo Cal Cnt _ Cal Count7 nvoCalCnt data CalCount7 NumericPoint Nvo Cal Cnt _ Cal Count8 nvoCalCnt data CalCount8 NumericPoint Nvo Cal Cnt _ Cal Count9 nvoCalCnt data CalCount9 NumericPoint Nvo Cal Cnt _ Cal Count10 nvoCalCnt data CalCount10 NumericPoint Nvo Cal Cnt _ Cal Count11 nvoCalCnt data CalCount11 NumericPoint Nvo Od Temp _temp P nvoOdTemp tempP NumericPoint Nvo Od Hum _lev Percent nvoOdHum levPercent NumericPoint Nvo Counter1 _count nvoCounter1 count NumericPoint Nvo Counter2 _count nvoCounter2 count NumericPoint Nvo Cascade Out _power Kilo nvoCascadeOut powerKilo NumericPoint Nvo Sensor Occ1 _occupancy nvoSensorOcc1 occupancy EnumPoint Nvo D A Temp _temp P nvoDATemp tempP NumericPoint applType nciApplVer data applType Numeric Writable ap
2. 95 7769 01 14 Privilege Depends Facility Privilege Depends Facility ID Privileges On Contractor Manager Tenant ID Privileges On Contractor Manager Tenant Alarms continued 60 System P P 32 View Priority 7 16 C C C 61 General P P X Alarms Configuration 33 View Priority 8 16 0 0 0 62 IP Network P X X Alarms Configuration 34 View Priority 9 16 C C C 63 Mail Configuration P P X Alarms 64 Change System P P X 35 View Priority 10 16 C C C Date and Time Alarms 65 Upgrade Firmware P X X 36 Trends P j P 66 Reboot System P P X 37 View Trend Graph P P P 67 Download System P P X 38 Download Trend 38 P P X Load Data CSV Files 68 Download Audit P P X 39 View Trend P P X Log Configurations 69 Network P C C Summary Navigation 40 View Trend 40 P P X ao Physical P C C Configurations Navigation A i eee a X X 71 WebSuite Network P P Configurations 77 ET 5 E 7 42 Edit Trend 41 P P X sine orn Configuration T a a 5 x x 43 Delete Trend 40 P X X eras m Configuration Network 44 Users j P 74 Add New 73 P X X 45 View User P P X Appliance Summary 75 Enable Network 73 P X X 46 View User Account 46 P P X Firmware at Information Network Level 47 Add New User 46 P P X 76 Change Master 73 P X X Accounts Ownership 48 Edit User 47 P P X 77 Change Network 73 P X X Accounts User Password 49 Delete User 46 P P X 78 DLC P P Accounts 79 Configure DLC P X X 90 Devic
3. 61 95 7769 01 WEBVISION FCU Switching Levels Purpose To configure fan switching level and staged output switching levels Mode Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off line or On line Procedure 1 Click the Switching Levels button on the left pane to open the Switching Levels Configuration page Enter information into available fields 3 Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to the last saved settings 4 Click Next to display the Zone Control Configuration page or Back to display the Fan Configuration page N FCU Switching Levels fields Acceptable range for all levels is 0 to 100 A setting of 0 means the fan is OFF for this and the following stages FCU Zone Control Purpose Configure the heating and cooling setpoints for the Occupied Standby and Unoccupied operating modes Mode Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off line or On line Procedure 1 Click the Zone Control button on the left pane to open the Zone Control Configuration page Enter information into available fields 3 Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to the last saved settings 4 Click Next to display the Miscellaneous Configuration page or Back to display the Switching Levels Configuration page N FCU Zone Control fields Setpoints can range from 10 to 35 C 50 to 95 F Table 36 FCU Zone Control Options Definitions Name
4. Add Alarm Ce Doucorame ron Jamm o Default Alarm 111111111111111111 Sensor Failed Default o Default Alarm 111111111111111111 Node Disabled Default Ej Default Alarm 111111111111111111 Communication Failed Default o Default Alarm cyahu Smoke Alarm Default o Default Alarm cvahu Dirty Filter Default o Default Alarm cvahu Air Flow Loss Default EJ Default Alarm cvahu Invalid Setpoint Default F Defaut Alarm eyvah Frost Protect Alarm Default Delete Alarm Fig 17 Alarm Setup page 3 Click Add Alarm The Add Alarm page appears 4 Enter the Alarm Name and select the desired Points Alarm Name The name of the alarm Select Points Channel The selected channel Device The selected device Point The selected point Select Point Click Select Point The Select Point dialog box is displayed Select a Channel Device and Point from the corresponding drop WEBVISION down list The selected values are reflected in the Alarm Setup screen Type a Display Name for the point NOTE The alarm condition depends on the type of selected point If it is a numeric point you must provide Alarm High Limit and Alarm Low Limit If it is a discrete value Enumerated or Boolean point then select an alarm value in the possible point value list in the combo box Example For Occupancy State you can select alarm value as Unoccupied in which case WebVision raises an alarm whenever the point has Unoccupied
5. 4 Click OK to confirm the deletion TIP To delete all devices at once check the All check box in the header and click Delete Set Mode to Auto Sometimes when debugging a device you set the mode to manual The Set Mode to Auto feature is a simple option to set the devices back to auto mode To set the devices to auto mode 1 Click the Devices tab The Device List page appears 2 Select the devices that you want to set to auto mode 3 Click Set Mode to Auto to set the devices to auto mode A success message appears indicating that the devices have been set to auto mode NOTE Check the Select All check box to select all the devices simultaneously Download Device Configuration Once you have made all of the necessary configuration settings to a device in WebVision you will need to download the configuration to the device To download a device 1 Click the Devices tab The Device List page appears 2 Select the devices that you want to download by checking the corresponding check boxes 3 Click Download to download the selected devices The Downloading Device Information bar indicates the progress of download 4 Click Log to view the download status NOTE Click Cancel to abort the action Upload Device Configuration You can upload device configuration from a device on to WebVision To upload configurations from a device 1 Click the Devices tab The Device List page appears 2 Select the devices wh
6. DLC Shed x lt dINoDIcShed diMinDicShed Communication Failed Frost Protect False or True False or True Invalid Config False or True Invalid Setpoint False or True Node Disabled False or True Sensor Failed False or True Smoke Emergency gt lt X X gt lt gt lt Xx False or True 147 95 7769 01 WEBVISION Table 87 VAV Il Application of Points Continued Point Name Application Mode Graphics X Alarms x Trends X Commandable x Internal Use Valid Values Default Auto Heat Morning Warmup Cool Night Purge Pre cool Off Test Emergency Heat Fan Only Free Cool Ice Maximum Heat Economy Dehumidify Calibrate Emergency Cool Emergency Steam Max Cool HVAC Load No Load Manual Mode Enable Disable Manual Suppress Alarms Unsuppress Alarms Manual Occupancy Default Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Temporary Setpoint Units C Precision 1 Min 10 0 Max 35 0 Auxiliary On Box Flow x lt x lt x lt Off or On Units L s Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 65535 0 Box Flow Control Setpoint Units L s Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 65535 0 Box Heat Flow Bypass Timer Units L s Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 65535 0 Units min Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 65535 0 DLC Shed x lt x lt x lt Restored or Shed Damper Position D
7. Nvo Cool U T M L _value Units Precision 1 Min 0 0 Max 100 0 Nvo Cool U TM L _state off On Default Nvo Heat U T M L _value Units Precision 1 Min 0 0 Max 100 0 Nvo Heat U T M L _state Nvo Bypass _value Off On Default Units Precision 1 Min 0 0 Max 100 0 Nvo Bypass _ state Nvo F T Status _ effective Set Point Off On Default Units null Precision 1 Min inf Max inf Nvo F T Status _cntrl Sensor Units null Precision 1 Min inf Max inf Nvo F T Status _reset Amount Units null Precision 1 Min inf Max inf Nvo F T Status _bypass Remaining Units null Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 65535 0 Nvo F T Status _manual Mode Nvo F T Status _effect Occupancy Nvo F T Status _sched Occupancy Enable Disable Manual Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Default Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Default 161 95 7769 01 WEBVISION Table 91 XL15C Application of Points Continued Point Name Nvo F T Status _sensor Occupancy Graphics X Alarms X Trends X Commandable Internal Use Valid Values Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Default Nvo F T Status _sys Mode Auto Heat Morning Warmup Cool Night Purge Pre cool off Test Emergency Heat Fan Only Free Cool Ice Maximum Heat Economy Dehumidify Calibrate Emergency Cool Emergency Steam Default Nvo F T Statu
8. Connect using a broadband connection that is always on This is a high speed connection using either a cable modem DSL or LAN connection It is always active and doesn t require you to sign in Fig 37 Connect using a dial up modem button 27 Qa Select the Connect using a dial up modem option and WEBVISION 7 Type the name of the service provider and click Next New Connection Wizard Connection Name What is the name of the service that provides your Internet connection Type the name of your ISP in the following box ISP Name Service Provided The name you type here will be the name of the connection you are creating Fig 38 Connection Name Service Provider 8 Type your phone number and click Next New Connection Wizard Phone Number to Dial What is your ISP s phone number Type the phone number below Phone number You might need to include a 1 or the area code or both If you are not sure you need the extra numbers dial the phone number on your telephone If you hear a modem sound the number dialed is correct Fig 39 Phone Number to Dial screen Select the required option for connection availability and click Next New Connection Wizard Connection Availability You can make the new connection available to any user or only to yourself A connection that is created for your use only is saved in your user account and is not availab
9. Procedure 1 Click the PID button on the left pane to open the PID Configuration page 2 Enter information into available fields 3 Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to the last saved settings 4 Click Next to display the Wiring Assignment page or Back to display the Miscellaneous Parameters Configuration page CAUTION Equipment Damage Possible Adjustments may cause large over or undershooting of setpoint The default values provide proper control for most systems UV PID Settings fields Table 60 Unit Ventilator PID Settings Name Definition Cooling Throttling Range Throttling Range or Proportional Gain Determines what impact the error has on the output signal Decreasing the Throttling Range amplifies the effect on the error that is for a given error the difference between the measured space temperature and the current actual space temperature setpoint a small Throttling Range causes a higher output signal value Enter the range in degrees 2 to 30 F 17 to 1 C Table 60 Unit Ventilator PID Settings Continued WEBVISION Table 60 Unit Ventilator PID Settings Continued Name Cooling Integral Time Definition Integral Time Determines what impact the error over time has on the output signal Error over time has two components that make up its value the amount of time the error exists and the size of the error The higher the
10. Standby Cool Setpoint Units C Precision 2 Min 10 0 Max 35 0 Unoccupied Cool Setpoint Units C Precision 2 Min 10 0 Max 35 0 Occupied Heat Setpoint Units C Precision 2 Min 10 0 Max 35 0 107 95 7769 01 WEBVISION Table 75 CHC Application of Points Continued Point Name Standby Heat Setpoint Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use x Valid Values Units C Precision 2 Min 10 0 Max 35 0 Unoccupied Heat Setpoint Units C Precision 2 Min 10 0 Max 35 0 Current State Default Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Next State Default Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Time To Next State DLC Shed Out Of Limits x lt Units min Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 65535 0 dlcShedDisable dicShedEnable False or True Open Circuit False or True Out Of Service Mechanical Fault False or True False or True Feedback Failure False or True Over Range Under Range False or True False or True Electrical Fault False or True Unable To Measure Command Failure False or True False or True Self Test Failed Application Mode X X X OK OK gt lt OK gt lt gt lt x False or True Default Auto Heat Morning Warmup Cool Night Purge Pre cool Off Test Emergency Heat Fan Only Free Cool Ice Maximum Hea
11. Two Pipe A unit that has only two pipes Selecting this system type limits the controller to control only one valve output and operate in a changeover mode When operating in the changeover mode the controller uses only the one valve for controlling both heating and cooling Use this configuration only when changeover operation is required Four Pipe A unit that has four pipes connected providing both heating and cooling at the same time The controller uses one output to control heating only and one output to control cooling only as configured in the Outputs page Control Outputs Configures the two control outputs for the different type of actuators and control sequences required for the application Output 1 Mode The output triac pair connected to terminals 13 14 15 of the controller Select the control sequence option to be allocated to Output 1 For four pipe applications always allocate this output to the heat option to minimize field wiring errors For two pipe applications the changeover option is the only option Heat Mode The output is modulated open when heat energy is needed in the space Cool Mode The output is modulated open when cool energy is needed in the space it is also modulated to limit the cold water temperature above dew point temperature if enabled ChangeOver Mode The output is modulated open when heat or cool energy is needed in the space In Cool Mode
12. NOTE The user should click on the device to select the device in the discovered list to do further operation on them Although mouse scrolling across the discovered devices records appear as selection they are actually not selected 8 Enter a name for each device that should appear in then UI and click Done to complete the discovery process 9 Select all the devices and click Upload to upload the device configuration onto WebVision A progress bar appears indicating the progress of the Upload operation Once the upload is complete the Synced On option is enabled for each device 10 Ensure that all the devices are in Auto mode in the Mode Column If any device is in Manual or any other mode select that device and click Set Mode to Auto 11 Click the Device Bindings sub tab next to Device List subtab 12 Click Upload to upload the LON binding information onto WebVision A progress bar appears indicating the progress of the Upload operation NOTES 1 Ensure all the devices are in Auto mode If you see any device in Manual or any other mode select that device and click Set Mode to Auto to change the mode Click Download in Devices gt Device List or Devices gt Device Bindings to initiate the process of writing configuration data that is present in WebVision to devices This operation should be performed only if it is absolutely necessary If there is no requirement to change the configuration in the devices this operatio
13. Output 1 The output triac pair connected to terminals 13 14 and 15 of the controller Mode Select the control sequence option for Output 1 For four pipe applications the heating option is recommended to minimize field wiring errors For two pipe applications the changeover option is the only selection Heat Mode _ The output is modulated open when heat energy is needed in the space Cool Mode The output is modulated open when cool energy is needed in the space ChangeOver The output is modulated open when heat or cool energy is needed in the space Mode Not Used The output is not controlled by the controller and always remains off Output 1 Select the type of actuator to be connected to the output Type Floating A three point actuator that can be commanded open or closed This type is on Terminals 14 15 and or 17 18 The run times for the actuator are configured in the Equipment Control tab Floating Mid A three point actuator that can be commanded open or closed on terminals 14 15 and or 17 18 The run times for the actuator are configured in the Outputs tab The Zero Energy Position no Heat and no Cool is the middle Position 50 The Cool Range is 0 to 50 the Heat Range 50 to 100 The Range can be reversed by selecting the Actuator Direct or Reverse Option During the Synchronization Process the fan is turned off PWM Duty cycled output where the 24VAC output is pulsed on off in the duty cycle range 0 percent to 100 percen
14. Precision 1 Min 0 0 Max 127 5 Return Air Temperature Scheduled Occupancy Sensor Occupancy Units F Precision 1 Min 256 0 Max 256 0 Default Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Default Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Shutdown x lt x lt x lt False or True Smoke Monitor Space CO2 x lt x lt x lt False or True Units ppm Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 65535 0 Space Temperature Units F Precision 1 Min 256 0 Max 256 0 Effective Setpoint Units F Precision 1 Min 256 0 Max 256 0 Window Open Closed or Open 95 7769 01 144 Excel 10 VAV II Controller VAV Il Table 86 provides the VAV II points detail and Table 87 on page 146 provides the VAV II application of points Table 86 VAV II Point Details WEBVISION Point Name Network Variable Field Point Type Occupied Cool nciSetPts occupiedCool NumericWritable Standby Cool nciSetPts standbyCool NumericWritable Unoccupied Cool nciSetPts unoccupiedCool NumericWritable Occupied Heat nciSetPts occupiedHeat NumericWritable Standby Heat nciSetPts standbyHeat NumericWritable Unoccupied Heat nciSetPts unoccupiedHeat NumericWritable Current State nviTodEvent currentState EnumWritable Next State nviTodEvent nextState EnumWritable Time To
15. amp is logic and operation and is the logic complement operation Gateway IP Address IP Address of a host that is used as a gateway by WebVision to communicate with hosts on other networks Typical scenario is when you connect to WebVision using a host on a different network using a browser DNS1 Server Name The IP Address of the host on the network that WebVision uses to resolve host name to IP Address or vice versa This service is mainly utilized by WebVision for Mail Notification and Internet Time Synchronization DNS2 Server Name The IP Address of the host on the network that WebVision uses to resolve host name to IP Address or vice versa This service is mainly utilized by WebVision for Mail Notification and Internet Time Synchronization Mac ID The unique hardware identification of a network device Map Host Name to IP Address e Click Advance Settings The Advance Settings window appears Type the Host Name It is a unique name given to a network equipment You can change it if required The host name corresponds to the MAC address e Type the IP Address It is the numerical address used to identify a device ona network Click OK Each host Name is mapped to the specified IP Address You can use either to access the device on the network Channel Info Channel Name LonNetwork name used in the WebVision Domain ID This is used to name a group of devices connected to a LonNetwork
16. x lt x lt x lt Off or On Fresh Air Ratio Units Precision 1 Min 163 8 Max 163 8 Heat Cool Switch Off or On 149 95 7769 01 WEBVISION Table 87 VAV Il Application of Points Continued Point Name Heat Cool Switch Graphics X Alarms X Trends X Commandable Internal Use Valid Values Off or On Heat Stages X X X Units null Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 3 0 IO Test In False or True IO Test Switch Off or On Low Flow Alarm False or True Manual Occupancy x x x X lt x x x X lt x X x Xx Default Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Mode Startup Wait Heat Cool Reheat Morning Warm up Night Purge Pressurize Depressurize Track Flow Manual Position Manual Flow Freeze Protect Factory Test IO Test Floating Out of Sync Disabled Manual Model Monitor Switch Units null Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 3 0 Off or On Monitor Switch x lt x lt x lt Off or On Occupancy Sensor Unoccupied Occupied Override Default Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Override IO x lt x lt x lt False or True Peripheral Heat On x lt x lt x lt Off or On Peripheral Heat Position Units Precision 1 Min 0 0 Max 100 0 Reheat Position Units Precision 1 Min 0 0 Max 100 0 9
17. 4 Click Next to display the Wiring Diagram Configuration page or Back to display the Miscellaneous Configuration page N Name Definitions Thermal Cooling Heating Switching Boost Temp Salle Sets a boost band for normal PID operation and when using thermal actuators The variables indicate a setpoint space temperature deviation outside which switches the outputs to full operation This option acts as a boost function when space temperature deviates significantly from the desired setpoint This option also serves as a threshold for two point switching of thermal actuators e The threshold can be set in the range O to 10 DDC 7 2 to 180 DDF e Ifthe threshold is set to 0 DDC the boost function is disabled FCU PID fields Table 38 FCU PID Options Name Definitions PID Cooling Heating Proportional band This value is the temperature deviation between setpoint and space temperature which causes the control output to modulate from 0 to 100 of full range e Range 2 DDC to 100 DDC 3 6 to 180 DDF for PID control respectively 1 3 to 100 DDC 2 3 to 180 DDF for P Control only Reset Time This value is the integral reset time in the range 0 to 3200 sec Setting the Integral constant to zero disables integral operation Derivative Time This value is the derivative constant in the range 0 to 3200 sec Setting the derivative constant to zero disables derivative operation 63
18. C Output Configuration page Analog Setpoint 8 10k Ohm 2 Enter information into available fields Wall Adjustment 3 Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to Module the last saved settings Connection 4 Click Next to display the Input Configuration page Only CHC Output Fields Table 8 describes the field definitions Table 8 CHC Outputs Field Definitions Name Definition Application Safety Select disable ceiling protection Condensation Protection Chilled Ceiling protection option It enables dew point calculation and condensation protection The cold water temperature value must be available either wired connected or shared via the network If the humidity value is available either connected or shared via the network the controller uses it to calculate the dew point temperature for the cold water temperature limitation otherwise it uses a settable dew point setpoint 35 95 7769 01 WEBVISION Table 8 CHC Outputs Field Definitions Continued Name Applicatio Definition n continued No Condensation Protection Disable the dew point temperature calculation and protection The cold water temperature and the humidity are not needed by the controller the chilled ceiling protection can still be performed by the condensation switch System Define the type of equipment that is being controlled in terms of the number of pipes used on the unit
19. FCU Wiring Diagram Purpose Display the wiring diagram for the controller Mode Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off line or On line Procedure 1 Click the Wiring button on the left pane to open the Wiring Configuration page 2 Enter information into available fields 3 Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to the last saved settings 4 Click Back to display the PID Configuration page FCU Wiring Terminals DI1 Window Occupancy Air Flow Changeover Table 39 FCU Wiring Diagram Name Definitions Wall Module Use these terminals to connect the Wall Module e Override LED e Setpoint e Bypass Button Room Temp Sensor 95 7769 01 WEBVISION LON Bus The terminals in Table 40 are used to connect the LON Bus FTT 10A The LON terminals are insensitive to polarity eliminating wiring errors during installation Recommended wire size is level IV 22 AWG nonshielded twisted pair solid conductor wired Table 40 LON Bus Terminal Connections Output 1 Output 2 Terminal 14 15 Terminal 17 18 Floating 14 on open valve 17 on open valve 15 on close valve 18 on close valve 1 stage 14 on off 17 on off 15 not used 18 not used 2 stage 14 on stage 1 17 on stage 1 140n 150n 17 on 18 on stage 2 stage 2 3 stage 14 on stage 1 17 on stage 1 15 on stage 2 18 on stage 2 14 on 15 on
20. Failure or Running Fan Output x X X Xx x X X Xx x x X Xx Units Precision 1 Min 163 8 Max 163 8 Fan Stages Active HW Override HW Window Open x lt x lt x lt Fan Off Fan Speed 1 Fan Speed 2 Fan Speed 3 Fan Auto Fan Default Default Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Closed or Open In Alarm x lt x lt x lt False or True Manual Occupancy Unit Status Mode Default Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Default Auto Heat Morning Warmup Cool Night Purge Pre cool Off Test Emergency Heat Fan Only Free Cool Ice Maximum Heat Economy Dehumidify Calibrate Emergency Cool Emergency Steam Max Cool HVAC Load No Load 95 7769 01 134 Table 81 HYD Application of Points Continued WEBVISION Point name HYD Status Mode Graphics X Alarms X Trends x Commandable Internal Use Valid Values Disabled Cool Heat Pressurize Depressurize Manual Mode Factory Test Mode Floating Out of Sync Fan Switch Off Startup Wait Output Position 0 Units Precision 1 Min 163 8 Max 163 8 Output Position 1 Primary Heat Output Units Precision 1 Min 163 8 Max 163 8 Units Precision 1 Min 163 8 Max 163 8 RO LED Default Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Reheat Active Reset Bypass Time Scheduled Occupancy Default Off Low Medi
21. 01 WEBVISION FCU Inputs fields Table 33 lists the FCU Inputs fields and definitions Table 33 FCU Inputs Fields Name Wall Module Definition Configures the functionality of the connected wall module Always ensure that the features configured here are the same as the features available on the wall module device to be connected Space Temp Sensor Specify whether or not the controller is to be used with a space temperature sensor connected to its input A space temperature sensor is typically used but in cases where the space temperature is supplied from another device via the network the local space temperature sensor input is not used YES The local space temperature sensor input is used Ensure that a space temperature sensor is actually connected otherwise the controller measures incorrect values NO The local space temperature sensor is not used This option must be selected when a sensor is not connected LED LCD Display Override Button This configuration defines whether a Wall Module with LED or a Wall Module with LCD Display is connected For the LED there is shown either the Override Status or the Effective Occupancy Status The LCD Display show both the Effective and the Override Status and an additional Off Condition The Override Status results from the Scheduler the Network Override the Override Button and the Occupancy Sensor The Off Condition results from the Fanspeed
22. 17 to 1 C The Proportional gain value is equivalent Cooling Setpoints Heating Setpoints Values for the occupied standby and unoccupied settings for the cooling setpoints Values for the occupied standby and unoccupied settings for the heating setpoints Limits Values for the high and low limit settings for the remote setpoint Integral Action to the throttling range Value ranges from 0 through 5 000 sec Derivative Action Value ranges from 0 255 sec Heating Throttling Range Value ranges from 2 to 30 F 17 to 1 C Integral Action Value ranges from 0 through 5 000 sec Derivative Action Value ranges from 0 255 sec Values for the Maximum Minimum Max Reheat and Standby settings for the flow setpoints Flow Setpoints Duct Settings Area of the Duct The user can choose a CustomArea option for the Diameter and enter a value for the area The valid range allowed is 0 to 4 ft or 0 to 0 372 m2 Area Diameter This list shows a predefined set of duct diameters The user can choose a diameter option and the area will be automatically calculated Or the user can choose a Custom Area option and manually enter the Area value Wall Module Setpoint Limits Values of the High Limit and Low Limit setpoints on the wall module Excel 10 VAV II PID Settings Use Table 65 to configure the Excel 10 VAV II PID value
23. C Max 85 F 45 99 F Highest the programmed Cool 29 C 7 37 C occupied cooling setpoint Occupied can be allowed Stpt e Max Occupied Cool gt Occupied Cool gt Occupied Heat 2 F 1 C T7350 Energy Management DEMAND LIMIT CONTROL BUMP Configure the DLC bump according to the heating and cooling requirement of the building from one of the options given below When a shed request is received the thermostat bumps the control set point up for cooling and down for heating by the amount this field is configured in a thermostat The shed state remains until a DLC restore command is received or network communication is lost When the unit transitions from shed to restore the set point is ramped back to the original set point over a period of 60 minutes The control only sheds when the thermostat is in the occupied mode POWER FAILURE SEQUENTIAL START Configure the value for power sequential start by choosing one of the options 0 to 150 seconds This allows the thermostat to delay start of the fan heating and cooling stages after power is restored to thermostat After a power outage it is desirable to start multiple units sequentially instead of all at once to avoid peak in power consumption DEHUMIDIFICATION Use this field to configure a dehumidification strategy If the system is in heat mode dehumidification is not allowed 95 7769 01 102 HIGH LIMIT Use this to specify the high limit for
24. Expand the list of devices on the left Floating 4 On open valve 7 On open valve pane listed under WebVision Select a device to view its 15 On close valve 18 On close valve properties 1 stage 14 On Off 17 On Off y enced TENT CVAHU Device Property Fields Table 15 lists the CVAHU device properties for each controller 2 stage 14 On stage 1 17 On stage 1 model 14 On 15 On stage 2 17 On 18 On stage 2 Table 15 XL10 CVAHU Device Properties for each Model Criteria W7750A W7750B W7750C Digital Outputs 6 Relay 8 5 Analog Outputs 0 0 3 Conventional or yes yes yes Heat pump control Stages of electric or 1 4 1 4 1 4 gas fired heating Stages of Cooling 1 4 1 4 1 4 43 95 7769 01 WEBVISION Table 15 XL10 CVAHU Device Properties for each Model Continued Criteria W7750A W7750B W7750C Heating N A Floating or Pulse width Floating Pulse width modulated modulated reverse Pulse width modulated Analog or reverse Analog Cooling N A Floating or Pulse width Floating Pulse width modulated modulated Reverse Pulse width modulated Analog or reverse Analog Mixed Air Damped Output Floating Floating or Pulse width Floating Pulse width modulated modulated Reverse Pulse Width modulated Analog or reverse Analog Optional Outputs AuxEcon OccStatus Free1 AuxEcon OccStatus Free1 AuxEcon OccStatus Free1 or Free2 Free1PulseOn Free2 Free1PulseOn reverse Free1
25. NOTE Apart from the Contractor who has all the privileges in WebVision all the users who add new schedules have access to all the schedules created by them To view schedules 1 Click the Schedule tab A list of schedules appear with the following details in a tabular format Fond Trends E Schedules Alarms WebVision Schedules Schedule Summar wi Filter Filter By None Add Schedule i Schedule Name a Schedule Type Oc Ef noon Local Occ Fig 9 Schedule Tab TIP Use Filters to quickly search the required Schedules WEBVISION Use one of the following filter options to search for the required schedule Schedule Name e Current Occupancy State TIP To quickly search the schedules type the first letter of schedule name or occupancy state as the case may be in the Keyword text box and type This lists all the names starting with the first letter that you have written in the Keyword text box e Schedule Name Indicates the name of the schedule e Schedule Type Indicates if the schedule is configured in the local system or followed from a remote system e Current Occupancy State Indicates the occupancy state as defined by the schedule at the moment NOTE A maximum of 100 devices can be assigned to a schedule e Next Occupancy State Indicates the occupancy state for the next defined schedule Time Remaining minutes Indicates the tim
26. NOTE Start time must be less than the end time 5 Click OK to view the graphical representation of the trend or click Cancel to cancel the trend Viewing plotted trends The view of the trends plotted have the following information e Plotted Trends Lists the name of the trends that are plotted e Start Time Select the start time if required End Time Select the end time if required Re Plot Trends After selecting the Start and End time select this option to re plot the trend with the new time range Download Trendlog Click this button to download trend log in csv format for the plotted trends e Ok Click Ok to go back to the View Trends screen 95 7769 01 WEBVISION Trend Setup and Use TIP You can enable or disable trends from the Trends Setup screen To setup a trend 1 Click the Trends tab The View Trends page appears 2 Click the Trend Setup tab The Trend Setup page appears El Auxiliary On vi Auxiliary On Default AM sexta vav sorron oema O cason var coronen oean f coasanson cva con tpeson veraa css vom cicsres _owreut Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel Delete Fig 20 Trend Setup tab To add a new trend 1 Click the Trends tab The View Trends page appears 2 Click the Trend Setup tab The Tr
27. Self Test In Progress False or True Locked Out Manual Control False or True False or True Programming Failed Application Mode Fan Speed State X X X OK OK X DK X OK X x X x X OOK Xx False or True Default Auto Heat Morning Warmup Cool Night Purge Pre cool off Test Emergency Heat Fan Only Free Cool Ice Maximum Heat Economy Dehumidify Calibrate Emergency Cool Emergency Steam Max Cool HVAC Load No Load Off Zero Low Medium High Auto 95 7769 01 124 Table 79 FCU Application of Points Continued WEBVISION Point name Manual Mode Graphics X Alarms X Trends Commandable X X Internal Use Valid Values Default Normal Disabled Update Status Self Test Update Alarm Report Mask Override Enable Remove Override Clear Status Clear Alarm Alarm Notify Enabled Alarm Notify Disabled Manual Control Remote Control Program Clear Reset Reset Manual Occupancy Default Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Temporary Setpoint Units C Precision 1 Min 10 0 Max 35 0 Effective Setpoint 125 Units C Precision 1 Min 273 2 Max 327 7 95 7769 01 WEBVISION Table 79 FCU Application of Points Continued Point name Alarm Type Cool Output Graphics X Alarms x Trends x Commandable Internal Use Valid Values Node
28. Table 49 LON Bus FTT 10A Terminal Connections Output 1 Output 2 Floating Terminal 14 15 14 on open valve Terminal 17 18 17 on open valve 15 on close valve 18 on close valve 1 stage 14 on off 17 on off 15 not used 18 not used 2 stage 14 on stage 1 17 on stage 1 14 on 15 on stage 2 17 on 18 on stage 2 3 stage 14 on stage 1 17 on stage 1 15 on stage 2 18 on stage 2 14 on 15 on stage 3 17 on 18 on stage 3 PWM 14 PWM 17 PWM 15 not used 18 not used Thermal 14 Pulse modulated 17 Pulse modulated 15 not used 18 not used Power Power Supply 24 Vac 50 60 Hz Configuring the Excel 10 Remote Input Output Device RIO Description The W7761A Excel 10 Remote Input Output Device RIO is a LonMark compliant device designed to monitor and control HVAC equipment lighting and other miscellaneous loads in a distributed network Usage In this version of the wizard only the Excel 15 W7760A Building Manager uses the RIO Application The RIO communicates with other controller nodes monitoring devices and engineering tools using the LonWorks Bus RIOs provide inputs analog and digital and outputs digital to any node on the LonWorks Bus Refer to Excel 10 W7761A Remote Input Output Device Specification Data form 74 2698 Excel 10 W7761A Remote Input Output Device Installation Instructions form 95 7539 or Excel 1
29. Units min Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 65535 0 95 7769 01 112 Table 75 CHC Application of Points Continued WEBVISION Point Name Scheduled Occupancy Graphics X Alarms x Trends x Commandable Internal Use Valid Values Default Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Secondary Heat Output Units Precision 1 Min 163 8 Max 163 8 Sensor Occupancy Default Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Space Temperature Units C Precision 1 Min 273 2 Max 327 7 Terminal Load 113 Units Precision 1 Min 163 8 Max 163 8 95 7769 01 WEBVISION Constant Volume Air Handling Unit Controller CVAHU Table 76 provides the CVAHU points detail and Table 77 on page 115 provides the CVAHU application of points Table 76 CVAHU Point Details Display Name Network Variable Field Name Point Type Occupied Cool nciTempSetPts occupiedCool NumericWritable Standby Cool nciTempSetPts standbyCool NumericWritable Unoccupied Cool nciTempSetPts unoccupiedCool NumericWritable Occupied Heat nciTempSetPts occupiedHeat NumericWritable Standby Heat nciTempSetPts standbyHeat NumericWritable Unoccupied Heat nciTempSetPts unoccupiedHeat NumericWritable Current State nviTodEvent currentState EnumWritable Next State nviTodEvent nextState EnumWritable Time To Next Sta
30. When Reset Temp Setpt and Reheat option are selected the wizard displays a warning message but proceeds with this configuration RECOVERY The thermostat allows the adaptive intelligent recovery ramp to the next setpoint during schedule mode changes Use the Setpoints screen to configure the recovery parameters Set point recovery will apply to set point changes associated with the following schedule mode changes e Unoccupied to Standby e Unoccupied to Occupied Setpoint changes from occupied mode or standby mode to unoccupied mode occupied mode to standby mode and standby to occupied will use a step change in setpoint The heating or cooling recovery ramp will begin before the next mode transition time During the recovery ramps the heating and cooling set points will be ramped from the existing mode setpoint to the next mode setpoint There are two standard options available for choosing the heating and cooling ramp rates Single Recovery and Variable Recovery Ramp Rate For heating or cooling recovery minimum and maximum recovery ramp rates are provided Making both of these the same is called Single Recovery Making these rates different is called Variable Recovery MINIMUM RAMP RATE Minimum Cool and heat recovery ramp rates are selectable from 0 to 20 DDF hr 0 to 11 DDC hr A ramp rate of 0 means no recovery ramp the setpoint steps from one setpoint to the other The recovery ramp rate will vary as a function of
31. click Cancel To insert a point 1 Click the Insert Point button The Insert Point dialog box appears Insert Point Chanel CC Temporary Setpoint Commandable a Fig 6 Insert Point dialog box 2 Select the Channel Device and Point that you want to add to the graphic from the corresponding drop down lists 3 Click OK The Point properties are displayed in the background image NOTE To abort the action click Cancel 95 7769 01 4 To insert text 1 Click the Insert Text button A Text Message box appears Text Message EditText OK Cancel eee Fig 7 Text Message Box 2 Type the required text in the Edit Text field 3 Click Save to reflect the changes in the image NOTE To abort the action click Cancel To insert an external link 1 Click the Insert External Link button The Add Link dialog box appears Select ov Cancel Fig 8 Add Link dialog box 2 Select a link from the Link To drop down list You can select from Device Graphics Locations Graphics or an External URL 3 If you select the Device Graphics option the Insert Device dialog box appears Select a Channel and Device and click OK 4 If you select the Locations Graphics option the Add Link dialog box appears Check the locations that you want to add as link and click OK 5 If you select the External URL option the Insert External Link dialog box appears Type the Display name for the url an
32. multi stage compressor Heat and cool sequences can be selected to be active or not active giving a total of four different sequence options e Heat only e Cool only e Heat cool changeover e Heat and cool sequence Modes Of Operation The controller has the following modes of operation Occupied mode This is the normal operating condition for a room or zone when it is occupied The controller can be switched into this mode by a network command by the room occupancy sensor or by a bypass button on the wall module Standby mode The standby mode saves energy by reducing heating or cooling demand during periods where the room is temporarily unoccupied Table 42 Hydronic Controll WEBVISION Unoccupied mode This mode is used for longer unoccupied periods such as at night or during weekends and holidays Window open If the controller is configured for window open detection the controller automatically disables heat and cool control until the window is closed again Frost protection remains active Frost protection If the temperature drops below 46 F 8 C the controller enables the heating circuit as frost protection Fan fail When configured with an air flow detector the controller protects equipment by disabling the system when the fan fails for fan coil units with manual fan speed control Changeover The controller operates two pipe units configured with a changeover input HYD Inputs Outp
33. the controller uses only the one valve for controlling both heating and cooling Use this configuration only when changeover operation is required Four Pipe Fan A fan coil unit that has four pipes connected providing both heating and cooling at the same time The fan coil controller uses one output to control heating only and one output to control cooling only as configured in the control outputs Equipment Control page Select the number of stages required for the fan output Relay 4 Reheat Free Use Select the use of the fourth relay for those controller types with four relays This relay is normally used for electric reheat but can also be used for switching equipment not directly controlled by the fan coil controller The relay is switched on when the control algorithm demands electrical reheat as defined in the Reheat Options Equipment Control tab The relay is switched on and off as commanded from the network It is not controlled by the internal fan coil controller temperature control algorithm Rel Not Used The Relay is not switched by the fan coil controller and cannot be commanded via the network 95 7769 01 56 WEBVISION Table 32 FCU Outputs Fields and Definitions Continued Field Definition Control Configures the two control outputs for the different type of actuators and control sequences required for the Outputs application
34. the output is modulated to limit the cold water temperature above the dew point temperature if enabled Not Used The output is not controlled by the controller and is always off Output1 Type Select the type of actuator to be connected to the output Floating A three point actuator that can be commanded open or closed It is on terminals 14 15 and or 17 18 The run times for the actuator are configured in the Outputs page Floating A three point actuator that can be commanded open or closed on terminals 14 15 and or 17 18 The run times for the actuator are configured in the Outputs page The Zero Energy Position no Heat and no Cool is the middle Position 50 The Cool Range is 0 to 50 the Heat Range 50 to 100 The Range can be reversed by selecting the Actuator Direct or Reverse Option During the Synchronization Process the fan is turned off PWM A duty cycled output where the 24VAC output is pulsed on off in the duty cycle range 0 to 100 This actuator drives output terminal 14 and or 17 One Stage A single stage on off output It switches terminals 14 and or 17 Two Stage A two stage output Terminals 14 17 are switched for stage 1 and terminals 15 18 are switched for stage 2 95 7769 01 36 WEBVISION Table 8 CHC Outputs Field Definitions Continued Name Definition Control Outputs continued Three Stage A th
35. 01 WEBVISION Table 47 Hydronic PID Parameters Continued Name Definition Thermal Cooling Heating Switching Boost Temp Band PID Sets a boost band for normal PID operation and when using thermal actuators The variables indicate a Boost setpoint space temperature deviation outside which the outputs are switched to full operation to act as a boost function when space temperature deviates significantly from the desired setpoint These values also serve as a threshold for two point switching of thermal actuators e The threshold can be set in the range 0 to 10 DDC 7 2 to 180 DDF e If the threshold is set to 0 DDC the boost function is disabled HYD Wiring LON Bus The terminals in Table 49 are used to connect the LON Bus Purpose FTT 10A The LON terminals are insensitive to polarity To display the wiring diagram for the Hydronic controller Mode Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off line or On line Procedure 1 Click the Wiring button on the left pane to open the Wiring Configuration page 2 Enter information into available fields 3 Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to the last saved settings 4 Click Back to display the PID Configuration page HYD Wiring fields DI1 Window Occupancy Air Flow Changeover Table 48 HYD Wiring Diagram Definition Name Wall Module Override LED Setpoint Bypass Button Room Temp Sensor 95 7769 01 72
36. 1 and terminal 15 18 is switched for stage 2 THREE_STAGE Three stage switched output Terminal 14 17 is switched for stage 1 terminal 15 18 is switched for stage 2 Both terminals 14 15 and or 17 18 are switched for stage 3 THERMAL Switched on off output for switching a 24V thermal actuator on terminal 14 17 95 7769 01 66 WEBVISION Table 43 Hydronic Controller Types and Outputs Continued Name Definition Control Output 2 Mode Outputs Output triac pair connected to terminals 16 17 18 of the controller cont Select the control sequence option to be allocated to output 2 For four pipe applications always allocate this output to the cool option to minimize field wiring errors For two pipe applications you can select only the changeover option Output 2 Type Selection options are the same as for Output 1 HYD Inputs Procedure 1 Click the Inputs button on the left pane to open the Input Configuration page Purpose p 2 Enter information into available fields Ee wall module parameters and input points for a 3 Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to controller the last saved settings 4 Click Next to display the Equipment Control Mode Configuration page or Back to display the Output Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off line or Configuration page On line HYD Inputs fields Table 44 Wall Module and Hydronic Controller Inputs Name D
37. 1 through 6 Specify up to six analog inputs four resistive two voltage UNUSED DISCHARGE_TEMP_PT3000 OUTDOOR_TEMP_PT3000 RETURN_TEMP_PT3000 DISCHARGE_TEMP_20KNTC RETURN_TEMP_20KNTC SPACE_TEMP_T7700 Al1 4 Name After configuring a resistive analog input enter a descriptive name up to 18 characters Resistive UNUSED FIL_ST_PRESS_DIFF_Al MONITOR_SENSOR1_Al OD_HUM_C7600B_Al OD_HUM_C7600C_Al OUTDOOR _ENTH LPY_AI RETURN_ENTHALPY_Al RTN_HUM_C7600B_Al RTN_HUM_C7600C_AI SPACE_CO2_ Al AI5 6 Name After configuring a voltage analog input enter a descriptive name up to 18 characters Voltage Digital Inputs 1 through 4 Select ACTIVE_SHORT or ACTIVE_OPEN For each Digital Input configured specify MAINTAINED or MOMENTARY e Maintained contact closure A maintained contact closure is where the monitored contact input changes condition and remains e Momentary contact closure A momentary contact closure is where the monitored contact input only needs to stay in one condition for 1 second minimum DI1 4 Name After configuring a digital input enter a descriptive name up to 18 characters RIO Outputs Use Table 51 to configure the RIO outputs Purpose Control points through the RIO using the outputs Configure up to eight outputs 95 7769 01 WEBVISION Mode Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off line or On line Procedure 1 Click the Out
38. 17 on 18 on stage 3 stage 3 PWM 14 PWM 17 PWM 15 not used 18 not used Thermal 14 Pulse modulated 17 Pulse modulated 15 not used 18 not used Output Characteristics 24 Vac 250 mA max continuous 650 mA max surge Fan Relays These terminals are used to connect a Fan Characteristics 20 to 253 Vac 3 A max Power Mains In POWER SUPPLY W7752D and W7752E 230 Vac 10 15 50 60Hz W7752F and W7752G 115 Vac 10 15 50 60 Hz POWER CONSUMPTION W7752D and W7752E 30 VA max W7752F and W7752G 30 VA max Operational temperature 32 to 122 F 0 to 50 C Reheat Relay These terminals connect an Electric Reheat Characteristics 20 to 200 Vac 10 A max 95 7769 01 64 Configuring Hydronic Controllers HYD Description The W7762A and B Controllers are Hydronic Controllers in the Excel 10 product line They cover a wide range of control applications including radiators induction units and fan coil units with manual fan switching and are suitable for either wall mounting or unit mounting The controllers can operate as stand alone units or networked using the standard Echelon LONWORKS bus Interfaces are provided for a wide range of actuator types Heating systems can be water or electric and cooling systems can be chilled water supply or compressors Extensive timing and interlock features make the W7762 especially suitable for systems using electric heat and compressors Feature
39. 3 Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to the last saved settings 4 Click Next to display the Equipment Control Configuration page or Back to display the Output Configuration page UV Inputs fields Table 54 Unit Ventilator Inputs Name Definition Space Temp Select one of the following Space Temp sensor type options e Unused e TR21 or TR23 wall module e UseReturn Temp e UseDischarge Temp Select Physical Sensor Wall Module or LCD Wall Module or Network Sensor Signal NOTE The LCD Wall Module is supported by the devices whose version is v1 00 10 or above Optional User address es for four optional digital Digital Points jinput points D1 DI2 DI3 DI4 Select one of the following options UnUnsedDi OccSensor usually a motion detector laqOverrideln SmokeMonitor DirtyFilterIn ShutDown shuts down and disables automatic temperature control e WindowOpen e Monitor generic switch input to be sent out over the LonWorks Bus network e CoilFreezeStat e AqstatMakeTmpRise make on Temperature Rise e AqstatBreakTmpRise break on Temperature Rise e TimeClock e DripPanFull locks out cooling when contacts are made e EconEnable Economizer enabled when contacts are made 95 7769 01 76 Table 54 Unit Ventilator Inputs Continued Name Definition Optional User address es for analog points Two Analog Points resistive
40. 4 P P P Setpoints temporary 3 Override Schedule 4 P P P Occupancy 4 View Graphics P P P Privilege Depends Facility ID Privileges On Contractor Manager Tenant Graphics continued 5 Edit Graphics 4 P xb X 6 Add Graphics 4 P X X 7 Schedules P P P 8 View Summary P P P Screen 9 View Schedule 9 P P P Configuration 10 Add Schedule 9 P X X Configuration 11 Edit Schedule 10 P P P Configuration 12 Delete Schedule 9 P X X Configuration 13 Assign Devices to 9 11 12 P X X Schedule 14 Alarms P P P 15 View Alarms P P P Summary 16 Acknowledge 16 P P X Alarms 1 Delete Alarms 16 P X X 1 View Alarms P P X Configurations Summary 19 View Alarm 19 P P X Configurations 20 Add Alarm 19 P X X Configurations 21 Edit Alarm 20 P P X Configurations 22 Delete Alarm 19 P X X Configurations 23 Download Alarm 16 P P X Records as CSV Files 24 Suppress Alarms 19 P P X 25 Setup Alarm E P P X mail Notifications 26 View Priority 1 16 ce C C Alarms 27 View Priority 2 16 C C C Alarms 28 View Priority 3 16 C C C Alarms 29 View Priority 4 16 C C C Alarms 30 View Priority 5 16 C C C Alarms 31 View Priority 6 16 C C C Alarms 13 95 7769 01 WEBVISION Table 3 Role Matrix Continued Table 3 Role Matrix Continued
41. All to view all the alarms simultaneously 15 95 7769 01 WEBVISION 5 Click the Access on this WebVision tab The Access on this WebVision page appears You can select various options from Device Access Schedule Access and Locations View Access Check Select All to select all the options simultaneously Use this option to assign customized access to users WebVision Users gt Add User Fig 23 Access on this WebVision page 6 Click Save to save the user properties To edit a user Select a user from the User list and make the required changes as explained in the above section To delete users NOTE Any user who has user management privileges can add or remove a user 1 On the Users page click the name of the user you want to delete from Users Name column 2 Click Delete A confirmation message appears 3 Click OK to confirm the deletion IMPORTANT SysAdmin is a user account with contractor privileges that cannot be deleted A SysAdmin s privileges cannot be altered This is to ensure that there is at least one contractor available in the system To enable disable a user e Click Enable to enable a user e Click Disable to disable a user Devices Device List You can view all the devices present in WebVision All the information related to name type status and so on is available 95 7769 01 16 To view the list of devices 1 Click the Devices tab The Device List pa
42. DLC Note that WebVision supported only one Setpoint as against three in XL15B Configuration should be done accordingly 5 Special Graphics Special Graphics in XL15B can be created as Locations and Graphics on Locations in WebVision Network Time Master functionality Internet Time Synchronization Alarm Emailing User accounts Home Page graphics and Login Page graphics ES PN 1 Decommissioning T7300 Following are the considerations for de commissioning T7300 1 Ifthe devices on the Lon network are following schedule in T7300 then a similar schedule should be created in WebVision and assign those devices to follow schedule created in WebVision The schedule configuration can be referred in LonSpec and has to be manually created in WebVision 2 If T7300 is acting as Network Time Master the Network Time Master Functionality in WebVision has to be enabled Once enabled WebVision will synchronize the clocks on all supported devices with Real Time Clocks that can be updated over the Lon network T7350 Changes WebVision supports configuration and management of T7350 1 Ifa T7350 exists at the site and is driving scheduled occupancy state of other devices the user should ensure that none of the schedules in WebVision drive 95 7769 01 30 the occupancy state of those controllers that are following T7350 If WebVision has to drive the occupancy state of those controllers user should first unassign them from T7350 i
43. Emergency Cool Emergency Steam Default Nvo St Stp Status _dlc Status False or True Nvo St Stp Status _ out Status Nvo Bypass Arb _ override Priority Off or On False or True Nvo Bypass Arb _wall Mod Override x x gt lt gt lt x x gt lt gt lt x gt lt gt lt gt lt Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Default Nvo Bypass Arb _bypass Timer Units null Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 65535 0 Nvo Bypass Arb _occ Timer Nvo Bypass Arb _ schedule X Units null Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 255 0 Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Default Nvo Bypass Arb _occ Sensor Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Default Nvo Bypass Arb _man Override Nvo Bypass Arb _ eff Occ State Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Default Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Default Nvo Bypass Arb _bypass State Units null Precision 0 Min 128 0 Max 127 0 95 7769 01 164 Table 91 XL15C Application of Points Continued WEBVISION Point Name Nvo A I Cnt _ai Chan1 Sensor Graphics X Alarms X Trends X Commandable Internal Use Valid Values Units null Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 65535 0 Nvo A I Cnt _ai Chan2 Sensor Units null Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 65535 0 Nvo A Cnt _ai Chan3 Sensor Units null Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 65535 0 Nvo A Cnt _ai Chan4 Sensor Units null Precision 0 M
44. Input is configured as Resistive or Voltage The measurement types are listed here When you select an Engineering Units option the corresponding Engineering unit appear in the Sen sor fields e Type the Input Low Input High Output Low and Output High The following fields are available Input Low Input High e Output Low e Output High For standard sensors like PT_3000 20 _KNTC and so on the values are filled in automatically NOTE f Select the Input Type if the input is to be shared across the network The following Input Types are available e Other OutdoorAirTemp e OutdoorAirHumidity e DischargeAirTemp The type selection can be made based on the selected sensor For example if the selected sensor is PT_3000 the type cannot be OutdoorAirHumidity An Input type assigned to one Analog Input cannot be used again for another Analog Input For example if you select OutdoorAirTemp for Analog Input_1 it cannot be a selection of any other Analog Input To select OutdoorAirTemp for say Analog_Input_2 the selection for Analog_Input_1 needs to be changed to Other 3 To configure the Digital Inputs a Click the Digital Inputs tab b Select the digital channel from Select Input c Type a name in Input Name d Select required input from Input Kind The input kind can be one of the following types e Unconfigured e DigitalMaintained e DigitalMomentary e Counter Slow They are capable of counting the
45. Next State nviTodEvent timeToNextState NumericWritable DLC Shed nviDIcShed dicShed EnumWritable Communication Failed nvoAlarmStatus CommFail EnumPoint Frost Protect nvoAlarmStatus FrostProtect EnumPoint Invalid Config nvoAlarmStatus InvalidConfig EnumPoint Invalid Setpoint nvoAlarmStatus InvalidSetpoint EnumPoint Node Disabled nvoAlarmStatus NodeDisabled EnumPoint Sensor Failed nvoAlarmStatus SensorFail EnumPoint Smoke Emergency nvoAlarmStatus SmokeEmergency EnumPoint Application Mode nviApplicMode hvacMode EnumWritable Manual Mode nviManualMode manMode EnumWritable Manual Occupancy nviManOcc occupancy EnumWritable Temporary Setpoint nviSetPoint tempP NumericWritable Auxiliary On nvoData AuxOn EnumPoint Box Flow nvoData uiBoxFlowSO NumericPoint Box Flow Control Setpoint nvoData uiBoxFlowControlPtSO NumericPoint Box Heat Flow nvoData uiBoxHeatFlowS0O NumericPoint Bypass Timer nvoData BypassTimer NumericPoint DLC Shed nvoData DicShed EnumPoint Damper Position nvoData ubDamperPosS1 NumericPoint Digital In 1 nvolO Digitalln1 EnumPoint Digital In 2 nvolO Digitalln2 EnumPoint Digital In 3 nvolO Digitalln3 EnumPoint Digital Out 1 nvolO DigitalOut1 EnumPoint Digital Out 2 nvolO DigitalOut2 EnumPoint Digital Out 3 nvolO DigitalOut3 EnumPoint Digital Out 4 nvolO DigitalOut4 EnumPoint Digital Out 5 nvolO DigitalOut5 EnumPoint Digital Out 6 nvolO DigitalOut6 EnumPoint Digital Out 7 nvolO DigitalOut7 EnumPoint Digital Out 8 nvolO DigitalOut8 EnumPoint Disc
46. Off Frost Invalid Setpoint Temperature Sensor Restored Setpoint Knob Restored Fan Speed Switch Restored Fan Normal SpaceTemp Com Restored HVAC Mode Com Restored Setpoint Offset Com Restored Sched Occ Com Restored DLC Communication Restored rtnComfailTempreset Outdoor Temp Com Restored Occ Sensor Com Restored Window Com Restored Manual Heat Com Restored Manual Cool Com Restored rtnHwSwMismatch rtnReserve020 rtnReserve021 rtnReserve022 rtnReserve023 rtnReserve024 Alarm Notify Disabled No Alarm Node Off Frost Invalid Setpoint Temperature Sensor Failed Setpoint Knob Failed Fan Speed Switch Failed Fan Failure SpaceTemp Com Failed HVAC Mode Com Failed Setpoint Offset Com Failed Sched Occ Com Failed DLC Communication Failed almComfailTempreset Outdoor Temp Com Failed Occ Sensor Com Failed Window Com Failed Manual Heat Com Failed Manual Cool Com Failed almHwSwMismatch almReserve020 almReserve021 almReserve022 almReserve023 almReserve024 Units Precision 1 Min 163 8 Max 163 8 DLC Shed x lt x lt x lt Restored or Shed Economizer Output Units Precision 1 Min 163 8 Max 163 8 95 7769 01 126 Table 79 FCU Application of Points Continued WEBVISION Point name Effective Occupancy Graphics X Alarms X Trends X Commandable Internal Use Valid Values Default Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Effective
47. Purpose Display the wiring diagram for the controller Mode Configuration can be performed with the device Off line or On line Procedure 1 Click the Wiring Diagram button on the left pane to open the Wiring Diagram Configuration page 2 Enter information into available fields 3 Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to the last saved settings 4 Click Back to display the Custom Wiring page 89 WEBVISION NOTE Fields appearing grayed out indicate those fields that change based on the Model Type selected on the Configuration page Configuring the Vacon NX Frequency Converter NXVFD VACON NX frequency converter NXVFD is an electronic device for control of speed and torque of three phase alternating current AC motors NXVFD converts the fixed frequency and voltage of the main supply mains to a variable frequency and voltage which can then be regulated to provide flexible motor operation and reduce energy consumption VACON NX frequency converters can be connected to the LonWorks network using a field bus board The VACON NXOPTC4 option board is equipped with an FTT 10A transceiver supporting the Free Topology transformer coupled network which allows the network wire to be connected as bus star loop or combination of these The converter can then be controlled monitored and programmed from the Host system The LonWorks board shall be installed in slot E on the control board of the frequency conv
48. State nviTodEvent timeToNextState NumericWritable DLC Shed nviDIcShed DicShed EnumWritable Out Of Limits nvoStatus outOfLimits BooleanPoint Open Circuit nvoStatus openCircuit BooleanPoint Out Of Service nvoStatus outOfService BooleanPoint Mechanical Fault nvoStatus mechanicalFault BooleanPoint Feedback Failure nvoStatus feedbackFailure BooleanPoint Over Range nvoStatus overRange BooleanPoint Under Range nvoStatus underRange BooleanPoint Electrical Fault nvoStatus electricalFault BooleanPoint Unable To Measure nvoStatus unableToMeasure BooleanPoint Communication Failure nvoStatus comm Failure BooleanPoint Fail Self Test nvoStatus failSelfTest BooleanPoint Self Test In Progress nvoStatus selffestInProgress BooleanPoint Locked Out nvoStatus lockedOut BooleanPoint Manual Control nvoStatus manualControl BooleanPoint Programming Failed nvoStatus programmingFail BooleanPoint Application Mode nviApplicMode hvacMode EnumWritable Temporary Setpoint nviSetPoint tempP NumericWritable Fan Speed Value nviFanSpeedCmd value NumericWritable Fan Speed State nviFanSpeedCmd state EnumWritable Manual Occupancy nviManOccCmd occupancy EnumWritable Effective Occupancy nvoFcuStatus effectOcc EnumPoint HW Override nvoFcuStatus hwOverride EnumPoint Scheduled Occupancy nvoFcuStatus schedOcc EnumPoint Effective Sensor Occupancy nvoFcuStatus effSenOcc EnumPoint Manual Occupancy nvoFcuStatus netManOcc EnumPoint Senso
49. Switch the Window Contact and the Medium from nviApplicMode LED Override The LED shows the Override from the Override Button or from the Network On indicates Override Bypass 1 Flash per Second indicates Override Unoccupied 2 Flashes per Second indicates Override Standby or Occupied 4 Flashes indicates the Controller answers of the Network Management Command Wink LED Occupancy The LED shows the effective Occupancy Mode On indicates effective Occupied or Bypass 1 Flash per Second indicates effective Standby Off indicates effective Unoccupied 4 Flashes indicates the Controller answers of the Network Management Command Wink LCD Display This mode is used only for a Wall Module with LCD Display The Display has following Symbols to show the Occupancy Modes Sun indicates effective Occupied or Bypass Half Sun indicates effective Standby Moon indicates effective Unoccupied No Symbol and OFF in 7 Segment indicates the Controller is Off In the Off Mode a Snow Flag indicates whether Frost Protection is configured Blinking Symbols are used to show the Override Blinking Sun indicates Override Occupied or Bypass blinking Half Sun indicates Override Standby Blinking Moon indicates override unoccupied The Controller answers with the Network Management Command Wink with blinking Sun and Moon Define how the override button on the connected wall module is to be used None The wall module button is not used for bypass function BYPASS U
50. Temperature Cooling Heating Setpoints Occupied Setpoints during Occupied mode Setpoints can range from 10 to 35 C 50 to 95 F Standby Setpoints during Standby mode Setpoints can range from 10 to 35 C 50 to 95 F 95 7769 01 62 Table 36 FCU Zone Control Options Continued Name Definitions Unoccupied Setpoints during Unoccupied mode Setpoints can range from 10 to 35 C 50 to 95 F FCU Miscellaneous Purpose To configure energy management parameters Mode Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off line or On line Procedure 1 Click the Miscellaneous button on the left pane to open the Miscellaneous Parameters Configuration page 2 Enter information into available fields 3 Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to the last saved settings 4 Click Next to display the PID Configuration page or Back to display the Zone Control Configuration page FCU Miscellaneous fields Table 37 FCU Miscellaneous Field Options Name Definitions Miscellaneous Configures operator bypass and priority options Bypass Time Define the period of time 0 to 1080 minutes in which the controller operates to occupied setpoints after the local user has pressed the override button Override Priority Allocate priority between local wall module operations for example Bypass and commands from the building management central Choices
51. Use the following procedure to configure the network setup 1 Click the Systems tab The System page with General Properties appears 2 Click Network Setup The Network Setup page appears 3 Enter select the following details e IP Settings Host Name Host Name is the name of the WebVision on TCP IP network This name is used to find WebVision on the network with the help of the DNS server Domain Name of the domain in which WebVision exists DHCP To assign IP addresses dynamically NOTE Since the IP address changes frequently it is not possible to communicate with other WebVision applications on the network 25 IP WEBVISION Settings continued IP Address A 32 bit address used to identify WebVision on IP network This address is typically represented in dotted decimal notation with the decimal value of each octet separated by a period for example 192 168 0 1 HTTP Port Enter the port number The default port number is 80 If the port number entered is other than 80 then you must type the application s URL followed by the port number For example http 199 63 24 224 81 Network Mask This is used to separate Network Address and Host Address from IP Address in an IP network For example IP address 192 168 1 100 Network Mask 255 255 255 0 IP Address amp Network Mask Network Address 192 168 1 0 IP Address amp Network Mask Host Address 0 0 0 100 where
52. WebVision cannot validate the dates you enter for a special event No error is shown if you configure wrong dates for special event provided the dates are in the specified format Delete Schedules To delete a schedule 1 Click the Schedule tab 2 Select the check box corresponding to the schedule you want to delete from the Schedules Name list 3 Click Delete A confirmation message appears 4 Click OK to confirm the deletion NOTE Click Cancel to cancel deletion TIP To delete all schedules at once check the All check box in the header and click Delete Replicate Schedule You can replicate one schedule at a time A maximum of 10 copies of the selected schedule can be replicated Click Replicate to replicate that schedule To replicate a schedule 1 Click the Schedule tab 2 Click Replicate The Replicate Schedule box is displayed 3 Enter the number of copies that you want to create 4 Add a prefix or suffix to the new replicated schedule s name in the Label text box 5 Click OK to confirm the replication NOTE Click Cancel to cancel replication 95 7769 01 WEBVISION Alarms Viewing alarms A device configured with alarm settings is set when the value of a point satisfies the alarm condition of that device Use the Alarms tab to view and acknowledge alarms that are raised on various devices You can filter alarms based on occurrence acknowledgment status ack time RTN time priority and
53. X X Off On Default Nvi Man Occ _ occupancy X X X Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Default 159 95 7769 01 WEBVISION Table 91 XL15C Application of Points Continued Point Name Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use Valid Values Nvi Bypass _ value X X X X Units Precision 1 Min 0 0 Max 100 0 Nvi Bypass _state X X X X off On Default Nvi Man Occ _occupancy X X X X Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Default Nvo A I Sensor _ai Val X X X Units null Precision 1 Min inf Max inf Nvo Remote Cmd _lev Percent X X X Units Precision 1 Min 163 8 Max 163 8 Nvo Dig Cmd Free _value X X X Units Precision 1 Min 0 0 Max 100 0 Nvo Dig Cmd Free _state X X X off On Default Nvo Appl Mode _hvac Mode X X X Default Auto Heat Morning Warmup Cool Night Purge Pre cool off Test Emergency Heat Fan Only Free Cool Ice Maximum Heat Economy Dehumidify Calibrate Emergency Cool Emergency Steam Max Cool HVAC Load No Load Nvo Econ Enable _ value X X X Units Precision 1 Min 0 0 Max 100 0 Nvo Econ Enable _state X X X off On Default 95 7769 01 160 Table 91 XL15C Application of Points Continued WEBVISION Point Name Nvo Occupancy _occupancy Graphics X Alarms X Trends X Commandable Internal Use Valid Values Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Default
54. and two voltage sensors are available Select one of the following resistive options UnUsedRai OutDoorTempPt3000 Discharge TempPt3000 ReturnTempPt3000 MixedAirTempPt3000 FanSwitch DischargeTemp20kntc ReturnTemp20kntc MixedAirTemp20kntc Select one of the following voltage options UnusedVai RtnHumidityC7600C ReturnEnthalpy OdHumC7600C OutdoorEnthalpy OutdoorCO FilterStaticPressDiff SpaceCO2 OutdoorCO2 MonitorSensor1 RtnHumC7600B OdHumC7600B RtnHumidityH76721 31 OdHumidityH76721 31 NOTES 1 If you configured a floating or PWM economizer see UV Outputs on page 75 you MUST select a Discharge Air sensor to enable automatic damper control 2 The RtnHumidityH7621 31 and OdHumidityH7621 31 humidity sensors for voltage inputs are supported by UVs whose versions are 1 01 10 and above 3 The DischTemp20KNTC sensor can be used to report valid temperatures up to 180 F This is applicable for UVs whose versions are 1 01 10 and above UV Equipment Control Options Use Table 55 to configure the Unit Ventilator Equipment Control cascade fan and smoke control options Purpose Define Equipment Control parameters that the Excel 10 Controller uses to control the unitary equipment Mode Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off line or On line Procedure 1 Click the Equipment Control button on the left pane to open the Equipment Control Configuration page 2 Enter inform
55. as its value Select Alarm value This option is available for enum and boolean values Select the required alarm value from the drop down list e Limits High Limit Select or type the higher limit of a device beyond which an alarm is raised e Low Limit Select or type the lower limit of the device below which an alarm is raised NOTE For numeric values Limits are listed and for enum and boolean values the Select Alarm Value is listed Description Description of the alarm Set Priority As Indicates the priority of the alarm Set 1 for low priority and 10 for High priority It can be Low Medium or High Priority is configured depending on the device s configurations and settings Enable Click Yes to enable the alarm along with its configuration Checking this option displays the alarm in the View Alarms page Click No to disable the alarm 5 Click Save to save the settings To edit an alarm configuration 1 Select an alarm from the alarm s list to edit it The selected alarm s details appear 2 Modify the required fields as described in step 4 of To add new alarms 3 Click Save to save the settings NOTE You can enable or disable an alarm from the Alarm Setup screen For example click from the table on the Alarm Setup page to disable an alarm To delete an alarm 1 Click the Alarms tab The View Alarms page appears 2 Select the check box corresponding to the alarm you wa
56. cooling operation or reducing the setpoint during heating operation the controller reduces the amount of heat or cool energy dissipated as a contribution to load shed algorithms The parameter can be set in the range 0 to 10DDC 0 to 18DDF Coo I Rec Ramp Heat Rec Ramp Define the rate at which the setpoint is reset during changes between occupancy modes to provide a form of optimum start algorithm CHC PID Purpose Configure the variables for closed loop control PID parameters can be set separately for both heating and cooling Procedure 1 Click the PID button on the left pane to open the PID Configuration page 2 Enter information into available fields Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to the last saved settings control 4 Click Next to display the Wiring Configuration page or Back to display the Miscellaneous Configuration Mode page Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off line or On line CHC PID settings Table 12 describes the settings Table 12 CHC PID Settings Name Setting and Definition PID Coo ling Heating Allows the algorithm control parameters to be configured Proportional band This value is the temperature deviation between setpoint and space temperature which causes the control output to modulate from 0 to 100 of full range The variable can be set in the range 2 to 100DDC 3 6 to 180DDF 1 3 to 1OODDC 2 3DDF to 180DD
57. data StPtLp4Alm BooleanPoint Nvo Alarm Status _ St Pt Lp3 Alm nvoAlarmStatus data StPtLp3Alm BooleanPoint Nvo Alarm Status _ St Pt Lp2 Alm nvoAlarmStatus data StPtLp2Alm BooleanPoint Nvo Alarm Status _ St Pt Lp1 Alm nvoAlarmStatus data StPtLp1Alm BooleanPoint Nvo Alarm Status _ R A M Checksum Alm nvoAlarmStatus data RAMChecksumAlm BooleanPoint Nvo Alarm Status _ File Alm nvoAlarmStatus data FileAlm BooleanPoint Nvo Alarm Status _ Input Rem Poll Alm nvoAlarmStatus data InputRemPollAlm BooleanPoint Nvo Alarm Status _ Flash Chksum Alm nvoAlarmStatus data FlashChksumAlm BooleanPoint Nvo Alarm Status _ Sensor Alm nvoAlarmStatus data SensorAlm BooleanPoint Nvo Alarm Status _ Input N V Alm nvoAlarmStatus data InputNVAlm BooleanPoint Nvo Alarm Status _ St Pt Lp10 Alm nvoAlarmStatus data StPtLp10Alm BooleanPoint Nvo Alarm Status _ St Pt Lp9 Alm nvoAlarmStatus data StPtLp9Alm BooleanPoint Nvo A I Cnt _ai Chan1 Sensor nvoAlCnt data aiChan1Sensor NumericPoint Nvo A I Cnt _ai Chan2 Sensor nvoAlCnt data aiChan2Sensor NumericPoint Nvo A I Cnt _ai Chan3 Sensor nvoAlCnt data aiChan3Sensor NumericPoint Nvo A I Cnt _ai Chan4 Sensor nvoAlCnt data aiChan4Sensor NumericPoint Nvo A I Cnt _ai Chand Sensor nvoAlCnt data aiChand5Sensor NumericPoint Nvo A I Cnt _ai Chan6 Sensor nvoAlCnt data aiChan6Sensor NumericPoint Nvo A I Cnt _ai Chan7 Sensor nvoAlCnt data aiChan7 Sensor NumericPoint Nvo A I Cnt _ai Chan8 Sensor nvoAlCnt data aiChan8Sensor NumericPoint Nvo A I Cnt _ai Calibrat
58. duration of the bypass The Excel 15C keeps the loop bypass_timer running while nviBypass is SW_ON If nviBypass goes away before the timer expires then the loop remains in bypass for the balance of the timer e With Last in Wins the last bypass source is used to determine the state If multiple sources change the state in the same second they are evaluated in order nviManOcc nviBypass wall module override Each second the algorithm looks for an update to either nviManOcc a change of state to nviBypass or the wall module override being pushed If any of these occur then appropriate action is taken Else the bypass timer is checked for expiration and the current state returned 6 Select Type information for the following a Input amp Setpoints Inputs Used to configure the inputs required for the Control Loop e Setpoints Control Loop can host separate setpoints apart from main 40 setpoints These are used to drive the occupancy state of the control loop ON 95 7769 01 WEBVISION Setpoint Override A configured setpoint overrides the existing setpoint if the corresponding Digital Input is TRUE The Digital Input1 maps to Setpoint1 Digital Input2 maps to Setpoint2 vice versa b Loop Configuration C 95 7769 01 Reset Control loops allow the setpoint only in occupied mode to reset either in the direction of increased energy savings or in the direction of the increased comfort The reset of a c
59. e Also Digital Outputs 8 configurable digital Triac outputs 24 Vac amp 500 mA Navigating to Excel 10 VAV II pages Go to the Devices tab Expand the list of devices on the left pane listed under WebVision Select a device to view its properties e Configuration Inputs Control Parameters PID Flow Pickup Miscellaneous Custom Wiring Wiring Diagram Purpose Define VAV configuration attributes for the Excel 10 VAV II controller Mode Configuration can be performed with the device On line or Off line Procedure Use Table 62 to configure the Excel 10 VAV II 1 Click the Configuration button on the left pane to open the Outputs Configuration page 2 Enter information into available fields 3 Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to the last saved settings 4 Click Next to display the Inputs Configuration page Excel 10 VAV II Configuration Parameters Table 62 Excel 10 VAV II Configuration Parameters Name Model Type Valid selections for this field are e W7751B W7751HSmart Definition Defines the XL10 Controller Hardware that will be used for this application The controller type selection is validated during the download process to prevent a mismatch of hardware configuration e W7751F e W7751DStandard NOTE W7751HSmart supports 4 output pins while all other models support 8 output pins Pressure Type Defines the VAV Terminal Unit pressure control operati
60. from the wall module setpoint knob It is used by the building manager for energy management purposes to balance allowed comfort conditions with energy usage SETPOINT KNOB RELATIVE The setpoint limits define the range of adjustment of the setpoint knob from the zero point in DDC for C installations and DDF for F installations SETPOINT KNOB ABSOLUTE MIDDLE The setpoint limits are limits on the absolute range of the setpoint knob in Deg C for C installations and Deg F for F installations 68 WEBVISION Table 44 Wall Module and Hydronic Controller Inputs Continued Definition Name Digital Specifies usage of the controller s digital input Digital Input 1 Input DI_WINDOW_CLOSED Points HYD Equipment Control Outputs Indicates if a window is opened An open window disables the controller operation If the contact is closed the window is closed DI_WINDOW_OPEN Indicates if a window is opened An open window disables the controller operation If the contact is closed the window is open DI_OCCUPIED_SENSOR Indicates if the room is occupied While unoccupied the controller switches from the occupied operating setpoints to the standby operating setpoints If the contact is closed the space is occupied DI_UNOCCUPIED_SENSOR Indicates if the room is occupied While unoccupied the controller switches from the occupied operating setpoints to the standby operating setpoints If the cont
61. hour format System Switch Use this option to configure the system operation of the thermostat OFF When this option is selected heat and cool states are disabled AUTO The thermostat is configured for Automatic Changeover When this option is selected heating and cooling stages are enabled to maintain heating and cooling setpoints Cool When this option is selected cooling stage operates on call for cooling Heating stages are disabled Heat When this option is selected heating stage operates on call for heating Cooling stages are disabled Emergency Heat This option is available only when the equipment type is selected as Heat Pump Auxiliary heat serves as stage one Compressor stages are locked off Min and Default Max Setpoint Value Ranges Description Cool 85 F 45 99 F Unoccupied cooling setpoint Unoccupied 29 C 7 37 C e Display resolution Stpt 1 F C e Unoccupied Cool gt Occupied Cool gt Occupied Heat 2 F 1 C e Unoccupied Cool gt Standby Cool gt Standby Heat 2 F 1 C Cool 78 F 45 99 F Standby cooling setpoint Standby 26 C 7 37 C e Display resolution Stpt 1 FI C e Unoccupied Cool gt Standby Cool gt Standby Heat 2 F 1 C Configuring the Setpoints page Use the Setpoints Configuration page to configure the heating and cooling setpoints energy management features dehumidification features recovery se
62. information will not show up in WebVision s XL15C configuration wizard as the device is not present in WebVision s database As part of de commissioning the unsupported device the user has to re commission the XL15C so that information is removed from the configuration The time taken to upload download XL15C depends on the number of loops configured in that XL15C If more number of loops is configured WebVision will take more time to upload download XL15C stores each loop configuration in separate sections in its memory WebVision while uploading reads general device configuration reads the number of loops reads I Os configured and then uploads configuration of each loop and I O WebvVision will upload all the objects that are configured and used in control logic If there are any Math Functions Setpoints Logic Loops Start Stop Loops that are just given names or engineering units but do not read any input or drive any output such objects may be ignored The same reason is applicable while downloading from WebVision This optimizes the download upload process and does not impact the XL15C configuration While uploading bindings WebVision will not upload bindings in which unconfigured objects like Control Loops Start Stop Loops Logic Loops Analog Inputs are acting as source or target of the bindings LONSPEC METRIC VALUES LonSpec downloads metric values to the controller WebvVision does not do any unit conv
63. is in steps of 20 seconds to 120 seconds WebVision collects the KW samples for every 15 seconds and at the end of a staging interval compares the power consumption with that of the active demand setpoint and the dead band Dead Band Enter the dead band in the Dead Band text box The dead band peak value is 1000 5 Click Save to save the settings To add a Load 1 Click the DLC tab The DLC Status page appears 2 Click the Load Assignment tab The Load Assignment page appears WEBVISION Table 4 Continued Load Shed Methods Check uncheck checkboxes to assign unassign devices to load Fig 29 Load Assignment page 3 Click Add Load The Add Load page appears 4 Enter Select the following details NOTE All the fields marked with and asterisk are mandatory Load Assignment Name Enter a unique name for load assignment Shed Method Select a load shed method from the Load Shed Method drop down list Table 4 Load Shed Methods If you have selected the Load Shed Method as Then Rotating In the Minimum Shed Time box enter the Load minimum length of time a load must be off after it is shed by the DLC In the Maximum Shed Time box enter the maximum time a load that is shed by the DLC must remain off or inactive NOTE The maximum shed time must always be greater than the minimum shed time A load cannot be in the shed sta
64. minimum of two analog inputs need to be selected if you are configuring a Network Special math function Purpose General Purpose Math functions are used to perform operations like minimum average square root etc on up to 6 floating point analog values available within the controller Mode Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off line or On line Procedure 1 On the Configuration page click Math Functions The Math Function page appears on the right pane 2 Select a required math function from Select Function 3 Type a Function Name 4 Select an operator from Select Operator Configuring XL15C Control Loops The XL15C controller may be configured for up to 10 Control Loops In the simplest form a Control Loop reads a sensor i e the control sensor and calculates an output to maintain the sensed value at a user defined set point There are many variations of this For inputs the user can configure control reset recovery occupancy enable disable and TOD bypass sensors For outputs the users may configure up to 4 modulating analog outputs up to 4 stages for each analog output and an auxiliary digital output for controlling a fan or pump 93 WEBVISION The control portion of the loop is an Enhanced PID EPID algorithm The user configures control algorithm type PID or Non linear bias position of set point within the proportional band i e 0 or 50 direct reverse acting output which sensor
65. number of transitions on the digital input within the range of 1 through 65 535 The 65 535th pulse will automatically reset the counter back to 0 At the most two digital inputs can be configured as Counters both counter slow fast put together The pulse must last for at least 1 25 seconds frequency must not be greater than 0 4 Hz e Counter Fast They are capable of counting the number of transitions on the digital input within the range of 1 through 65 535 The 65 535th pulse will automatically reset the counter back to zero 0 At the most two digital inputs can be configured as Counters both counter slow fast 95 7769 01 92 put together The pulse must last for at least 20 milliseconds frequency must not be greater than 15 Hz e Pulsemeter At the most two digital inputs can be configured as Pulsemeters If 2 DIS are configured as Pulsemeter power from both will be summed e Select an Engineering Unit The Engineering Unit list contains all the engineer ing units you can assign to a digital input Engineer ing Unit is enabled only for Input Kind of Maintained and Momentary and disabled for all others f Select a State The state option has 2 choices Normally Open and Normally Closed By default normally open is selected Normally open Off when the input con tact is open and On when closed Normally closed Off when the input contact is closed and On when open g Select a Type The type option has
66. on customer honeywell com Try the following link http customer honeywell com request cfm form 74 2958 Min Recov Ramp Oa Temp Minimum recovery Oa outside air temperature Enter value from 0 through 100 for cooling or heating See Excel 10 System Engineering manual for a discussion of the CVAHUs recovery ramp feature CVAHU Zone Options Purpose Configure CVAHU Controller zone options such as cooling and heating setpoints temperature settings Mode Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off line or On line Procedure 1 Click the Zone Options button on the left pane to open the Zone Options Configuration page N Enter information into available fields 3 Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to the last saved settings 4 Click Next to display the Miscellaneous Configuration page or Back to display the Heat Cool Stages Configuration page CVAHU Zone Options fields Table 24 lists the CVAHU Zone Option fields Table 24 CVAHU Zone Options Fields Name Cooling Occupied Setpoint Cooling Standby Setpoint Definition Temperature range is 50 to 90 F 10 to 32 C Thermostat reaches this temperature during Occupied times while in the cooling mode Temperature range is 50 to 90 F 10 to 32 C Thermostat reaches this temperature during Standby times while in the cooling mode Cooling Unoccupied Setpoint Temperature range is 50 to 90 F 10
67. on the left corner of the screen 3 Click Delete A confirmation message appears 4 Click OK to confirm the deletion NOTE Click Cancel to cancel the deletion TIP To delete all the trends simultaneously select the check box in the column header and click Delete Trend Users You can create a maximum of 30 user profiles You must be familiar with User ID and Password security standards to enforce user compliance when creating a user profile As WebVision is a secure server you need to log in with a pre assigned user ID and password The user ID and password combination determine your access level which in turn determine the kind of operator and configuration functions performed The Network Administrator must be familiar with user ID and password security standards and enforce user compliance The WebVision System Administrator can be accessed using these initial default user ID and password User ID SysAdmin and Password Sys Admin It is a good practice to add one or more additional users with Administrator access level to ensure top level access to WebVision Those with higher access levels have the privileges of all the lower levels in addition to the privileges unique to that level These access levels are managed by the System Administrator There can be an individual or many System Administrators who are assigned the task of managing individuals at different access levels NOTE For security compliance it is mandat
68. outlet of the terminal is connected to a return air or exhaust air system Wall Module Type Morning Warmup Type Defines the type of wall module to be used for this application This selection determines the type of control and options that are available from the wall module Valid selections for this field are e No Sensor There is no physical wall module connections to this controller e Sensor The physical wall module connected to this controller contains a sensor only e Sensor Override The physical wall module connected to this controller contains a sensor and push button override with LED indication e Sensor Setpoint The physical wall module connected to this controller contains a sensor and remote setpoint pot e Sensor Setpoint Override The physical wall module connected to this controller contains a sensor remote setpoint pot push button override and LED indication e LCD Wall Module The physical wall module connected to this controller contains a sensor remote setpoint pot push button override and a LCD display NOTE The LCD Wall Module is supported by VAV devices of type Smart Actuator only whose version is v1 02 14 and above Defines the control method the controller uses when the controller status is set to morning warm up Valid selections for this field are e Fixed Flow The controller maintains a fixed air flow setpoint or damper position during the warm up period e Modulatin
69. range covered is 15 seconds 30 seconds 60 seconds 1 minute 900 seconds 15 minutes 1800 seconds 30 minutes 2700 seconds 45 minutes 3600 seconds 60 minutes WEBVISION Enable Disable Indicates if a trend is enabled or disabled Click the Enable or Disable buttons to enable disable the trend TIP Use Filters to quickly search the required trend Use one of the following filter options to search for the required trend Channel Name Trend Type Trend Name Device Name Point Name Point Group TIP To quickly search the trends type the first letter of the required filter criteria in the Keyword text box and type an asterisk This lists all the names starting with the first letter that you have written in the Keyword text box Plotting trends NOTES 1 A security warning message appears when you access the Trends page and prompts you to download the applet Click Yes to continue 2 A Java plug in version 1 6 and above must be installed to view the trend chart To plot a trend 1 Click the Trends tab The View Trends page appears 2 Select a trend from the Configured Trends list to plot 3 Click Plot Trend The Plot Trend dialog box appears 4 Enter the following parameters Select Start Time Click F to select the start date and enter the start time in hours and minutes Select End Time Click ca to select the end date and enter the end time in hours and minutes
70. room is unoccupied If it is unoccupied the controller switches from the occupied operating setpoints to the standby operating setpoints ChangeOver Cool This selection is for local heat cool changeover operation for two pipe units using a switch or local thermostat switch When the contact closes this input indicates that the system can operate in cooling mode When the contact opens this input indicates that the system can operate in heating mode ChangeOver Heat This selection is for local heat cool changeover operation for two pipe units using a switch or local thermostat switch When the contact closes the input indicates that the system can operate in heating mode When the contact opens the input indicates that the system can operate in cooling mode Condensation Indicates if there is condensation in the ceiling When condensation is detected the controller closes the cooling output The cooling output is controlled again after 5 minutes if condensation is not detected anymore When the contact closes there is condensation No Condensation Indicates if there is no condensation in the ceiling As long as there is no condensation the contact is closed If the contact opens the controller closes the cooling output The cooling output is controlled again after 5 minutes if condensation is no longer detected When the contact closes there is no condensation Movement This selection is used for mo
71. room on the controller After you select the first point the second one is enabled if there is sufficient space and so on The following options are available Status_Occupied output energized when controller is in Occupied mode AND OR e Aux_Econ1 Emulates a T7300 for controlling an external economizer AND OR e Free Network controlled output AND OR e Unused Point is unused Controller Type The Model type Power Frequency This field defines the line voltage that Excel 10 Controllers use and also tells LonSpec the calculation required for noise immunity The calculation differs for 50 and 60 Hz applications PWM Settings PWM Period time in seconds e Zero Pulse time for a 0 percent output signal in seconds e Full Pulse time for a 100percent output signal in seconds This value must be less than or equal to the PWM Period UV Inputs Use Table 54 to configure the Unit Ventilator Inputs for the space temperature sensor type wall module type and the voltage and digital inputs for a Unit Ventilator application Purpose To select all sensors to be wired to the Unit Ventilator Controller Mode Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off line or On line 95 7769 01 WEBVISION Procedure 1 Click the Input button on the left pane to open the Input Configuration page 2 Enter information into available fields see Table 54 on page 76
72. second When a sensor is selected from the table the airflow values are set to the default specific to the chosen sensor Edit Column This list has Velocity and Volume options You can select Velocity change the velocity value and select Yes in Update Alternate Column to update the volume values Alternatively you can modify the volume values and update the velocity Name Definition Percent Max Flow Percentages of maximum flow for the following categories Update Alternate You can choose Column Yes If the other column needs to be modified No If the other column does not need to be modified Excel 10 VAV II Miscellaneous Settings Use Table 67 to configure the Excel 10 VAV II miscellaneous settings Purpose Define miscellaneous parameters for a VAV II Controller Mode Configuration can be performed with the device On line or Offsine Procedure 1 Click the Miscellaneous button on the left pane to open the Miscellaneous Parameters page 2 Enter information into available fields 3 Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to the last saved settings 4 Click Next to display the Custom Wiring page or Back to display the Flow Pickup Table page 95 7769 01 88 Window Reheat Minimum Maximum Standby Press Depress Purge Warmup Bypass Settings Time Bypass Time in minutes default is 180 is the time between the pressing of the override button at t
73. selected DLC Setpoint Bump Upon receipt of a DLC_Shed signal over the LONWORKS network the current operating setpoint value is bumped up down for cool heat modes by this amount Values range from 0 to 10 DDF 0 to 5 56 DDK discharge air temperature sensor is selected 51 Setpoint Knob Type Relative plus or minus up to 9 DDF 5 DDK from the current actual setpoint set on the Zone Options tab Absolute Middle the knob of the Wall Module sets the midpoint between the heat and cool current actual setpoints 95 7769 01 WEBVISION CVAHU PID Purpose Adjust PID Proportional Integral Derivative control parameters for the CVAHU Mode Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off line or On line CAUTION Equipment Damage Possible Can cause short cycling of compressors or wide swings in space temperature and excessive overdriving of modulating outputs If large or frequent change to PID control parameters is made it is possible to cause equipment problems such as short cycling compressors if the stage minimum run times were disabled Other problems that can occur include wide swings in space temperature and excessive overdriving of modulating outputs The default values provide proper control for most applications If the PID parameters require adjustment away from these values use caution to ensure that equipment problems do not arise If any
74. settings or Reset to revert to the last saved settings 95 7769 01 90 NXVED Drive Parameters fields Table 69 NXVFD Drive Parameters Point Min Max Typical Name Value Value Value Description Maximum 163 84 163 83 100 0 Speed Maximum motor speed The value of the maximum speed must be validated against the value of the minimum speed as follows 163 84 lt minimum speed lt maximum speed lt 163 83 Minimum 163 84 163 83 0 0 Speed Minimum motor speed The value of the minimum speed must be validated against the value of the maximum speed as follows 163 84 lt minimum speed lt maximum speed lt 163 83 Nominal 300 20000 1725 RPM Nominal motor speed in RPM Speed 3450 RPM 1140 RPM Find this value on the rating plate of the motor This configuration property is used to provide the nominal speed of the motor in RPM This value is necessary to determine the minimum and maximum speed for the motor based on the configuration properties nciMinSpeed nciMaxSpeed entered as percent of nominal speed Nominal 30 320 60 Hz Frequency 50 Hz Nominal motor frequency This configuration property is used to provide the nominal frequency for the motor Acceleration 0 1 3000 0 30 sec Time Minimum ramp up time Defines the acceleration time for Vacon NX Deceleration 0 1 3000 0 30 sec Time Minimum ramp down ti
75. the Cooling OAT Lockout setpoint then cooling is locked out Enable Cooling DAT Low Limit This option is enabled only if the discharge air temperature input is configured in the General page This enables the usage of discharge air low limit Cooling DAT Low Limit This option is available only if the discharge air temperature input is configured in the General page and Enable Cooling DAT Low Limit is selected 95 7769 01 104 WEBVISION Table 73 T7350 Equipment Control Fields Continued Name Definition Loop This section allows the user to configure the loop tuning parameters Tuning Throttling Range Use this screen to configure the heat and cool throttling ranges The wizard automatically modifies the heat and cool throttling ranges when the number of stages configured is changed For a conventional RTU e Cool Stages configured cool stages e Heat Stages configured heat stages For a heat pump RTU e Cool Stages configured compressor stages cool stages e Heat Stages configured compressor stages cool stages Configured Aux heat stages If you change the number of stages to zero the throttling range remains unchanged The heat and cool throttling range values are selectable from 1 to 30 F 1 to17 C If you enter an invalid value the wizard automatically modifies it to nearest valid value NOTE Throttling range remains always at 5 for T7350H1017 See below for throttling default val
76. the Miscellaneous button on the left pane to open the Miscellaneous Parameters Configuration page Enter information into available fields 3 Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to the last saved settings 4 Click Next to display the PID Configuration page or Back to display the Zone Control Configuration page y CHC Miscellaneous Options Table 11 describes the options Table 11 CHC Miscellaneous Options Name Miscellaneous Option and Definition Configures operator bypass and priority options Bypass Time Define the period of time 0 to 1080 minutes in which the controller operates to occupied setpoints after the local user has pressed the override button Override Priority Allocate priority between local wall module operations for example Bypass and commands from the building management central Choices are Last Wins Network Wins Last received input takes precedence It can be either the Bypass button or the Network signal The Network signal always takes precedence over the Bypass button 41 95 7769 01 WEBVISION Table 11 CHC Miscellaneous Options Continued Name Energy Manag Option and Definition ement DLC SetPoint Bump For load shedding applications define the temporary setpoint shift to be added to the setpoint when the controller receives a Load Shedding command By raising the setpoint during
77. the dehumidification to start Any combination of the following 3 strategies is allowed e Dehumidification using Minimum On Time This option is available to configure only when the humidity input is configured on the General page This is the minimum time the auxiliary relay configured for dehumidifi cation is ON When this option is selected user will be provided with an option to configure the minimum on time ranging from 5 to 15 minutes e Dehumidification using Reheat not supported on subbase 4 This option is available to configure only when the humidity input is configured on the General page When this is selected the thermostat switches on the first heating stage when the dehumidification is required This option is avail able for only T7350H1009 model type e Dehumidification using Reset Temp Setpt This option is available to configure only when the humidity input is configured on the General page When this is selected user is allowed to specify a temperature value When this option is selected the thermostat reduces the effective cooling temperature setpoint by the amount spec ified by the user The dehumidify setpoint must be smaller than the difference between the cooling and heating occupied setpoints and the difference between the cooling and the heating standby setpoints When one of these setpoints change the wizard automatically adjusts the dehumid reset setpoint such that the above condition is satisfied
78. the following options e On e Off Select Off to allow for control circuits where when in heat mode the fan is directly controlled by an interlock control circuit not part of the Excel 10 controller which brings on the fan once the plenum temperature has risen above its setpoint This option is typically used in roof top air handlers with gas fired heating Smoke Control This value determines what the controller does when a smoke alarm occurs either from the digital input or via the LONWORKS network Select one of the following options e FanOffDmperClose e FanOnDmperOpen e FanOnDmperClosed Fan Fail Time Enabled when Air Flow switch is selected This value sets the amount of time that must pass after fan start up before the Air Flow Switch is checked This action allows the fan to come up to speed and prevents false air flow failure alarms Name Main Sensor Definition Set sensor type if any to Space Temperature or Return Air Temperature Return Air option is available only if a Return Air sensor is configured on the CVAHU Controller Inputs page Filter Pressure Stpt Filter Pressure Setpoint Enabled if analog Filter Pressure sensor is selected If the measured pressure exceeds this setpoint the Dirty Filter alarm is issued There is a built in hysteresis of 25 percent of the Filter Press Stpt value for the Dirty Filter alarm to return to normal 95 776
79. the heating and cooling zero energy band Setpoint Limits These two fields specify the allowed range of adjustment available from the wall module setpoint knob This range is used by the building manager for energy management purposes to balance allowed comfort conditions with energy usage SETPOINT KNOB RELATIVE When the setpoint knob has been chosen as relative the setpoint limits define the range of adjustment of the setpoint knob from the zero point in DDC for C installations and DDF for F installations SETPOINT KNOB ABSOLUTE MIDDLE When the setpoint knob has been chosen as absolute the setpoint limits are limits on the absolute range of the setpoint knob in Deg C for C installations and Deg F for F installations 95 7769 01 38 WEBVISION Table 9 CHC Inputs Field Definitions Continued Name Field and Definition Input Ports Specifies usage of the controller inputs Analog Input 1 and Analog Input 2 Window Closed Indicates if a window is closed Close window disables the controller operation If the contact is closed the window is closed Window Open Indicates if a window is opened An open window enables the controller operation If the contact is closed the window is closed Occupied Sensor Indicates if the room is occupied If the contact is closed the space is occupied Unoccupied Sensor Indicates if the
80. the outputs are configured in the Outputs page Custom Custom assignment to change the Assignment assignments Existing If the device is online this shows the assignments as in the device Else it shows from the database 95 7769 01 WEBVISION UV Controller Wiring Diagram Purpose Display the wiring diagram for the UV controller Mode Configuration can be performed with the device Off line or On line Procedure 1 Click the Wiring Diagram button on the left pane to open the Wiring Diagram Configuration page 2 Enter information into available fields 3 Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to the last saved settings 4 Click Back to display the Custom Wiring page NOTE Fields appearing grayed out indicate those fields that change based on the Controller Type selected on the Outputs page Configuring the Excel 10 VAV Il Controller The W7751B W7751HSmart W7751F W7751D Standard are the different model types of the VAV controller belonging to the Excel10 family It is a LonMark compliant device designed to control volume and pressure of air VAV II controllers include integrated Flow sensor on an expanded I O platform The expanded hardware platform allows you to configure the controller with additional Analog and Digital inputs sensors e Analog Sensors types T7750 integrated setpoint pot or 20 k NTC resistive sensors e Digital inputs SPST type dry contact type devices
81. to 32 C Thermostat reaches this temperature during Unoccupied times while in the cooling mode Max Recov Temp Maximum recovery ramp degrees per hour Enter a value from 6 through 20 for cooling 8 through 20 for heating See Excel 10 System Engineering manual for a discussion of the recovery ramp feature of the CVAHU Heating Occupied Setpoint Temperature range is 50 to 90 F 10 to 32 C Thermostat reaches this temperature during Occupied times while in the heating mode Max Recov Oa Temp Maximum recovery Oa outside air temperature Enter value from 0 through 100 for cooling or heating See Excel 10 System Engineering manual for a discussion of the recovery ramp feature of the CVAHU Heating Standby Setpoint Temperature range is 50 to 90 F 10 to 32 C Thermostat reaches this temperature during Standby times while in the heating mode Heating Unoccupied Setpoint Temperature range is 50 to 90 F 10 to 32 C Thermostat reaches this temperature during Unoccupied times while in the heating mode Fan Run On Time Enter an amount of time from 0 to 120 seconds the fan will continue to run after the last stage of heating or cooling has switched off This value is only applicable during Unoccupied times and during Occupied times if the Fan Control field is set to AutoFan Min Limit Setpoint Provides a lower limit on the allowed settings of th
82. to add discovered devices as new devices to WebVision The selected device gets added to the Available Devices list 7 Click OK to save the settings 8 Click Log to view the discovery status NOTE Click Cancel to abort the action NOTE After discovering the devices you must upload the device bindings to save the existing bindings onto WebVision This prevents you from losing the existing binding while downloading the new binding To upload see To upload device bindings on page 19 Deleting Devices Deleting a device removes it from the device list as well as from all other configurations such as trends alarms special displays DLC and schedules Any alarms generated before the device was deleted is still displayed on the Alarms page NOTE You will not be able to see the deleted device in any of the pages until it is discovered and added using device add or discovery operation When you delete a device that provides current power input the DLC service is disabled All the alarms generated by a device are available on the Alarms Summary screen However the link present on the device fails when the device is deleted Both trend configuration and trend data gets deleted from the database To delete a device 1 Click the Devices tab The Device List page appears 2 Select the devices that you want to delete by checking the corresponding check box 3 Click Delete to delete the devices 95 7769 01 WEBVISION
83. value and engineering unit may be set They may be used as predefined Analog Inputs to SS loop Control loop Logic loop and math functions Setpoints may be used to provide analog inputs to Start Stop Loops Control Loops Logic Loops and Math Functions Setpoint values are constants that may be changed from an operator interface Purpose To configure setpoint values for the XL15C Mode Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off line or On line Procedure 1 On the Configuration page click SetPoints Loop Logic The Set Point page appears on the right pane 2 Type a Float Value There are 40 setpoints Enter the value of the setpoint in this field The setpoint has a default value of 0 by default The valid ranges for a setpoint are 99999 to 99999 with 5 digits maximum and a resolution of 0 0001 3 Select Engineering Units This list contains engineering units that may be assigned to the setpoint Select the desired engineering unit from the list Configuring XL15C Math Functions You can configure a maximum of 30 math functions Math functions are of two types General Purpose and Network Special The General Purpose math function operates ona maximum of six floating point analog inputs These Inputs can be a physical or remote point value set point output of a flex logic loop or a math function You can in turn specify the math functions output to be used by any flexible logic loop or a math function A
84. 0 Max 65535 0 DLC Shed diNul dINoDicShed diMinDicShed Cover Communication Failed False or True Invalid IO Configuration Invalid SubBase Type False or True False or True Network Communication Failed False or True Sensor Failed Application Mode x gt lt Xx x x False or True Default Auto Heat Morning Warmup Cool Night Purge Pre cool Off Test Emergency Heat Fan Only Free Cool Ice Maximum Heat Economy Dehumidify Calibrate Emergency Cool Emergency Steam Max Cool HVAC Load No Load Fan Mode Auto or Continuous 95 7769 01 170 Table 93 T7350 Application of Points Continued WEBVISION Point Name Manual Mode Graphics X Alarms X Trends X Commandable X Internal Use Valid Values Default Normal Disabled Update Status Self Test Update Alarm Report Mask Override Enable Remove Override Clear Status Clear Alarm Alarm Notify Enabled Alarm Notify Disabled Manual Control Remote Control Program Clear Reset Reset Manual Occupancy Default Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Temporary Setpoint Units C Precision 1 Min 7 2 Max 37 2 Auxiliary Heat 1 Auxiliary Heat 2 Off or On Off or On Auxiliary Relay Off or On Auxiliary Relay Bypass Time x X X Xx x x x x x x x x x gt lt X lt Off or On Units min Precision 0 M
85. 0 W7761A Remote Input Output Device System Engineering form 74 2699 for more information This literature is available on customer honeywell com Try the following link http customer honeywell com request cfm form xx xxxx Purpose To configure RIO inputs and outputs Configuration Parameters e Six analog inputs four are resistive type and two are current or voltage All resistive inputs are temperature inputs e Current or voltage can be humidity airflow or pressure sensors e Four digital inputs e Eight digital outputs which can be discrete modulating or floating RIO devices do not have equipment control or zone option parameters only hardware points The next two sections describe the options for configuring the RIO RIO Inputs Use Table 50 to configure the RIO inputs Purpose Configuration of six Analog Inputs and four Digital Inputs of RIO Specify up to six analog inputs four resistive and two voltage and four digital inputs Mode Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off line or On line 73 WEBVISION Procedure 1 Click the Input_pane button on the left pane to open the Input Configuration page 2 Enter information into available fields 3 Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to the last saved settings 4 Click Next to display the Output Configuration page RIO Inputs fields Table 50 RIO Analog and Digital Inputs Name Definition Analog Inputs
86. 138 Table 84 UV Point Details Continued WEBVISION Point Name Network Variable Field Name Point Type Fan Speed nvoData1 FanSpeed NumericPoint Fan Switch nvoData1 FanSwitch EnumPoint Filter Pressure nvoData2 FilterPressure NumericPoint Free State 1 nvoData1 Free1Stat EnumPoint Heat Source nvoData1 HeatSource EnumPoint Heat Stages On nvoData1 HeatStagesOn NumericPoint Heating Percentage nvoData1 HeatPos NumericPoint Indoor Air Quality Override nvoData1 laqOverRide EnumPoint Manual Occupancy nvoData1 NetManOcc EnumPoint Mixed Air Temperature nvoData2 MixedTemp NumericPoint Mode nvoData1 mode EnumPoint Monitor 1 nvoData2 Monitor1 NumericPoint Monitor Switch nvoData1 MonSwitch EnumPoint Occupancy Statue Out nvoData1 OccStatusOut EnumPoint Occupancy Time Clock nvoData1 OccTimeClock EnumPoint Outdoor Air Enthalpy nvoData2 OutdoorEnthalpy NumericPoint Outdoor Humidity nvoData2 OutdoorHumidity NumericPoint Outdoor Temperature nvoData2 OutdoorTemp NumericPoint Outside Air Quality nvoData2 OutsideQuality NumericPoint Override nvoData1 OverRide EnumPoint Proof Of Air Flow nvoData1 ProofAirFlow EnumPoint Return Air Enthalpy nvoData2 ReturnEnthalpy NumericPoint Return Air Humidity nvoData2 ReturnHumidity NumericPoint Return Air Temperature nvoData2 ReturnTemp NumericPoint Scheduled Occupancy nvoData1 SchedOcc EnumPoint Sensor Occupanc
87. 2 choices Unconfigured and Sensor occupancy The type option is enabled only for Input Kind of Maintained and Momentary and disabled for all others h If the Input Kind selected is Pulsemeter then Scale Factor field is enabled Type the scaling fac tor The scale factor is enabled only when the Input Kind selected is Pulsemeter The scale factor has a range of 0 1000 KWHR pulse 4 Toconfigure the Poll Points a Select the required poll point from Select Poll Point b Type a Poll Point Name c Select a controller from Source Device This selects a controller which provides the input to the XL15C s algorithm Select the network variable from Source NV e Select the field from Source NV Field This selects the field from which the data is accessed f Create a link between the poll point object and the internal object The appropriate link option displays the slots available on the source and destination object For example Click Control Loops and select appropriate Link Type and Link Name g Select an appropriate source slot link for example Analog link on the poll point and select an appropri ate destination slot link for example Sensor Link on the destination object a NOTE Since these points are polled by the XL15C controller it is not required to perform a bind operation Configuring XL15C Setpoints The XL15C controller has 40 setpoints These are points internal to the XL15C controller for which a
88. 30 seconds When the response is received the poll rate returns to once every 2 seconds The XL15C controller supports a maximum of 20 poll points Purpose Specify the attributes for up to eight analog inputs and the sensor types and attributes for up to eight digital inputs Mode Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off line or On line Limits Analog Input One XL15C Plant controller supports up to eight analog inputs Al1 through Al8 as follows 0 to 8 000 ohms 10 ohms 0 to 10V dc 4 to 20 mA using an exter nal 500 ohm resistor with a 2 10V dc input digital sensing contact closure Digital Input Two of the four digital inputs can be configured as counters A counter counts the number of active inputs within the range of 1 through 65 535 Pulse No 65 536 automatically resets the counter to 0 Procedure 1 On the Configuration page click the Local Inputs tab The Local Inputs page appears on the right pane 2 To configure the Analog Inputs a Select the input channel from Select Input b Type aname in Input Name c Select required input from Input Kind The input kind must be one of the following types for an ana log input e Unconfigured default e Resistive e Voltage 95 7769 01 WEBVISION e 20KNTC e Digital Active Short e Digital Active Open NOTE The Analog Inputs may be configured as analog or digital d Select an Engineering Units This list is enabled when the Analog
89. 4 Appendix B Device Point Tables 106 TOPIC INGOX asirai Seve ies eataa eaaa aaraa 175 95 7769 01 WEBVISION FEATURES e Support up to 120 XL10s XL15Cs VFDs and 3rd Party LON devices e Perform Auto Discovery and Wizard based configuration of controllers Support Default Alarms on each device e Support Default Trends on each device e Support default device graphic for each device e Configure a maximum of 30 users and define their roles in accessing and configuring devices and WebVision e Configure a maximum of 50 schedules e Configure and schedule device occupancy states e Assign up to 120 devices per schedule e Configure a maximum of 100 trends e Store up to 1 000 samples per trend e Configure up to 100 user defined alarms e Store and view up to 5 000 alarm records E mail alarm messages can be sent toa maximum of 50 e mail addresses e Configure up to 50 loads for Demand Limit Control e Configure default and up to 50 user defined graphics with support to command able points WebvVision is built on Niagara AX technology and extends the capabilities of WebStat OPERATION AND USE This section describes how to use the WebVision controller Sign in To log on to WebVision 1 Type the WebVision web address URL in the Address field of Internet Explorer The WebVision Login page appears Honeywell WebVision eye a UserID Password I Remember my credentials Log
90. 5 7769 01 150 Table 87 VAV II Application of Points Continued WEBVISION Point Name Scheduled Occupancy Graphics X Alarms X Trends X Commandable Internal Use Valid Values Default Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Sensor Occupancy Default Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Space Temperature Units F Precision 1 Min 256 0 Max 256 0 Space Temperature IO Units F Precision 1 Min 256 0 Max 256 0 Supply Temperature Temperature Sensor 0 Units F Precision 1 Min 256 0 Max 256 0 Units F Precision 1 Min 256 0 Max 256 0 Temperature Sensor 1 Units F Precision 1 Min 256 0 Max 256 0 Effective Setpoint Window Open Units F Precision 1 Min 256 0 Max 256 0 Closed or Open Window Open IO Closed or Open 151 95 7769 01 WEBVISION Vacon NX Frequency Converter NXVFD Table 88 provides the NXVFD points detail and Table 89 on page 153 provides the NXVFD application of points Table 88 NXVFD Point Details Point Name Network Variable Field Name Point Type Application Type nciApplVer applicationType NumericWritable Application Version nciApplVer versionNo NumericWritable Application Ver Time nciApplVer time NumericWritable Device Name nciDeviceName DeviceName S
91. 9 01 48 CVAHU Economizer Purpose Define the four settings for using an economizer in a CVAHU application Mode Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off line or On line Procedure 1 Click the Economizer button on the left pane to open the Economizer Configuration page Enter information into available fields Select the Enable Type for the economizer 4 Use the Min Position field to select a Minimum Position for the Outdoor damper 5 Use the IAQ Position field to select a minimum damper position for poor Indoor Air Quality IAQ conditions 6 Use the Use Heat for IAQ field to choose whether or not to use heat during poor Indoor Air Quality conditions 7 Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to the last saved settings 8 Click Next to display the Heat Cool Stages Configuration page or Back to display the Equipment Control Configuration page ON CVAHU Economizer fields Table 22 lists the CVAHU Economizer fields Table 22 CVAHU Economizer Fields WEBVISION Table 22 CVAHU Economizer Fields Continued Name Definition IAQ Position Minimum Position of Damper used when poor Indoor Air Quality conditions exist IAQ sensor gt IAQ Setpoint or if Digital IAQ Switch is on Select a value from 0 to 100 percent Use Heat for IAQ Enable or disable heat e Yes enables heat when damper is open for IAQ purposes e No disables heat if controller is in Cool mo
92. 95 7769 01 WEBVISION Table 85 UV Application of Points Continued Point Name Cool Position Graphics X Alarms x Trends x Commandable Internal Use Valid Values Units Precision 0 Min 128 0 Max 127 0 Cool Stages On Units null Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 3 0 DLC Shed x lt x lt x lt Restored or Shed Dirty Filter x lt x lt x lt False or True Discharge Air Setpoint Units F Precision 1 Min 256 0 Max 256 0 Discharge Air Temperature Drip Pan Full x lt x lt x lt Units F Precision 1 Min 256 0 Max 256 0 False or True Economizer Enabled Economizer Float Synch Default Off Low Medium High On Off or On Economizer Position Units Precision 0 Min 128 0 Max 127 0 Effective Occupancy Default Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Fan Speed Units null Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 7 0 Fan Switch Default Off Low Medium High On Filter Pressure Free State 1 x lt x lt x lt Units in wc Precision 1 Min 32 0 Max 32 0 Off or On Heat Percent Units Precision 1 Min 163 8 Max 163 8 95 7769 01 142 Table 85 UV Application of Points Continued WEBVISION Point Name Heat Position Graphics X Alarms X Trends x Commandable Internal Use Valid Values Units Precision 0 M
93. Configuration page settings must be configured b If the heating the cooling or the economizer is configured as Floating the Motor speed settings CVAHU Controller Outputs must be configured Table 16 lists the CVAHU Outputs for each controller model Table 16 CVAHU Outputs for each Model Output W7750A W7750B W7750C Heating 1 to 4 stages 1 to 4 stages HeatPWM or 1 to 4 stages HeatPWM HeatingFloating HeatPWMRev HeatAO HeatAORev or HeatingFloating Cooling 1 to 4 stages 1 to 4 stages CoolPWM or 1 to 4 stages CoolIPWM CoolingFloating CoolPWMRev CoolAO CoolAORev or CoolingFloating Economizer EconNone or EconFloating EconNone EconPWM or EconNone EconPWM EconFloating EconPWMRev EconAO EconAORev or EconFloating Optional Points OccStatus AuxEcon Free1 Free2 OccStatus AuxEcon Free1 Free2 OccStatus AuxEcon Free Free1PulseOn Free1PulseOff Free1PulseOn Free1PulseOff Free1Rev Free2 Free2Rev Free1PulseOn Free1PulseOff Maximum of one optional point Maximum of three optional points Free1AO Free1AORev Free2A0 Free2AORev No optional points available NOTE The optional points Free1AO Free2A0 Table 17 CVAHU Outputs Fields Continued Free1AORev Free2AORev are available in the W7750C Model of CVAHU only These enumerations Name Definition must be selected to use terminals 6 7 and 8 of Heating Refer to table above for selecting Heating W7750C mode
94. D Select the hardware version to be used for the controller Each hardware version has different combinations of inputs and outputs The software checks Type against the controller s selected application so that you cannot configure a controller for an application that it cannot perform Selection Controller Onboard Number of Number of in Tool Type Setpoint Outputs Digital In Transceiver W7762A W7762A No FTT 10 W7762B W7762B Yes FTT 10 System Define the type of equipment number of pipes being controlled TWO_PIPE Unit has only two pipes Selecting this system type limits the controller to control only one valve output and operate in a changeover mode When operating in changeover mode the controller uses only the one valve for controlling both heating and cooling Use this configuration only when changeover operation is required FOUR_PIPE Unit has four pipes connected providing both heating and cooling at the same time The controller uses one output to control heating only and one output to control cooling only as specified in Control Outputs Control Outputs Configures the two control outputs for the different type of actuators and control sequences required for the application Output 1 Mode Output triac pair connected to terminals 13 14 15 of the controller Select the control sequence option for output 1 For four pipe applications always allocate this output to the heat opt
95. Device Offline BEAR 8 E Source Device w Device offine F120 g 4 0 SourceDevice 111111111111111111 Device oftine FIOS g in C Rebooted WebVision a C rae o a 5 mm Ack Alarm Delete Alarm Email Fig 16 View Alarms page 2 Select the check box corresponding to the alarm you want to acknowledge 3 Click Ack Alarm 4 The alarm is acknowledged The time and date when the alarm is acknowledged appears in the Ack Time column The user name is displayed in the Ack By column TIP Select the check box in the header row to select all the alarms for acknowledgment simultaneously Exporting Alarms You can export alarms on WebVision To export alarms 1 Click the Alarms tab The View Alarms page appears 2 Click Export All Alarms to download all the alarms at once 3 A csv file is displayed 4 Click Open to open the file and click Save to save the file on your computer To E Mail alarms 1 Select the alarms you would want to e mail by clicking the corresponding check boxes 2 Click E Mail An Enter Email Addresses box is displayed Enter a list of e mail addresses to which the selected alarms must be E Mailed The list must be separated by a semicolon 3 Click Ok The selected alarms are E Mailed to those recipients Alarm Configuration and Use To add new alarms 1 Click the Alarms tab The View Alarms page appears 2 Click the Alarm Setup tab on View Alarms page The Alarm Setup page appears
96. Digital PWM or Float Digital outputs configured as Digital can drive an digital load and one configured as PWM or Float can drive an analog load Purpose Configure an analog and digital output to match the output device and the control algorithm Mode Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off line or On line Limits The analog outputs can be configured as digital outputs however the digital load must not exceed the 500 ohm maximum Procedure 1 On the Configuration page click the Outputs tab The Outputs page appears 2 To configure Analog Outputs 95 7769 01 96 29 Choose the output to be defined There are two pos sible analog outputs Click the down arrow to view the list of outputs Select each one one ata time and specify its attributes Select the analog output from Select Output Type a Output Name Select the required output from the Output Kind field The Output Kind must be one of the following types for analog output e Unconfigured Analog e Digital Select the Engineering Units Select the Link Type and Link Name Type the output values for 0 amp 100 output from the control loop To configure Digital Outputs a Paa g h Select the digital output from Select Output There are eight Digital Outputs in XL15A Default digital output names are DIGITAL_ OUTPUT 1 DIGITAL_OUTPUT2 and so on The name can be changed to make each output easier to identify A digit
97. Digital Out 7 X X X Off or On Digital Out 8 X X X Off or On Mode X X X Startup Wait Heat Cool off Disabled Emergency Heat Smoke Emergency Freeze Protect Manual Factory Test Fan Only 137 95 7769 01 WEBVISION Unit Ventilator UV Table 84 provides the UV points detail and Table 85 on page 139 provides the UV application of points Table 84 UV Point Details Point Name Occupied Cool Network Variable nciSetpoints Field Name occupiedCool Point Type NumericWritable Standby Cool nciSetpoints standbyCool NumericWritable Unoccupied Cool nciSetpoints unoccupiedCool NumericWritable Occupied Heat nciSetpoints occupiedHeat NumericWritable Standby Heat nciSetpoints standbyHeat NumericWritable Unoccupied Heat nciSetpoints unoccupiedHeat NumericWritable Current State nviOccSchedule currentState EnumWritable Next State nviOccSchedule nextState EnumWritable Time To Next State nviOccSchedule timeToNextState NumericWritable DLC Shed nviDIcShed dicShed EnumWritable Air Flow Loss nvoAlarmStatus LossAirFlow EnumPoint Communication Failed nvoAlarmStatus CommFail EnumPoint Dirty Filter nvoAlarmStatus DirtyFilter EnumPoint Drip Pan Full nvoAlarmStatus DripPanFull EnumPoint Freeze State nvoAlarmStatus FreezeStat EnumPoint F
98. F for Proportional Control only Reset Time This value is the integral reset time in the range 0 to 3200 sec Setting the Integral constant to zero disables integral operation Derivative Time This value is the derivative constant in the range 0 to 3200 sec Setting the derivative constant to zero disables derivative operation Thermal Switching Band PID Boost Coo ling Heating Boost Temp Allows a boost band to be set for normal PID operation and when using thermal actuators The variables indicate a setpoint space temperature deviation outside which the outputs are switched to full operation to act as a boost function when space temperature deviates significantly from the desired setpoint This band also serves as a threshold for two point switching of thermal actuators The threshold can be set in the range 0 to 10DDC 7 2 to 180DDF If the threshold is set to ODDC the boost function is disabled 95 7769 01 42 CHC Wiring Diagram Purpose Display the wiring diagram for the controller Mode Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off line or On line Procedure 1 Click the Wiring button on the left pane to open the Wiring Configuration page WEBVISION Table 14 CHC LON Bus Terminals Continued 2 Enter information into available fields 3 Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to the last s
99. Field No nvoData2 FieldNo EnumPoint Dirty Filter nvoData1 DirtyFilter EnumPoint Discharge Air Temperature nvoData2 DischargeTemp NumericPoint Discharge Setpoint nvoData2 DischargeSetPt NumericPoint Economizer Enable nvoData1 EconEnable EnumPoint Economizer Float Synch nvoData1 EconFloatSynch EnumPoint 95 7769 01 114 Table 76 CVAHU Point Details Continued WEBVISION Display Name Network Variable Field Name Point Type Economizer Position nvoData2 EconPos NumericPoint Effective Occupancy nvoData1 EffectOcc EnumPoint Effective Setpoint nvoEffectSetPt tempP NumericPoint Fan Status nvoData1 FanOn EnumPoint Filter Air Pressure nvoData2 FilterPressure NumericPoint Free1 Out nvoData1 Free1Out EnumPoint Free2 Out nvoData1 Free2Out EnumPoint Heat Percent nvoUnitStatus heatOutputPrimary NumericPoint Heat Position nvoData2 HeatPos NumericPoint Heat Stages On nvoData1 HeatStagesOn NumericPoint Indoor Air Quality Override nvoData1 laqOverRide EnumPoint Manual Override nvoData1 OverRide EnumPoint Mode nvoData1 mode EnumPoint Monitor Switch nvoData1 MonSwitch EnumPoint Monitor1 nvoData2 Monitor1 NumericPoint Network Manual Occupancy nvoData1 NetManOcc EnumPoint Occupancy Sensor nvoData1 SenOcc EnumPoint Occupancy Status Out nvoData1 OccStatusOut EnumPoint Occupancy Time Clock nvoData1 OccTimeClock EnumPoint Outdoor Enthalp
100. HYD OUtput 00 eee cere eeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeteesnaeeeeeeeaes 65 HYD INPUTS 2 9 20 e ace tebegen a rera nea anes 67 HYD Equipment Control Outputs eee 69 HYD Switching Levels nene 70 HYD Zone Control lisiero ieii 70 HYD Miscellaneous Parameters e 71 HYD PID iaa eA a A e a Rare 71 FY DAWIPING AATE ETA EE 72 Configuring the Excel 10 Remote Input Output Device RIO A a eae eee RIOJA PUTS aeraithe ipia RIO Outputs RIO Delta Sa a fcc eaaa a aaa Nea a RN eas Configuring the Unit Ventilator UV 74 WV Quip UtS EEEE EE E TE 75 UV INPUtS Ae eitast ie oriras gerie taataa 75 UV Equipment Control Options s in 76 UV Economizer Settings eenen 77 UV Heating Cooling H C Stages eee 78 UV Zone OPtions eee eeeeeeeeenteeeeeeeeenteeeeaaes 79 UV Miscellaneous Settings 79 UV PID SettingS ccccceececceceeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeeeeeaes 80 UV Outputs Wiring Assignment 81 UV Controller Wiring Diagram eee eeeeeeees 82 Configuring the Excel 10 VAV II Controller 82 Excel 10 VAV II Inputs osen 86 Excel 10 VAV II Control Parameters 87 Excel 10 VAV II PID Settings 00 eee 87 Excel 10 VAV II Flow PickUp 87 Excel 10 VAV II Miscellaneous Settings 88 Excel 10 VAV II Custom Wiring Settings 88 Excel 10 VAV II Wiring Diagram 0 eee 89 Configuring the Vacon NX Frequency Converter NXVED rennon ner a iann ees 89 Configuri
101. If set to No the setpoint values set in the configuration are used Override Type Override Priority Specify the type of Bypass override functions that are available from the Wall Module s Override push button Select one of the following options e None no Bypass configured for wall module e Normal e Bypass no Continuous Unoccupied allowed from the push button Set the priority scheme for the Bypass override function Options are e LastWins Last received input takes precedence It can be either the Bypass button or the Network signal e NetManOccWins The Network signal always takes precedence over the Bypass button NOTE This field is available only if Override Type is Normal or i Bypass Only CVAHU Miscellaneous fields Bypass Time Set the time period for a bypass override Table 25 lists the CVAHU Miscellaneous fields event Values range from 0 through 1080 A k minutes Enabled if Override Type is Table 25 CVAHU Miscellaneous Fields Normal or Bypass Only Name Definition Max DaTemp Values range from 65 to 135 F IAQ CO2 Setpoint Setting above which the Indoor Air Setpoint 18 33 to 57 22 C Enabled ifa Quality IAQ is deemed to be poor and discharge air temperature sensor is the controller enters the IAQ override selected mode Values range from 0 to 2000 PPM Min DaTemp Values range from 0 to 60 F Enabled when SpaceCo2 sensor is Setpoint 17 78 to 15 56 C Enabled if a
102. NOCCUPIED The Bypass button when pressed has two different functions depending on the length of time the button is held down e Two seconds puts the controller in Bypass e Five seconds puts the controller in Unoccupied Bypass Only The Bypass button when pressed has the following function Two seconds puts the controller in Bypass Fan Speed Switch Define the type of switch used on the Wall module Note that this setting also controls the maximum speed setting of the fan For example if a three speed fan is used but the fan speed switch is set to two speed the fan only operates with two speeds Normal Settings based Switch Function Setting Fan speed switch function No Fan Switch The fan speed switch is ignored Three Position Off Auto On Four Position Off Auto Low High Five Position Off Auto Low Medium High 95 7769 01 58 WEBVISION Table 33 FCU Inputs Fields Continued Name Definition Wall Setpoint The setpoint knob is available in different types of scales and with different setpoint meanings based on the Module Knob country of usage The temperature engineering unit used C or F is the setting made in WebVision when cont creating the new project This setting is used for the total project NOTE The setpoint knob only affects the Occupied and Standby Setpoints The Unoccupied setpoint is not affected by the setpoint knob No Knob The setpoint knob is ignored Note that this m
103. Next New Connection Wizard Network Connection Type What do you want to do Oo Connect to the Internet so you can browse the Web and read email O Connect to the network at my workplace Connect to a business network using dial up or YPN so you can work from home a field office or another location O Set up an advanced connection Connect directly to another computer using your serial parallel or infrared port or set up this computer so that other computers can connect to it Fig 35 Network Connection Type screen 5 Select the Set up my connection manually option an click Next New Connection Wizard Getting Ready The wizard is preparing to set up your Internet connection How do you want to connect to the Internet O Choose from a list of Internet service providers ISPs For a dial up connection you will need your account name password and a phone number for your ISP For a broadband account you won t need a phone number OUse the CD I got from an ISP Fig 36 Setup my connection manually button click Next New Gonnection Wizard Internet Connection How do you want to connect to the Internet This type of connection uses a en and a regular or ISDN phone line Connect using a broadband connection that requires a user name and password This is a high speed connection using either a DSL or cable modem Your ISP may tefer to this type of connection as PPPoE
104. Next to open the Input Configuration page UV Outputs fields Table 53 Unit Ventilator Outputs Definition Name Fan Speeds Select one of the following fan speeds e No _Fan e One_Speed e Two_Speed e Three_Speed Heating Select one of the following Heating types e Heating_Stage_1 e Heating _Stage_ 2 e Heating _PWM e Heating_Floating e No_Heating If you select Floating the Motor Speed field displays actuator speed in seconds If you select PWM the PWM Settings become editable Cooling Select one of the following Cooling types e Cooling_Stage_1 Cooling_Stage_2 Cooling_PWM Cooling_Floating No_Cooling If you select Floating the Motor Speed field displays actuator speed in seconds If you select PWM the PWM Settings fields become editable 75 WEBVISION Table 53 Unit Ventilator Outputs Continued Name Definition Economizer Selection of Economizer mixed air damper actuator type None or packaged external economizer PWM or Floating e Econo_None_Pkgd e Econo_PWM e Econo_Floating NOTE If you configure a floating or PWM economizer you MUST select a Discharge Air sensor see Unit Ventilator Inputs to enable automatic damper control Motor Speed Actuator motor speeds in seconds Enabled with a selection of floating heating floating cooling or floating economizer Optional Points The first optional point is enabled if there is sufficient
105. NumericPoint DLC Shed nvoData2 dicShed EnumPoint Days Left Keypad Holiday nvoData1 daysLeftKeypadHoliday NumericPoint Dehumidifier Active nvoData2 dehumidActive EnumPoint Discharge Air Limit nvoData2 DALimit EnumPoint Discharge Air Temperature nvoData1 dischTemp NumericPoint Economizer Output nvoUnitStatus econOutput NumericPoint Effective Mode nvoData1 effMode EnumPoint Effective Occupancy nvoData1 effOccCurrentState EnumPoint Effective Setpoint nvoData1 effSetPt NumericPoint Fan nvoData1 fan EnumPoint Fan Relay nvoData2 relayFan EnumPoint Heat Relay 1 nvoData2 relayHeat1 EnumPoint Heat Relay 3 nvoData2 relayHeat3 EnumPoint Heat Stages On nvoData1 heatStgsOn NumericPoint 95 7769 01 168 Table 92 T7350 Point Details Continued WEBVISION Point Name Network Variable Field Point Type Holiday nvoData2 holiday EnumPoint Next State nvoData2 schedNextState EnumPoint Occupancy Sensor nvoData2 occSensor EnumPoint Outdoor Temperature nvoData1 oDTemp NumericPoint Percent Cool Command nvoData1 percentCmdCool NumericPoint Percent Heat Command nvoData1 percentCmdHeat NumericPoint Relay Heat 2 nvoData2 relayHeat2 EnumPoint Remote Setpoint Offset nvoData2 remoteStPtOffset NumericPoint Scheduled State nvoData2 scheduledState EnumPoint Space Humidity nvoData1 spaceHumidity NumericPoint Space Temperature nvoData1 spaceTemp NumericPoint Stages Acti
106. NumericWritable Occupied Heat nciSetpoints occupiedHeat NumericWritable Standby Heat nciSetpoints standbyHeat NumericWritable Unoccupied Heat nciSetpoints unoccupiedHeat NumericWritable Current State nviOccSchedule currentState EnumWritable Next State nviOccSchedule nextState EnumWritable Time To Next State nviOccSchedule timeToNextState NumericWritable DLC Shed nviDIcShed DicShed EnumWritable Cover Communication Failed nvoAlarmStatus coverCommFail EnumPoint Invalid IO Configuration nvoAlarmStatus invalidlOConfig EnumPoint Invalid SubBase Type nvoAlarmStatus invalidSubBaseType EnumPoint Network Communication Failed nvoAlarmStatus networkComnFail EnumPoint Sensor Failed nvoAlarmStatus sensorFail EnumPoint Application Mode nviApplicMode hvacMode EnumWritable Manual Mode nviRequest objectRequest EnumWritable Manual Occupancy nviOccManCmd occupancy EnumWritable Temporary Setpoint nviSetpoint tempP NumericWritable Auxiliary Heat 1 nvoData2 noAuxHeat1 EnumPoint Auxiliary Heat 2 nvoData2 noAuxHeat2 EnumPoint Auxiliary Relay nvoData2 relayAux EnumPoint Auxiliary Relay nvoData2 auxRelay EnumPoint Bypass Time nvoData1 bypassTime NumericPoint Cool Relay 1 nvoData2 relayCool1 EnumPoint Cool Relay 2 nvoData2 relayCool2 EnumPoint Cool Relay 3 nvoData2 relayCool3 EnumPoint Cool Stages On nvoData1 coolStgsOn
107. Occupied mode and intermittently with call for heating cooling in the Unoccupied mode Fan Run on Heat Select one of the following fan control options On Off Select Off to allow for control circuits where when in heat mode the fan is directly controlled by an interlock control circuit not part of the Excel 10 controller which brings on the fan once the plenum temperature has risen above its thermostatic set point UV Economizer Settings Purpose This section defines the Economizer functions Use Table 56 to configure the Unit Ventilator Economizer settings Mode Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off line or On line Procedure 1 Click the Economizer button on the left pane to open the Economizer Configuration Page 2 Enter information into available fields 3 Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to the last saved settings 4 Click Next to display the H C Stage Parameters Configuration page or Back to display the Equipment Control Configuration page UV Economizer fields Table 56 Unit Ventilator Economizer Settings Smoke Control This value determines what the controller does when a smoke alarm occurs either from the digital input or via the LonWorks Bus network Select one of the following smoke control options Fan Off Damper Closed Fan On Damper Open Fan On Damper Closed Fan Fail Time This option is enabled if an Air Flow swit
108. Out 3 nvoriolO d03 EnumPoint Digital Out 4 nvoriolO d04 EnumPoint Digital Out 5 nvoriolO d05 EnumPoint Digital Out 6 nvoriolO d06 EnumPoint Digital Out 7 nvoriolO d07 EnumPoint Digital Out 8 nvoriolO d08 EnumPoint Mode nvoriolO mode EnumPoint Table 83 RIO Application of Points Point Name Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use Valid Values Communication Failed X False or True Node Disabled X False or True Sensor Failed X False or True Manual Mode X X X X Enable Disable Manual Suppress Alarms Unsuppress Alarms Analog In 1 X X X Units F Precision 1 Min 256 0 Max 256 0 Analog In 2 X X X Units F Precision 1 Min 256 0 Max 256 0 95 7769 01 136 Table 83 RIO Application of Points Continued WEBVISION Point Name Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use Valid Values Analog In 3 X X X Units F Precision 1 Min 256 0 Max 256 0 Analog In 4 X X X Units F Precision 1 Min 256 0 Max 256 0 Analog In 5 X X X Units null Precision 0 Min 32768 0 Max 32767 0 Analog In 6 X X X Units null Precision 0 Min 32768 0 Max 32767 0 Digital In 1 X X X False or True Digital In 2 X X X False or True Digital In 3 X X X False or True Digital In 4 X X X False or True Digital Out 1 X X X Off or On Digital Out 2 X X X Off or On Digital Out 3 X X X Off or On Digital Out 4 X X X Off or On Digital Out 5 X X X Off or On Digital Out 6 X X X Off or On
109. Select a numeric point from the Select Point option and type a tolerance value after which the data logging begins e Trend Limit Roll Over is the default selection This option trends the point forever e Roll Over Indicates that the readings of sampling are generated continuously When the sample limit is reached the oldest sample is replaced with the next sample and trending continues in that fashion Stop when full Indicates that the trend sampling is stopped after it reaches the set limit Max number of Samples The maximum number of samples Select the number of samples to be generated from the list NOTE WebVision uses the polling mechanism to read point values at regular interval It may take up to 30 seconds to detect a point value If the point value changes at a higher frequency than 30 seconds WebVision may not be able to detect the changes 5 Click Save to save the settings NOTE Click Cancel to clear the fields To edit trends 1 Click the Trends Setup tab The View Trends page appears 2 Select a Trend from the Trends list The details of the selected Trend appear 3 Modify the required fields as described in step 4 of To add a new trend 4 Click Save to save the settings NOTE Click Cancel to cancel the settings To delete a trend 1 Click the Trends tab The View Trends page appears 2 Go to Trends Setup Select the trend that you want to delete from the Trends listed
110. Sensor Occupancy Default Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Effective Window Open Closed or Open External Active Inactive or Active Fan Feedback Failure or Running Fan Output x gt lt X Xx x X x Xx x X x Xx Units Precision 1 Min 163 8 Max 163 8 Fan Stages Active HW Override HW Window Open x lt x lt x lt Fan Off Fan Speed 1 Fan Speed 2 Fan Speed 3 Fan Auto Fan Default Default Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Closed or Open In Alarm x lt x lt x lt False or True Manual Occupancy Unit Status Mode Default Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Default Auto Heat Morning Warmup Cool Night Purge Pre cool Off Test Emergency Heat Fan Only Free Cool Ice Maximum Heat Economy Dehumidify Calibrate Emergency Cool Emergency Steam Max Cool HVAC Load No Load 127 95 7769 01 WEBVISION Table 79 FCU Application of Points Continued Point name FCU Status Mode Graphics X Alarms X Trends X Commandable Internal Use Valid Values Disabled Cool Heat Pressurize Depressurize Manual Mode Factory Test Mode Floating Out of Sync Fan Switch Off Startup Wait Output Position 0 Units Precision 1 Min 163 8 Max 163 8 Output Position 1 Primary Heat Output Units Precision 1 Min 163 8 Max 163 8 Units Precisio
111. Standby or Occupied 4 Flashes indicates the Controller answers of the Network Management Command Wink 37 95 7769 01 WEBVISION Table 9 CHC Inputs Field Definitions Continued Name Field and Definition Controller Wall Module continued LED Occupancy The LED shows the effective Occupancy mode On indicates effective Occupied or Bypass 1 Flash per Second indicates effective Standby Off indicates effective Unoccupied 4 Flashes indicates the Controller answers of the Network Management Command Wink LCD Display This mode is used only for a Wall Module with LCD Display The Display has following Symbols to show the Occupancy Modes Sun indicates effective Occupied or Bypass Half Sun indicates effective Standby Moon indicates effective Unoccupied No Symbol and OFF in 7 Segment indicates the Controller is Off In the Off mode a Snow Flag indicates whether Frost Protection is configured Blinking Symbols are used to show the Override Blinking Sun indicates Override Occupied or Bypass blinking Half Sun indicates Override Standby Blinking Moon indicates override unoccupied The Controller answers with the Network Management Command Wink with blinking Sun and Moon Override Button Define how the override button on the connected wall module is to be used None The wall module button is not used for bypass function ByPass Only The Bypass button when pressed
112. The Domain ID must contain numbers form zero 0 to nine 9 and must be in pairs For example if the length of the Domain ID is configured as 3 then the Domain ID is 12 34 56 There must be a space between each pair Subnet Node ID The Subnet represents a LonNetwork and Node ID represents a controller on that network Here this Subnet Node ID is used to identify the LonNetwork of the WebVision 95 7769 01 WEBVISION e Channel Info continued e Domain Length Length of the Domain ID 4 Click Save to save the settings To configure Dial up settings Use the following procedure to configure the dial up settings 1 Click the Systems tab The System page with General Properties appears 2 Click the Dial Up Setup tab The Dial Up Setting page appears 3 Select required option from the Dial Up Type group box Whenever you are not on network and still want to access WebVision you can use the Dial in facility Using this feature you can access WebVision from anywhere 4 Enter the following details e Dial In Local IP Address IP address of the local machine from where you want to access the WebVision application e Remote IP Address IP address of remote machine where WebVision application is hosted e User Name Type the user name e Password Type the password Modem Setting e Initialization String As specified in the specification of the modem used Baud Rate As specified in the specification of the m
113. The W7752 D E F and G Controllers are communicating mains powered Fan Coil Unit Controllers in the Excel 10 product line They cover a wide range of fan coil control applications The controllers can operate as stand alone units or networked using the standard Echelon LONWORKS bus Interfaces are provided for a wide range of actuator types Heating systems can be water or electric and cooling systems can be chilled water supply or compressors Extensive timing and interlock features make the W7752 especially suitable for systems using electric heat and compressors Features e LonMark HVAC profile 8020 Stand alone operation or on high speed 78 kilobit LON network Uses Echelon LonTalk protocol Direct connection of thermal actuators Direct connection to fan switch Direct connection to electric heat Factory configured default parameters Wide range of supported valves and actuators Interlocks and time delays to protect equipment Slim design fits into narrow fan coil units Terminations all on one side allow controller to be positioned at back of fan coil unit e Power supplied by power mains FCU Controller Models Table 29 lists the FCU Controller models Table 29 FCU Controller Models OS Number Power Input Reheat Delay W7752D2xxx 230 Vac YES W7752E2xxx 230 Vac NO W7752F2xxx 115 Vac YES W7752G2xxx 115 Vac NO The W7752D E F and G are LonMark compliant Fan Coil Unit Controllers in th
114. The time to end the special event NOTE By default the occupancy state is 24 hours Unoccupied 5 Click OK to save the settings NOTE Click Cancel to close the window without saving the changes Default holiday list Table 1 and Table 2 list the default holidays for the US and Canada Table 1 Default US Holidays Name Day New Year s Days January 1st Martin Luther King Jr Day The third Monday in January Presidents Day The third Monday in February Memorial Day The last Monday in May Independence Day July 4th Labor Day The first Monday in September Columbus day The second Monday in October Veterans Day November 11th Thanksgiving Day The fourth Thursday in November Christmas Day December 25th WEBVISION Table 2 Default Canadian Holidays Name Day New Year s Days January 1st Canada Day July 1st Labour Day The first Monday in September Thanksgiving Day The second Monday in October November 11th December 25th December 26th Remembrance Day Christmas Day Boxing Day To add the pre configured holidays 1 Select the US Calendar or Canadian Holidays using the drop down list on the Special Event page 2 Click Add The selected US or Canadian pre configured list of holidays is added and is displayed in tabular format IMPORTANT Special events are not executed if you commit an error in specifying them
115. This configuration can be performed using the Key Pad control provided along with device as follows Inthe keypad from the main menu select the menu called Parameters Select the submenu I O Reference and set it to FieldBus NXVFD device supports the following types of applications e Basic Application Standard Application Local Remote Control Application PID Control Application Multi Step Speed Control Application Multi Purpose Control Application Pump And Fan control Application The basic control interface and the parameters are easy to use If a more versatile interface or parameters are required a more suitable application can be selected from above application package Control I O boards which are either isolated NXOPTA8 or not isolated NXOPTA1 from the ground are available The used I O can also be extended by the LONWORKS option board e Eight digital inputs standard signals Eight digital outputs standard signals Configuring NXVFD Drive Parameters Use the NXVFD configuration screen to configure the motor parameters transmission controller parameters and EEPROM saving option parameters Use Table 69 to configure the NXVFD Drive Parameters Mode These parameters can be configured in both Off line and On line modes from the wizard Procedure 1 Click on the Configuration tab of NXVFD to open the VFD Configuration screen 2 Enter information into available fields 3 Click Commit to save the
116. Update No 1 Update All 2 Bypass Timer Temperature Control Point Space Temperature Discharge Air Temperature Discharge Air Setpoint Return Air Temperature Return Air Humidity Return Air Enthalpy Outdoor Air Temp Outdoor Humidity Outdoor Enthalpy Filter Pressure Space Co2 Monitor Volts Cool Position Heat Position Economizer Position Update No 2 Dirty Filter False or True 95 7769 01 118 Table 77 CVAHU Application of Points Continued WEBVISION Point Name Discharge Air Temperature Graphics X Alarms X Trends X Commandable Internal Use Valid Values Units F Precision 1 Min 256 0 Max 256 0 Discharge Setpoint Units F Precision 1 Min 256 0 Max 256 0 Economizer Enable Default Off Low Medium High On Economizer Float Synch x lt x lt x lt Off or On Economizer Position Effective Occupancy Effective Setpoint Units Precision 0 Min 128 0 Max 127 0 Default Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Units C Precision 1 Min 273 2 Max 327 7 Fan Status x lt x lt x lt Off or On Filter Air Pressure Free1 Out Free2 Out xJ x xJ x lt xJ x Units in wc Precision 1 Min 32 0 Max 32 0 Off or On Off or On Heat Percent Units Precision 1 Min 163 8 Max 163 8 Heat Position Units Precision 0 Min 128 0 Max 127 0 Heat St
117. VAHUs of model type CVAHU C whose versions are 2 01 103 and above The other humidity sensor models H7620 and H7630 work fine when CVAHU is configured to use the existing C7600C humidity sensors The DischTemp20KNTC sensor can be used to report valid temperatures up to 180 F This is applicable CVAHU C models whose versions are 2 01 103 and above This is applicable to CVAHU Model A also whose version is 2 01 13 and above The wall module configuration affects the Use Wall Module under the Zone Option page and Over Ride Priority under the Miscellaneous Parameters page The possible values of Use Wall Module and Override Priority is given in Table 20 95 7769 01 WEBVISION Table 20 Use Wall Module vs Override Priority Table 21 CVAHU Equipment Control Fields Continued Name Cascade Control Definition Configure cascade control Default is No Yes is available only if both a Discharge Air Temperature sensor and modulating heating or cooling are configured C O R Fail Mode Changeover Relay For Heat Pump only fail mode Heating or Cooling This option determines which mode Heating or Cooling is activated on power failure to the C O R This item is available only if HeatPump was selected on the Output page Use Override Use Wall Priority Module as in Setpoint in Miscellaneous Zone Option Parameter Sensor page Meaning Sensor No None Use Wall Module onl
118. View or modify Deltas change thresholds for sensors Mode Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off line or On line Procedure 1 Click the Deltas_pane button on the left pane to open the RIO s Delta Configuration page 2 Enter information into available fields 3 Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to the last saved settings 95 7769 01 74 4 Ifsensors are being used for display only then they can have a larger value for the delta and rely on the guaranteed periodic update to update the sensor every 55 seconds regardless on the amount of change 5 Ifthe sensor is bound to another Excel 10 controller configure a smaller delta so that the control algorithm does not see large changes in value 6 The default value of 0 sends an update every 2 seconds 7 Click Back to display the RIO s Input Configuration page RIO Deltas fields Table 52 RIO Deltas Name Definition Delta T1 Degrees Farheinheit F Delta T2 Degrees Farheinheit F Delta T3 Degrees Farheinheit F Delta T4 Degrees Farheinheit F Delta H Percentage Delta P Inches H20 Delta V Volts Delta C Milliamperes Delta CO2 CO level Configuring the Unit Ventilator UV The W7753A is the Unit Ventilator Controller in the Excel 10 product line family The Unit Ventilator is a LonMark compliant device to monitor control HVAC equipment lighting and other miscellaneous loads in a distrib
119. WebVision PRODUCT DESCRIPTION WebVision is a web based building manager that allows contractors and facility managers to view and command HVAC controllers installed at their sites It communicates over the LonWorks network to perform building management control of various devices and controllers through a web browser The WebVision Bundle WWS VL1A1000 includes the WebVision controller pre installed with a LON communications card and power supply WebVision is capable of e Discovering unitary controllers connected to WebVision e Configuring controllers using configuration wizards e Monitoring raising and e mailing alarms on controller points and system events e Configuring and collecting trends on points e Driving scheduled occupancy states e Managing energy through Demand Limit Control DLC e Providing single point of entry into the system to perform all the above mentioned tasks e Managing access to information through user privileges e Providing IT friendly network interface for easy access and management WebVision acts as an offline configuration tool that helps the contractor to configure site project that consists of multiple unitary controllers The contractor can commission all the controllers by connecting through a LAN WAN or Dial up WebVision also acts like a network time master to synchronize time and date in devices connected to it with its own time and date or with the Internet time servers Its D
120. WebVision without any existing config file There should not be any devices present in WebVision 1 Configure WebVision as given in the Quick Start Guide and connect it to Ethernet and LON network 2 Logon to WebVision through internet browser 3 Click System gt Network Setup In Channel Info set the Domain ID to the same domain ID configured in LonSpec typically 2C 44 decimal The ID must be specified in Hex format Click Save to save the changes Channel Into Channel Name Channel v j1 Domain ID jac SubnetiNode ID 1727 Domain Length Fig 48 Channel Info Domain ID and Domain Length fields 4 Click the Devices tab and go to Device List screen 5 Click Discover A dialog box appears Select Channel as Channel 1 and click Discover A progress bar appears indicating the discovery progress 6 After the discovery is complete all the discovered devices are listed on the left side of the table Review the subnet node ids of discovered devices to ensure that there are no conflicts WebVision will detect the clash and on confirmation from the user it would change the subnet node id of the device NOTE Changing subnet node id will break any bindings going in and out of that device It is suggested that the user find the clash manually and rectify them through LonSpec 7 Select all the devices by clicking on each device or click the SelectAll box and then click Add to add them to WebVision database
121. able Setpoints amp Override This option will lockout all keys except Temporary Occupied Temporary Not Occupied increase and decrease and information key Info Key Only This option will lockout all keys information key Display Units Use this option to configure the display units in the thermostat for temperature fields Degrees F Select this option to set the display unit for temperature fields as degrees Fahrenheit Degrees C Select this option to set the display unit for temperature fields as degrees Centigrade WEBVISION Mode Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off line or On line Procedure 1 Click the Setpoints button on the left pane to open the Setpoints Configuration page 2 Enter information into available fields 3 Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to the last saved settings 4 Click Next to display the Equipment Control Configuration page or Back to display the Keypad Display Configuration page T7350 Heating and Cooling Setpoints Use Table 72 to specify the heating and cooling setpoints Table 72 also provides the default value and valid range for each setpoint Table 72 Heating and Cooling Setpoints Clock Display Use this to configure the display mode of time in the thermostat 12 Hour AM PM Selecting this option will display the thermostat time in 12 hour format 24 Hour Selecting this option will display the thermostat time in 24
122. act is closed the space is unoccupied DI_CHANGEOVER_COOL This selection is for local heat cool changeover operation for two pipe units using a switch or local thermostat switch When the contact closes this input indicates that the system can operate in cooling mode When the contact opens this input indicates that the system can operate in heating mode DI_CHANGEOVER_HEAT This selection is for local heat cool changeover operation for two pipe units using a switch or local thermostat switch When the contact closes the input indicates that the system can operate in heating mode When the contact opens the input indicates that the system can operate in cooling mode DI_MOVEMENT This selection is used for movement detector configuration where a closed contact indicates movement Movement detector is the same as occupancy sensor but with an additional Hold Time of 15 minutes This adds a delay to the occupancy signal such that the space is considered occupied until 15 minutes has elapsed since the last movement is detected DI_NO_MOVEMENT This selection is used for movement detector configuration where a closed contact indicates no movement Movement detector is the same as occupancy sensor but with an additional Hold Time of 15 minutes This adds a delay to the occupancy signal such that the space is considered occupied until 15 minutes has elapsed since the last movement is detected DI_NOT_USED This setting indicates that the digital inpu
123. ages On Units null Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 7 0 Indoor Air Quality Override False True Manual Override Default Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby 119 95 7769 01 WEBVISION Table 77 CVAHU Application of Points Continued Point Name Mode Graphics X Alarms X Trends X Commandable Internal Use Valid Values Startup Wait Heat Cool Off Disabled Emergency Heat Smoke Emergency Freeze Protect Manual Factory Test Fan Only Monitor Switch x lt x lt x lt Off or On Monitor1 Units V Precision 1 Min 32 0 Max 32 0 Network Manual Occupancy Default Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Occupancy Sensor Default Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Occupancy Status Out Occupancy Time Clock Outdoor Enthalpy x lt x lt x lt Off or On Default Off Low Medium High On Units mA Precision 1 Min 256 0 Max 256 0 Outdoor Humidity Units Precision 1 Min 0 0 Max 127 5 Outdoor Temperature Units F Precision 1 Min 256 0 Max 256 0 Proof of Air Flow Default Off Low Medium High On Return Air Enthalpy Units mA Precision 1 Min 256 0 Max 256 0 Return Air Humidity Units Precision 1 Min 0 0 Max 127 5 95 7769 01 120 Table 77 CVAHU Application of Points Continued WEBVISION Point N
124. ages temp ControlLoop_1 nvoFTStatus data seq3ActiveStages NumericPoint Nvo F T Status _prim Stage1 On temp ControlLoop_1 nvoFTStatus data primStage1On BooleanPoint Nvo F T Status _prim Stage2 On temp ControlLoop_1 nvoFTStatus data primStage2On BooleanPoint Nvo F T Status _prim Stage3 On temp ControlLoop_1 nvoFTStatus data primStage3On BooleanPoint Nvo F T Status _prim Stage4 On temp ControlLoop_1 nvoFTStatus data primStage4On BooleanPoint Nvo F T Status _seq1 Stage1 On temp ControlLoop_1 nvoFTStatus data seq1Stage10n BooleanPoint Nvo F T Status _seq1 Stage2 On temp ControlLoop_1 nvoFTStatus data seq1Stage20n BooleanPoint Nvo F T Status _seq1 Stage3 On temp ControlLoop_1 nvoFTStatus data seq1Stage30n BooleanPoint Nvo F T Status _seq1 Stage4 On temp ControlLoop_1 nvoFTStatus data seq1Stage40n BooleanPoint Nvo F T Status _seq2 Stage1 On temp ControlLoop_1 nvoFTStatus data seq2Stage10n BooleanPoint Nvo F T Status _seq2 Stage2 On temp ControlLoop_1 nvoFTStatus data seq2Stage20n BooleanPoint Nvo F T Status _seq2 Stage3 On temp ControlLoop_1 nvoFTStatus data seq2Stage30n BooleanPoint Nvo F T Status _seq2 Stage4 On temp ControlLoop_1 nvoFTStatus data seq2Stage4On BooleanPoint Nvo F T Status _seq3 Stage1 On temp ControlLoop_1 nvoFTStatus data seq3Stage10n BooleanPoint Nvo F T Status _seq3 Stage2 On temp ControlLoop_1 nvoFTStatus data seq3Stage2On BooleanPoint Nvo F T Status _seq3 Stage3 On temp ControlLoop_1 nvoFTStatus data seq3Stage30n BooleanPoint Nvo F T Status _se
125. ail Setup page appears 3 Enter the following details e SMTP Server e Enable Email Service Check this box to enable the SMTP protocol e Use Sever WebVision as SMTP gateway Check this box to use WebVision server as SMTP gateway e Email Server Enter the SMTP e mail server to use this service You must configure SMTP e mail server to send alarm notifications The Internet Service Provider ISP or Network Administrator has to provide the 95 7769 01 28 server and domain names prior to configuring the SMTP E mail server option An example to maintain the format SMTP server com Email Address Enter a valid e mail address The account must be present in the SMTP server e User Authentication Check this box to provide the user credentials On selection it enables the following parameters e User Name Type the user name of the SMTP server Type any name of your choice For example webvision1 e Password Type the SMTP password Confirm Password Retype your password NOTE The password field cannot be empty The maximum number of characters is 50 The characters allowed are a z A Z 0 9 _ SPACE Click Save to save the settings Click Send Test Mail The Email Service Status displays the status A test message is sent to the e mail address A confirmation message appears 6 Ifthe settings are incorrect then the Last Failure Message field displays the reason for failing in sending t
126. al Cnt _ Cal Count7 Units null Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 65535 0 Nvo Cal Cnt _ Cal Count8 Units null Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 65535 0 Nvo Cal Cnt _ Cal Count9 Units null Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 65535 0 Nvo Cal Cnt _ Cal Count10 Units null Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 65535 0 Nvo Cal Cnt _ Cal Count11 Nvo Od Temp _temp P Units null Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 65535 0 Units C Precision 1 Min 273 2 Max 327 7 Nvo Od Hum _lev Percent Units Precision 1 Min 163 8 Max 163 8 Nvo Counter _ count Nvo Counter2 _ count Units null Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 65535 0 Units null Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 65535 0 Nvo Cascade Out _power Kilo Nvo Sensor Occ1 _occupancy Units kW Precision 1 Min 0 0 Max 6553 5 Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Default Nvo Sensor Occ2 _occupancy Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Default Nvo D A Temp _temp P Units C Precision 1 Min 273 2 Max 327 7 167 95 7769 01 WEBVISION T7350 Thermostat T7350 Table 92 provides the T7350 points detail and Table 93 on page 169 provides the T7350 application of points Table 92 T7350 Point Details Point Name Occupied Cool Network Variable nciSetpoints Field occupiedCool Point Type NumericWritable Standby Cool nciSetpoints standbyCool NumericWritable Unoccupied Cool nciSetpoints unoccupiedCool
127. al output name can have a maximum of 18 characters No duplicate digital output names are allowed within the page and across pages Type an Output Name Select the required output from the Output Kind field State of digital output The output state could be one of the following types for a digital output Unconfiured Digital PWM Float_Close1 Float_Close2 Float_Opent Float_Open2 NOTE At the most four digital outputs can be configured as two float pairs If a digital output is configured as Float_Open then another digital output must be configured as Float_Close Select the Engineering Units Select the Link Type and Link Name Select the Output State The Output State option has two choices Ener gized On and Energized Off Default selection is Energized On Point type is enabled when output kind is Digital Type the Motor Speed Select the Position Start Up Synchronization Type the output values for 0 amp 100 output from the control loop To configure Remote AO select the Link Type and Link Name for the remote analog output To configure Remote DO select the Link Type and Link Name for the remote digital output To configure Network Outputs select Link Type and Link Name for various Nvo modes These include NvoApplMode NvoOccupancy NvoEconEnale NvoCoolUTML and NvoHeatUtml Configuring the T7350 Thermostat Controller T7350 The T7350 is a full featured Commercial programmable thermosta
128. al temp Analoginput_1 nvoAlSensor data aiVal NumericPoint Nvo Remote Cmd _lev Percent temp Remote_1_AO1 nvoRemoteCmd levPercent NumericPoint Nvo Dig Cmd Free _ value temp Remote_1_DO1 nvoDigCmdFree value NumericPoint Nvo Dig Cmd Free _state temp Remote_1_DO1 nvoDigCmdFree state EnumPoint 95 7769 01 156 Table 90 XL15C Point Details Continued WEBVISION Point Name Network Variable Field Point Type Nvo Appl Mode _hvac Mode temp NetworkOut nvoAppIMode hvacMode EnumPoint Nvo Econ Enable _ value temp NetworkOut nvoEconEnable value NumericPoint Nvo Econ Enable _ state temp NetworkOut nvoEconEnable state EnumPoint Nvo Occupancy _occupancy temp NetworkOut nvoOccupancy occupancy EnumPoint Nvo Cool U T ML _value temp NetworkOut nvoCoolUTML value NumericPoint Nvo Cool U TM L _state temp NetworkOut nvoCoolUTML state EnumPoint Nvo Heat U T M L _value temp NetworkOut nvoHeatUTML value NumericPoint Nvo Heat U T M L _state temp NetworkOut nvoHeatUTML state EnumPoint Nvo Bypass _value temp ControlLoop_1 nvoBypass value NumericPoint Nvo Bypass _state temp ControlLoop_1 nvoBypass state EnumPoint Nvo F T Status _effective Set Point temp ControlLoop_1 nvoFTStatus data effectiveSetPoint NumericPoint Nvo F T Status _cntrl Sensor temp ControlLoop_1 nvoFTStatus data cntrlSensor NumericPoint Nvo F T Status _reset Amoun
129. ame Return Air Temperature Graphics X Alarms X Trends X Commandable Internal Use Valid Values Units F Precision 1 Min 256 0 Max 256 0 Scheduled Occupancy Default Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby ShutDown x lt x lt x lt False or True Smoke Monitor x lt x lt x lt False or True Space Co2 Units ppm Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 65535 0 Space Temperature Units F Precision 1 Min 256 0 Max 256 0 Temperature Control Point Water Source Heat Pump Enable x lt x lt Units F Precision 1 Min 256 0 Max 256 0 False or True Window Open Closed or Open 121 95 7769 01 WEBVISION Fan Coil Unit Controller FCU Table 78 provides the FCU points detail and Table 79 on page 123 provides the FCU application of points Table 78 FCU Points Details Point Name Network Variable Field Point Type Occupied Cool nciSetPnts occupiedCool NumericWritable Standby Cool nciSetPnts standbyCool NumericWritable Unoccupied Cool nciSetPnts unoccupiedCool NumericWritable Occupied Heat nciSetPnts occupiedHeat NumericWritable Standby Heat nciSetPnts standbyHeat NumericWritable Unoccupied Heat nciSetPnts unoccupiedHeat NumericWritable Current State nviTodEvent currentState EnumWritable Next State nviTodEvent nextState EnumWritable Time To Next
130. and outputs to use throttling range integral time derivative time start up ramp time recovery reset and sequencer parameters set points minimum on off and bypass times DLC shed bump and lead lag Purpose Define up to ten control loops that create outputs based on algorithms Mode Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off line or On line Procedure 1 On the Configuration page click Control Loop The Control Loop page appears on the right pane Select a control loop from Select Loop Type a Loop Name 4 Select Algorithm Type This field defines the algorithm type for the control loop The default type is Unconfigured The user can select the type to be Flex PID or Flex Non Linear Only if the algorithm type is Flex PID or Flex Non Linear will the other controls in the Control Loop page get enabled Select the corresponding radio button to select an algorithm type 5 Selecta priority from Occupancy Override Priority The two options for occupancy override priority are e With Network wins the default nviManOcc has priority If nviManOcc is some other value than OC_NUL then the result is the value on nviManOcc When nviManOcc is OC_NUL then nviBypass has priority If nviBypass is SW_OFF SW_NUL then the wall module override is evaluated Both nviManOcc and the wall module override use the internal bypass timers nviBypass depends upon the other node s timer to control the
131. are Last Wins Last received input takes precedence It can be either the Bypass button or the Network signal Network Wins The Network signal always takes precedence over the Bypass button Energy DLC SetPoint Bump Management For load shedding applications Define the temporary setpoint shift to be added to the setpoint when the controller receives a Load Shedding command By raising the setpoint during cooling operation or reducing the setpoint during heating operation the controller reduces the amount of heat or cool energy dissipated as a contribution to load shed algorithms e The parameter can be set in the range 0 to 10 DDC 0 to 18 DDF Table 37 FCU Miscellaneous Field Options Continued WEBVISION Table 38 FCU PID Options Continued Name Definitions Energy Cool Rec Ramp Heat Rec Ramp Management Define the rate at which the setpoint is reset continued during changes between occupancy modes to provide a form of optimum start algorithm FCU PID Purpose Configure the variables for closed loop control PID parameters can be set separately for both heating and cooling control Mode Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off line or On line Procedure 1 Click the PID button on the left pane to open the PID Configuration page Enter information into available fields 3 Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to the last saved settings
132. ation into available fields 3 Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to the last saved settings 4 Click Next to display the Economizer Configuration page or Back to display the Input Configuration page UV Equipment Control fields Table 55 Unit Ventilator Control Options WEBVISION Table 55 Unit Ventilator Control Options Continued Name Filter Setpoint Definition This option is enabled if an analog Filter Pressure sensor was selected If the measured pressure exceeds this setpoint the Dirty Filter alarm is issued There is a built in hysteresis of 25 percent of the Filter Press Stpt value for the Dirty Filter alarm to return to normal Name Cascade Control Fan Control Definition Cascade control modulates stages heating cooling to control discharge air temperature and uses space temperature to reset the discharge air temperature set point Select one of the following cascade control options Yes Select Yes only if 1both a Discharge Air Temperature sensor and modulating heating or cooling are configured No Select No if the heating cooling equipment are controlled strictly from space temperature and discharge temperature is not used Select one of the following fan control options Auto Auto cycles the fan with call for cooling and heating if you set Fan Heating to On next parameter Continuous Continuous means the fan runs continuously in the
133. ation of Points Continued WEBVISION Point Name Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use Valid Values Time To Next State X Units min Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 65535 0 DLC Shed X Units null Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 255 0 DLC Shed X Units null Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 255 0 Nvo Alarm Status _ St Pt Lp8 Alm X False or True Nvo Alarm Status _ St Pt Lp7 Alm X False or True Nvo Alarm Status _ St Pt Lp6 Alm X False or True Nvo Alarm Status _ St Pt Lp5 Alm X False or True Nvo Alarm Status _ St Pt Lp4 Alm X False or True Nvo Alarm Status _ St Pt Lp3 Alm X False or True Nvo Alarm Status _ St Pt Lp2 Alm X False or True Nvo Alarm Status _ St Pt Lp1 Alm X False or True Nvo Alarm Status _ R A M Checksum Alm X False or True Nvo Alarm Status _ File Alm X False or True Nvo Alarm Status _ Input Rem Poll Alm X False or True Nvo Alarm Status _ Flash Chksum Alm X False or True Nvo Alarm Status _ Sensor Alm X False or True Nvo Alarm Status _ Input N V Alm X False or True Nvo Alarm Status _ St Pt Lp10 Alm X False or True Nvo Alarm Status _ St Pt Lp9 Alm X False or True Nci Flex Set Pts _occupied X X X Units null Precision 1 Min inf Max inf Nci Flex Set Pts _standby X X X Units null Precision 1 Min inf Max inf Nci Flex Set Pts _unoccupied X X X Units null Precision 1 Min inf Max inf Nvi Bypass _value X X X Units Precision 1 Min 0 0 Max 100 0 Nvi Bypass _state X
134. aved settings 4 Click Back to display the PID Configuration page Fields DI1 Window Occupancy Air Flow Changeover Table 13 CHC Wiring Diagram Output Terminal Terminal Output2 14 15 17 18 3 stage 14 On stage 2 17 On stage 1 15 On stage 2 18 On stage 2 14 On 15 On stage 3 17 On 18 On stage 3 PWM 14 PWM 17 PWM 15 not used 18 not used Thermal 14 Pulse Modulated 17 Pulse Modulated 15 not used 18 not used Power 24VAC 50 60 Hz Configuring the Constant Volume Air Handling Unit Controllers CVAHU Description The W7750 series is the Constant Volume Air Handling Unit Name Definition CVAHU controller in the Excel 10 family It is a LonMark Wall Use these terminals to connect the Wall Module compliant device designed to control single zone and heat Module e Override LED pump air handlers The W7750 series can be configured to e Setpoint control a wide variety of possible equipment arrangements e Bypass Button f Room Temp Sensor The various models available for The XL10 CVAHU are e W7750A e W7750B LON Bus e W7750C The terminals in Table 14 are used to connect the LON Bus FTT 10A The LON terminals are insensitive to polarity Purpose Table 14 CHC LON Bus Terminals To configure a CVAHU application Output Terminal Terminal igati Output2 14 15 17 18 Navigating to CVAHU Pages Go to the Devices tab
135. ce are listed Check the devices that you want to assign to the current load 5 Click Save to save the settings To edit the Load 1 Click the DLC tab The DLC Status page appears 2 Click the Load Assignment tab to display the Load Assignment page 3 Select the load to edit from the Load Assignment Name list and the selected load s details appear 4 Modify the required fields as described in step 4 of To add a Load on page 23 5 Click Save to save the settings Assign Load It displays the status of an individual load assignment or all load assignments If the DLC load configuration is modified then the load assignment status is displayed as Normal WebVision restores all the load assignments immediately by 95 7769 01 WEBVISION issuing a restore command even if the load assignments are in the shed state After re loading the configuration all the Minimum On Shed timers are also reset NOTE When DLC is in the Reloading Configuration mode only the status of the load assignments is displayed It implies that the respective load objects are not displayed To view the load assignment details 1 Click the DLC tab The DLC Status page appears 2 Click the Load Assignment tab The Load Assignment page appears WebVision gt DLC gt Sson Loa Min Shed Time minutes Max Shed Time minutes Required field Fig 30 Load Assignme
136. ce dialog box appears Enter the following details Channel v Excel ORIO v3 Fig 25 Add Device dialog box Device Name Name of the device e Channel The channel on which the device is present e Device Type Type of the device Model Type the model number of the device Application Type Type of application that is required for the selected device Application Version Type the version of application used Application File Application that must run on the device Click Browse to upload an application file e Neuron ID The 48 bit unique identifier each LONWoRKS Controller node has This is used to address the nodes on a LONWOoRKS network e Description Description of the device All the fields marked with an asterisk are mandatory However it is advised to provide all the information in the fields so that WebVision can provide more manageable features 2 The above listed parameters form a comprehensive list The appearance of these parameters vary depending upon the selected device 3 Click Add to add the device NOTE Click Cancel to abort the action NOTE To support 3rd party devices other than the controllers listed in the dialog box you must have a corresponding Niagara LNML file that contains information about the device and its points This file has to be uploaded while adding a device to WebVision WebVision allows you to create alarms and trends on th
137. cel 10 VAV II Configuration Parameters Continued Name Definition Output Settings Section continued Reheat Type continued Fan Type Float Periph Then Reheat There is a modulating valve for the VAV Terminal reheat and a modulating valve for the space peripheral reheat This option uses the series 60 type floating control for both valve outputs The peripheral valve is modulated as the first stage of reheat and the VAV Terminal reheat valve is modulated open as the second stage Four triac outputs are required for this option e PWM Reheat There is a modulating valve for the VAV Terminal reheat This option uses Pulse Width Modulation control for the output to the valve One triac output is required for this option e PWM Periph There is a modulating valve for the space peripheral reheat This option uses Pulse Width Modulation control for the output to the valve One triac output is required for this option PWM Reheat Then Periph There is a modulating valve for the VAV Terminal reheat and a modulating valve for the space peripheral reheat This option uses Pulse Width Modulation control for both valve outputs The VAV Terminal reheat valve is modulated as the first stage of reheat and the peripheral reheat valve is modulated open as the second stage Two triac outputs are required for this option e PWM Periph Then Reheat There is a modulating valve for the VAV Terminal reheat and a modulating valve f
138. ch was selected This value sets the amount of time that must pass after closed contacts on the Air Flow switch are detected before the controller shuts down and attempts a restart If three fan start attempts fail to prove air flow the controller is disabled and locked out until reset This action allows the fan to come up to speed on start up and prevents false air flow failure alarms 77 Name Definition IAQ Sensor This is the Indoor Air Quality setpoint This Setpoint setting in ppm is compared to the current actual indoor CO sensor reading to determine the indoor air quality OAQ Sensor This is the Outdoor Air Quality setpoint Setpoint This setting in ppm is compared to the current actual outdoor CO or CO sensor reading to determine the outdoor air quality If OAQ is poor the economizer damper is closed to 0 Enable Type Source for economizer enable decisions Choose one of the following methods to determine when to use outdoor air for cooling Digital OutDoorTemp OdEnth Type A OdEnth Type B OdEnth Type C OdEnth Type D Difffemp SingleEnth DiffEnth EconNul 95 7769 01 WEBVISION Table 56 Unit Ventilator Economizer Settings Continued Name Definition OA Damper Min Minimum position of the Outdoor Damper Pos 0 to 100 Under normal Occupied mode operation the dampers are not closed below this setting If Unoccupied or if a Discharge Low Temperature con
139. change to PID control parameters is made the adjustments should be gradual After each change allow the system to stabilize so the effects are accurately observed Make further refinements as needed until the system is operating as desired If the default values are changed and you want to reset them add a second CVAHU Controller to the subnet record then re enter the default PID values to the first CVAHU Procedure 1 Click the PID button on the left pane to open the PID Configuration page Enter information into available fields 3 Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to the last saved settings 4 Click Next to display the Custom Wiring page or Back to display the Miscellaneous Parameters Configuration page CAUTION Equipment Damage Possible Setting Control Band too low may cause large over or undershooting of setpoint N The smaller the Control Band the more responsive the control output Be careful not to set the Control Band heating cooling or econ too low This can happen if the space or 95 7769 01 52 discharge sensors or wiring are in noisy environments and the value reported to the controller is not stable such that it bounces The Control Band is used only in modulating control and has no purpose when staged control is configured CVAHU PID fields Table 26 lists the CVAHU PID fields Table 26 CVAHU PID Fields Name Definition Cooling Enter the range in degrees 2
140. ches to OFF e OR Logical OR function If any one of the configured digital input conditions 6 maximum are true the output will be ON OR must be configured if the Logic Loop digital output is to be used Click the OR button to open the OR Configuration dialog box e Digital Input 1 through 6 Select a Link Type and Link Name for digital inputs 95 WEBVISION On Delay Time The delay in time for switching from one state to another before the output value switches to ON Off Delay Time The delay in time for switching from one state to another before the output value switches to OFF e DCAO Digital Compare Analog Output Sets the output value to equal analog input_1 if digital input is true and analog input_2 if the digital input is false DCAO must be configured if the Logic Loop analog output is to be used Click the DCAO button to open the DCAO Configuration dialog box e Digital Input Select a Link Type and Link Name for digital inputs Analog Input 1 and 2 Select a Link Type and Link Name for analog inputs e On Delay Time The delay in time for switching from one state to another before the output value switches to ON Off Delay Time The delay in time for switching from one state to another before the output value switches to OFF Configuring XL15C Start Stop Loops There are eight start stop loops The start stop control loops direct control of loads based on time of day schedules The most comm
141. ct the error rate has on the output signal The error rate is how fast the error value is changing It can also be the direction space temperature is going either towards or away from the setpoint and its speed quickly or slowly A decrease in Derivative Time causes a given error rate to have a larger effect on the output signal CVAHU Custom Wiring Configuring CVAHU Custom Wiring Use the CVAHU Custom Wiring page to assign configured outputs to physical pins Purpose View or modify sensor output wiring locations Mode Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off line or On line NOTE To add or delete outputs refer to CVAHU Controller Outputs on page 45 Limits Outputs must be configured using the Unit Ventilator Controller Outputs page WEBVISION CVAHU Wiring Diagram Purpose Display the wiring diagram for the controller Mode Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off line or On line Procedure 1 Click the Wiring Diagram button on the left pane to open the Wiring Diagram Configuration page 2 Enter information into available fields 3 Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to the last saved settings 4 Click Back to display the PID Configuration page CVAHU Wiring Terminals Table 28 lists the CVAHU Wiring terminals Procedure Table 28 CVAHU Wiring Terminals 1 Click the Wiring Assi
142. cy nvoData SchedOcc EnumPoint Sensor Occupancy nvoData SenOcc EnumPoint Space Temperature nvoData siSpaceTempS7 NumericPoint Space Temperature IO nvolO siSpaceTempS7 NumericPoint Supply Temperature nvoData siSupplyTempS7 NumericPoint Temperature Sensor 0 nvolO siTempSensorS7NO NumericPoint Temperature Sensor 1 nvolO siTempSensorS7N1 NumericPoint Temperature Setpoint nvoData siTempControlPtS7 NumericPoint Window Open nvoData WindowOpen EnumPoint Window Open IO nvolO WindowOpen EnumPoint Table 87 VAV II Application of Points Point Name Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use Valid Values Occupied Cool Setpoint X Units C Precision 2 Min 10 0 Max 35 0 Standby Cool Setpoint X Units C Precision 2 Min 10 0 Max 35 0 95 7769 01 146 Table 87 VAV II Application of Points Continued WEBVISION Point Name Unoccupied Cool Setpoint Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use x Valid Values Units C Precision 2 Min 10 0 Max 35 0 Occupied Heat Setpoint Units C Precision 2 Min 10 0 Max 35 0 Standby Heat Setpoint Units C Precision 2 Min 10 0 Max 35 0 Unoccupied Heat Setpoint Units C Precision 2 Min 10 0 Max 35 0 Current State Default Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Next State Default Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Time To Next State Units min Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 65535 0
143. d alarms e mail recipients Name Lists names of the users who will receive the alarm E Mail notification E Mail ID Lists the E Mail IDs of the corresponding users e Recipient Type Lists the type of user e Associated Alarm Priorities Lists the alarm priorities associated to the corresponding user if the user is external Alarm priorities range from 1 to 10 1 being the lowest priority level and 10 being the highest priority level Check Select All to select all the alarm priorities 95 7769 01 10 Add Edit or Delete Alarm E Mail Recipient To add an alarm E Mail recipient s details 1 Click the Alarms tab The View Alarms page appears 2 Click the Alarm E Mail Notification Setup tab on the View Alarms page The Alarm E Mail Notification Setup page appears 3 Click Add Alarm E Mail Recipient The Add Alarm E Mail Recipient page appears 4 Select the recipient type using the Select Recipient Type drop down list e Foran External recipient enter Recipient Name Name of the recipient e Recipient E Mail ID E Mail ID of the recipient e For an Internal recipient enter e Select User Select the type of the user using the drop down list 5 Select the alarm priorities that must be informed to the recipient Check the Select All check box to select all the alarm priorities 6 Click Save to add a new recipient NOTE Click Cancel to abort the action To edit an alarm E Mail recipie
144. d energy management 3 Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to parameters the last saved settings 4 Click Next to display the PID Configuration page or Mode Back to display the Zone Control Configuration page Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off line or On line HYD Miscellaneous Parameter fields Table 46 Hydronic Miscellaneous and Energy Management Parameters Name Definition Miscellaneous Configures operator bypass and priority options Bypass Time Define the period of time 0 to 1080 minutes in which the controller operates to occupied setpoints after the local user has pressed the override button Override Priority Allocate priority between local wall module operations for example Bypass and commands from the building management central Choices are LAST WINS Last received input takes precedence It can be either the Bypass button or the Network signal NETWORK WINS The Network signal always takes precedence over the Bypass button Energy DLC Stpt Bump Management For load shedding applications define the temporary setpoint shift to be added to the setpoint when the controller receives a Load Shedding command By raising the setpoint during cooling operation or reducing the setpoint during heating operation the controller reduces the amount of heat or cool energy dissipated as a contribution to load shed algorithms The parameter can be set in the range 0 to 10DDC 0 to 18DDF Cool Rec Ram
145. d type the url in the URL field 6 Click OK to view the URL in the image NOTE To abort the action click Cancel NOTE A maximum of fifty links can be inserted in a graphic in WebVision To delete selected objects 1 Select the object that you want to delete from the graphic 2 Click Delete Selected objects The selected object is deleted To copy graphics 1 Click the button The Copy Graphics From dialog box appears 2 Click Delete Selected objects The selected object is deleted Schedules Schedules define the days and times when an occupancy event must occur Schedules are weekly calendars for occupancy mode changes Schedules also contain special event information such as holidays or unplanned events NOTE You can have a maximum of 50 schedules in WebVision You can create modify or delete a schedule only if you have these privileges assigned to you There are three occupancy modes Occupied A period of time when the controlled environment is considered to be occupied It requires a closer control for comfort health and safety Unoccupied A period of time when the controlled environment is considered to be unoccupied It is used to reduce energy consumption Standby A period during the normal occupied period when the space may not be occupied It is used for energy saving programs No Event WebVision displays the default state as Occupied when no event is configured
146. de NOTE A discharge low temperature condition overrides this setting and closes the dampers to prevent equipment damage due to freezing Enable Setpoint Defines the setpoint value for enabling the economizer OA Temp High Defines the high limit for the outside Limit temperature Name Definition Source of the economizer enable decision for determining when to use outdoor air for cooling The list of available selections is NoLocalEconSensor OutdoorTemp Difffemp OdEnthTypeA OdEnthTypeB OdEnthTypeC OdEnthTypeD SingleEnthalpy DiffEnthalpy Digital The W7750A will have the following options only e NoLocalEconSensor e OutdoorTemp e Digital Enable Type Min Position Minimum position of the Outdoor Damper 0 to 100 percent Under normal Occupied mode operation the dampers are not closed below this setting If Unoccupied or if a Discharge Low Temperature condition exists the dampers are closed below this setting 49 CVAHU HC Stages Description The minimum on off times Cycles hour Minimum and maximum recovery ramps are set for heating and cooling stages of a CVAHU application Purpose Define heating and cooling h c stage parameters including minimum on and off times Mode Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off line or On line Procedure 1 Click the H C Stages button on the left pane to open the Heat Cool Stages Configuration
147. de http customer honeywell com request cfm form xx xxxx Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off line or On line CVAHU Outputs Procedure 1 Click the Outputs button on the left pane to open the Description Output Configuration page CVAHU applications can have a variable number of heating 2 Enter information into available fields and cooling stages The outputs could be of staged PWM 3 Select the appropriate controller type from the floating or Analog type In addition there is a Change over relay Heat Pump Application and Economizer Output The 4 Economizer output can be Floating PWM Analog or Packaged Economizer 1 Optional points can also be selected from this selection Controller Type list Select the power frequency from the Power Frequency list 5 Select the appropriate equipment type from the Equipment Type list 6 Choose the number of heating stages 1 4 or the type PWM or Floating from the Heating list 95 7769 01 44 WEBVISION 7 Choose the number of cooling stages 1 4 or the type 9 Configure the Optional points Refer to Table 16 on PWM or Floating from the Cooling list page 45 for possible values 8 Select the type of economizer from the Economizer list 10 Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to a If the heating cooling or economizer is configured the last saved settings as PWM the Period Zero Scale and Full Scale 11 Click Next to display the Input
148. device that is involved in the binding Target Device Lists the target device involved in the binding Target Point Lists the network object point of the target device that is involved in the binding e Link Status Shows the binding status The status can be bound or unbound To add devices for binding 1 Click Devices on the WebVision page The Device List page is displayed 2 Click Device Binding The Device Binding page is displayed 3 Click Add The Add Device Binding box is displayed 4 Select the following e Channel Source Device Source Point Target Device Target Point 5 Click OK The binding is created in WebVision and has to be downloaded to the controllers To delete bindings 1 Click Devices on the WebVision page The Device List page is displayed 2 Click Device Binding The Device Binding page is displayed 3 Select a pair of bounded devices that you want to delete and click Delete The bindings in WebVision are deleted You have to invoke download to delete the bindings in the devices To download device bindings 1 Click Devices on the WebVision page The Device List page is displayed 2 Click Device Binding The Device Binding page is displayed 3 Click Download The binding settings are downloaded on the selected channel To upload device bindings 1 Click Devices on the WebVision page The Device List page is displayed 2 Click Device Binding The Device Binding page is dis
149. dition exists the dampers are closed below this setting IAQ Position Minimum Position of Damper used when poor Indoor Air Quality conditions exist IAQ sensor gt IAQ Setpoint or if Digital IAQ Switch is on Value range from 0 to 100 NOTE A discharge low temperature condition overrides this setting and closes the dampers to prevent equipment damage due to freezing Use Heat for IAQ Select one of the following options e Yes Enables heat to be used when the damper is opened for IAQ purposes e No Keeps heat disabled if controller is in Cool mode Oa Temp High This field is enabled only when Enable Limit Type is set to Single Enth alpy It provides an outdoor air temperature high limit setting above which the economizer is disabled regardless of the current enthalpy value Mixed Temp This field is enabled only when ASHRAE Setpoint Cycle IIl is selected in the Equipment ASHRAE Cycle Control Tab 3 only Ashrae Cycle When a unit ventilator is in the occupied mode it typically follows one of three operating cycles defined by the American Society of Heating Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers Inc ASHRAE e Cycle I Fixed 100 Outdoor Air e Cycle II Variable Percentage of Outdoor Air with Minimum Position setting e Cycle III Variable Outdoor Air Maintaining Constant Mixed Air Temperature Enable Setpoint This setpoint is enabled if Enable Type is Outside Air Temp D
150. do not cause the controller to operate incorrectly The status of this digital input is reported to the network for use as a free digital input if required It has no effect on the control algorithm FCU Equipment Control Procedure 1 Click the Equipment Control button on the left pane to Purpose open the Equipment Control Configuration page gt 2 Enter information into available fields Define the main control features of controller outputs 3 Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to the last saved settings Mode 4 Click Next to display the Fan Configuration page or Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off line or Back to display the Inputs Configuration page On line FCU Equipment Control fields Table 34 lists the FCU Equipment Control fields and definitions Table 34 FCU Equipment Control Options Name Definitions Output Defines the operating characteristics of the two valve actuator outputs Options Output 1 Output 2 Define operation of output 1 and output 2 as configured in the Outputs page The fields have the same meanings for both outputs Fan Interlock Normally used to protect electric heating coils controlled by Output 1 or Output 2 Without this protection heating coils can overheat This option can also prevent ice up or condensation build up on cooling or compressor coils Yes The fan always turns on for the run up time before turning on the control output t
151. e e Normal e ByPassOnly NOTE No Continuous Unoccupied allowed from the Wall Module s Override button 79 95 7769 01 WEBVISION Table 59 Unit Ventilator Miscellaneous Settings Name Definition Override Priority Set the priority scheme for the Bypass override function You can select one of the following options e Last Whichever was last to occur either the button was pushed or the network signal arrived e Net The network signal always takes precedence over the push button This field is enabled if Override Type is Normal or Bypass Only Bypass Time Set the time period for a bypass override event Value ranges from 0 through 1080 minutes Enabled if Override Type is Normal or Bypass Only Max Da Temp Setpoint Value ranges from 65 to 135 F 18 to 57 C Enabled if you selected a discharge air temperature sensor This setting is only used if Cascade Control is enabled Min Da Temp Value ranges from 0 to 60 F 18 to 16 C Enabled if you selected a discharge air temperature sensor This setting is used in Cascade Control and as the Low Limit alarm threshold for discharge temp Setpoint Knob Select Relative plus or minus up to 10 Type degrees from the current actual setpoint set on the Zone Options page or Absolute_Middle the Wall Module s knob sets the midpoint between the heat and cool current actual setpoints You can select one of the f
152. e 3rd party devices WebVision cannot drive the device s scheduled occupancy state do energy management using DLC or do VAV balancing for 3rd party devices To discover devices You can discover the devices available on the network and then add them to WebVision NOTE Once a device is selected in the Discovered Device table only the matching device type in the Available devices table is enabled for selection _ Click the Devices tab The Device List page appears 2 Click Discover The Discover Device in the network dialog box appears The discovered devices are displayed 17 WEBVISION Discover Devices Select Channel Name RJ ocv f channett Discovered Devices CI Select an Available Devices Device Name Type Neuron ID Exceh0FCU2 00 00 00 00 00 00 ev select a channel to start searching for the devices had Required field Maer Fig 26 Devices Tab Device List Discover button 3 Select a channel on which you want to discover devices 4 Click Discover to start discovery Once the discovery is completed WebVision lists the discovered new devices on the left side list 5 If you want to match a discovered device against an existing device in WebVision select the discovered device on the left side list and select the existing device on the right side list and click Match NOTE Check the Select All check box to select all the devices simultaneously 6 Click Add
153. e Balancing tab to display the Balancing page 2 Select a device from the list and click Balance to display the balancing details of the selected device 3 View Edit the following details e Device Name Name of the VAV device which is selected for balancing e Damper Position Displays the position of the damper This field is non editable The damper position varies to attain stable air flow e Sensed Airflow Displays the actual air flow that is measured by a pressure sensor connected to the VAV device This field is non editable Max Airflow Setpoint This allows you to set the maximum airflow setpoint The field is enabled by default Enter the maximum airflow setpoint value use Change max setpoint to write the maximum airflow setpoint to the device e Start Max Balance Click on this button to balance the device for the maximum air flow setpoint Min Airflow Setpoint This allows you to set the minimum air flow setpoint value which must be less than the maximum value The field is enabled by default It allows you to set the minimum airflow setpoint value use Change min setpoint to write the minimum airflow setpoint to the device e Start Min Balance Click on this button to balance the device for the minimum air flow setpoint e Zero Airflow Setpoint By default 0 is the setpoint value and you cannot edit this field Start Zero Balance Click on this button to balance the device for the zero air flow setpoint 4 Clic
154. e Excel 10 family product line These controllers provide room temperature control for two and four pipe fan coil units with optional electric heating coils W7752D F and can control single two or three speed fans The controller is provided with default configuration settings from the factory and is fully operable on installation Using standard Echelon configuration tools the controller can be configured with job specific settings A variety of optional wall modules interface with the FCU controllers and provide any or all of the following setpoint adjustment fan speed adjustment and occupancy bypass button All wall modules include a space temperature sensor however a remote C7068A return air sensor can also be used 95 7769 01 54 Supported Output Types Table 30 lists the supported output types for the FCU Controller Table 30 FCU Controller Output Types Output Options Heating Floating thermal PWM on off multi stage electric Cooling Floating thermal PWM on off multi stage compressor Fan On Off 2 speed 3 speed Electric Reheat On Off Navigating to FCU Pages Go to the Devices tab Expand the list of devices on the left pane listed under WebVision Select a device to view its properties Sequences Heat and cool sequences can be selected to be active or not active giving a total of eight different sequence options each can be with or without fan control Heat only Cool onl
155. e ON before the next stage can turn ON It ranges from 0 to 254 minutes The Integral stage Off Time is the interstage OFF time for the staged digital outputs at a resolution of 1 minute It is the time when a higher numbered stage must be OFF before the next stage can turn ON It ranges from 0 to 254 minutes Configuring XL15C Logic Loops The XL15C controller has 32 Logic Loops Each configured Logic Loop generates outputs by applying logic functions on different analog and digital inputs selected These logic loop outputs are commonly used as inputs to control loops start stop loops and math functions Purpose To configure logic loops Procedure 1 On the Configuration page click the Logic Loops tab The Logic Loops page appears on the right pane 2 Select a logic loop from Select Loop 3 Type a Loop Name There are 32 Logic Loops Default name for the Logic Loops are Logc_Loop_1 Logc_Loop_2 etc The Logic Loop names can be changed to make each Loop easier to identify Select the name to be changed in the Logic Loop name combo and type the new name A Logic Loop name can have a maximum of 18 characters 4 Select Type the following options e ACDO Analog Compare Digital Output Compares lt gt or the values of 2 analog inputs and sets the output to true or false 3 ACDO buttons ACDO1 ACDO2 and ACDO3 are available in each Logic Loop Click an ACDO button to open the ACDO Configuration dialog box Analog Inp
156. e X false or true Frost Protect X false or true Indoor Air Quality Override X false or true Invalid Setpoint X false or true Low Limit Economizer Close X false or true Node Disabled X false or true Outside Air Quality X false or true Sensor Failed X false or true 95 7769 01 140 Table 85 UV Application of Points Continued WEBVISION Point Name Application Mode Graphics X Alarms X Trends X Commandable X Internal Use Valid Values Default Auto Heat Morning Warmup Cool Night Purge Pre cool Off Test Emergency Heat Fan Only Free Cool Ice Maximum Heat Economy Dehumidify Calibrate Emergency Cool Emergency Steam Max Cool HVAC Load No Load Fan Speed Command Manual Mode Manual Occupancy Temporary Setpoint Off Zero Low Medium High Auto Enable Disable Manual Suppress Alarms Unsuppress Alarms Default Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Units C Precision 1 Min 10 0 Max 35 0 Auxiliary Economizer Out x lt x lt x lt Off or On Bypass Timer Calculated Outdoor Enthalpy Units min Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 65535 0 Units BTU Ib Precision 1 Min 256 0 Max 256 0 Calculated Return Air Enthalpy Units BTU Ib Precision 1 Min 256 0 Max 256 0 Coil Freeze State x lt x lt x lt False or True Cool Percent Units Precision 1 Min 163 8 Max 163 8 141
157. e and overwritten at once depending on the configuration of the load assignment Each load assignment is identified by a load assignment number ranging from 1 to 50 21 WEBVISION The following are the two types of loads that DLC sheds to maintain demand below the peak setpoint Off Continuous Loads Off Continuous loads are the first loads that are shed by DLC Once shed they are not restored immediately Loads marked as Off Continuous generally control the loads that are least important to overall operation of the facility When KW demand exceeds the peak setpoint Off Continuous loads are shed first starting from the lowest numbered load 1 to the highest 50 These loads are shed until the demand goes below the peak setpoint limit The first load is shed at staging interval seconds after the KW exceeds the peak setpoint Additional loads are shed at staging interval seconds until the KW is less than the peak setpoint Off Continuous loads once shed are the last to be restored when demand is less than the normal level setpoint minus the dead band Off continuous loads are restored in the order reverse to which they were shed highest load 50th is restored first Any Off Continuous load that is shed remains inactive for at least the configured Minimum Shed Time Rotating Loads Rotating loads are shed or adjusted after shedding Off Continuous loads as DLC needs to reduce the demand Loads marked as Rotating have more imp
158. e different functions depending on the control output type selected in Control Outputs CONTROL OUTPUT TYPE FLOATING The value is the actuator run time in the range 20 to 600 seconds CONTROL OUTPUT TYPE PWM The value is the cycle period of the PWM output in the range 20 to 600 seconds CONTROL OUTPUT TYPE ONE TWO OR THREE STAGE The value is the minimum on time for each of the stages for controlling compressor units Reheat Defines the control output level at which the electric reheat relay relay 4 switches Options Switch Level Define the control output level at which the electric reheat output switches on Range 0 to 100 Use a setting of 5 where electric heating has priority over a water heating valve for example as the first heating sequence Or use for electric heating control only Use higher settings for example 90 where water heating has priority over electric heating Or when electric heating is required during summer winter changeover periods Hysteresis Define the control output level Switch level Hysteresis at which the Reheat control output switches off PWM Allows the full range of the PWM outputs to be configured Many PWM controlled devices cannot provide an output of Options 0 or 100 because a PWM output shows no switching at these percentages Therefore most PWM devices have a minimum duty cycle and a maximum duty cycle between which they operate from zero to full scale The
159. e left pane to open the Miscellaneous Parameters Configuration page 2 Enter information into available fields 3 Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to the last saved settings 4 Click Next to display the PID Configuration page or Back to display the Zone Options Configuration page UV Miscellaneous settings Table 59 Unit Ventilator Miscellaneous Settings Setpoint range 50 to 90 F 10 to 32 C Heating Enter Unoccupied heating setpoint Unoccupied range 50 to 90 F 10 to 32 C Setpoint Use Wall Module Select usage of setpoint adjustment Setpoint potentiometer on a connected Wall Module This field is active if you selected a Sensor_Setpoint type in the Wall Module field on the Input tab Min Limit Setpoint Provides a lower limit on the allowed settings of the Wall Module s setpoint knob Enabled if Use Wall Module Setpoint is Yes Values range from 55 to 85 F when the setpoint knob type is absolute and range for relative setpoint knob type is 9 to 9 DDf Name Definition DLC Setpoint Bump Upon receipt of a DLC_Shed signal over the LonWorks Bus network the current operating setpoint value is bumped up down for cool heat modes by this amount Select a value from 0 through 10 Override Type Specify the type of Bypass override functions that are available from the Wall Module s Override button You can select one of the following options e Non
160. e remaining in switching to next occupancy state e Replicate Click Replicate to replicate the settings Add Edit Schedules You can add a maximum of 50 schedules NOTE All fields marked with an asterisk are mandatory To create a new schedule 1 Click the Schedule tab A list of schedules appears 2 Click P tal A The Properties page appears Creste New Schedule O Copy from another WebVision O Follow from another WebVision Schedule Name MNoevent Unoccupied Thursday Frida Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday 12 00 a m 1 00 a m 2 00 a m a 3 00 a m P 4 00 a m 5 00 a m j 6 00 a m 7 00 a m 8 00 a m annam Fig 10 Schedule Properties page 3 Select the Create New Schedule option 4 Typea schedule name in the Schedule Name field and provide a description in the Description field 5 Select the cells by dragging over the cells Cells can be selected horizontally and vertically After selecting the cells click on the schedule occupancy state button to indicate the state on the selected cell 6 Click Apply to apply the schedule 7 Click Finish to save the settings NOTE Click Edit Time and type the Start Time and End Time You can change the start and end time of the selected area 95 7769 01 WEBVISION To edit a schedule 1 Click the Schedule tab A list of schedules appears 2 Click the sched
161. e setpoint knob of the Wall Module Enabled if Wall Module Setpoint is configured Input Configuration page Values range from 9 to 9 Setpoint default set to OFFSET or from 50 to 90 Setpoint default set to ABSOLUTE_MIDDLE 95 7769 01 50 Table 24 CVAHU Zone Options Fields Continued WEBVISION Table 25 CVAHU Miscellaneous Fields Continued Name Max Limit Setpoint Definition Provides an upper limit on the allowed settings of the setpoint knob of the Wall Module Enabled if Wall Module Setpoint is configured Input tab Values range from 9 to 9 Setpoint default set to OFFSET or from 50 to 90 Setpoint default set to ABSOLUTE_MIDDLE CVAHU Miscellaneous Purpose Define additional CVAHU Controller parameters such as DLC setpoint bump Mode Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off line or On line Procedure 1 Click the Miscellaneous button on the left pane to open the Miscellaneous Configuration page 2 Enter information into available fields 3 Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to the last saved settings 4 Click Next to display the PID Configuration page or Back to display the Zone Options Configuration page Name Use Wall Module Definition Select one of the following options e Yes e No If set to Yes the wall module setpoints are used by the controller and those set in the configuration are ignored
162. ed DLC Status Demand Limit Control is a function that controls the maximum power demand made on the whole system by shedding some of the load based on priority where total power usage of configured loads exceeds the predefined limit Shedding requires turning off some digital output or changing a setpoint to a more economical level You can view the DLC service status that includes all load assignment details DLC status is updated at the rate of the staging interval To view the status of the DLC 1 Click the DLC tab The DLC Status page appears Current kW DLC Status Filter Fiter By None Min On Shed Time minutes Fig 27 DLC Status page 2 The following information is displayed as read only text Setpoint Displays the setpoint value e Current KW Displays the average power consumption of the total assigned load e DLC Status Displays the current DLC status Four modes present are Disable Deadband Shed and Restore NOTE Use Filters to quickly search the required DLC mode 95 7769 01 22 Use one of the following filter options to search for the required load assignment Load Name Pattern Shed Method Shed State NOTE To quickly search type the first letter of the required filter criteria in the Keyword text box and type an asterisk This lists all the names starting with the first letter that you have written in the Keyword text box 3 The following information is di
163. ed DLC Communication Restored rtnComfailTempreset Outdoor Temp Com Restored Occ Sensor Com Restored Window Com Restored Manual Heat Com Restored Manual Cool Com Restored rtnHwSwMismatch rtnReserve020 rtnReserve021 rtnReserve022 rtnReserve023 rtnReserve024 Alarm Notify Disabled No Alarm Node Off Frost Invalid Setpoint Temperature Sensor Failed Setpoint Knob Failed Fan Speed Switch Failed Fan Failure SpaceTemp Com Failed HVAC Mode Com Failed Setpoint Offset Com Alarm Type continued Cool Output Failed Sched Occ Com Failed DLC Communication Failed almComfailTempreset Outdoor Temp Com Failed Occ Sensor Com Failed Window Com Failed Manual Heat Com Failed Manual Cool Com Failed almHwSwMismatch almReserve020 almReserve021 almReserve022 almReserve023 almReserve024 Units Precision 1 Min 163 8 Max 163 8 DLC Shed x lt x lt x lt Restored or Shed Economizer Output Units Precision 1 Min 163 8 Max 163 8 133 95 7769 01 WEBVISION Table 81 HYD Application of Points Continued Point name Effective Occupancy Graphics X Alarms x Trends X Commandable Internal Use Valid Values Default Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Effective Sensor Occupancy Default Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Effective Window Open Closed or Open External Active True or False Fan Feedback
164. efinition Wall Configures the functionality of the connected wall module Be careful that the features configured here are the same as Module the features available on the wall module device to be connected Space Temp Sensor Define whether or not the controller is to be used with a space temperature sensor connected to its input Typically a space temperature sensor is used but in cases where the space temperature is supplied from another device via the network the local space temperature sensor input is not used YES The local space temperature sensor input is used Ensure that a space temperature sensor is actually connected otherwise the controller measures incorrect values NO The local space temperature sensor is not used This option must be selected when a sensor is not connected LED LCD Display This configuration defines whether a Wall Module with LED or a Wall Module with LCD Display is connected For the LED there is shown either the Override Status or the Effective Occupancy Status The LCD Display shows the both the Effective and the Override Status and an additional Off Condition The Override Status results from the Scheduler the Network Override the Override Button and the Occupancy Sensor The Off Condition results from the Fanspeed Switch the Window Contact and the Medium from nviApplicMode LED_OVERRIDE The LED shows the Override from the Override Button or from the Network On means Override Bypass 1 F
165. end Setup page appears 3 Click Add Trend The Add New Trend page appears 4 Enter select the following details NOTE All the fields in this section are mandatory Trend Name The unique name for the trend Select Point Click Select Point Select a Channel Device and Point Click OK The selected values appear in the respective fields NOTE Start time must be less than the end time Start Time The start time of the sampling period Click to select the date month and year End Time Check Enable End Time to enable the end time field The end time of the sampling period Click to select the date month and year Trend Type Indicates the type of trend e Periodic Sampling Indicates the time interval between two successive read operations on the point Select Periodic Sampling option and in the Sampling Interval list select the desired time interval 95 7769 01 12 The sampling interval time can range from a few seconds to a few minutes The range covered is 15 seconds 30 seconds 60 seconds 1 minute 900 seconds 15 minutes 1800 seconds 30 minutes 2700 seconds 45 minutes 3600 seconds 60 minutes e Change of Value Indicates that the next sample is collected when the point value changes This results in less number of samples getting collected for plotting the same trend as compared to Periodic Sampling Change Tolerance is required only for numeric points
166. ent NumericPoint Manual Mode nviManualMode ManualMode EnumPoint Table 79 FCU Application of Points Point name Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use Valid Values Occupied Cool Setpoint X Units C Precision 2 Min 10 0 Max 35 0 Standby Cool Setpoint X Units C Precision 2 Min 10 0 Max 35 0 Unoccupied Cool Setpoint X Units C Precision 2 Min 10 0 Max 35 0 Occupied Heat Setpoint X Units C Precision 2 Min 10 0 Max 35 0 Standby Heat Setpoint X Units C Precision 2 Min 10 0 Max 35 0 Unoccupied Heat Setpoint X Units C Precision 2 Min 10 0 Max 35 0 Current State X Default Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby 123 95 7769 01 WEBVISION Table 79 FCU Application of Points Continued Point name Next State Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use x Valid Values Default Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Time To Next State Units min Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 65535 0 DLC Shed Shed or Restore Out Of Limits False or True Open Circuit False or True Out Of Service False or True Mechanical Fault False or True Feedback Failure False or True Over Range False or True Under Range Electrical Fault False or True False or True Unable To Measure False or True Communication Failure Fail Self Test False or True False or True
167. ent of Sequencer 2 The Sequencer3 Cool Start field represents start x percent of Sequencer 3 The Sequencer3 Cool End field represents end y percent of Sequencer 3 For example Sequencer 1 Heat Start x 0 y 100 Sequencer 1 Heat End x 33 y 0 Sequencer 2 Econ Start x 33 y 0 Sequencer 2 Econ End x 66 y 100 Sequencer 3 Cool Start x 66 y 0 Sequencer 3 Cool End x 100 y 100 Staging The Stage1 4 are used to control equipment with ON and OFF states Up to 4 digital outputs can be assigned to each of the 4 analog outputs 16 total Typically the user would either assign 4 digital outputs to the primary analog output or up to 12 digital outputs to the three sequenced analog outputs It can be configured as local or remote digital outputs The pseudo point can also be selected The Lead Lag selection is used to equally share the run time of the equipment among the stages The XL15C keeps track of run time by counting the ON time every minute The Minimum On Time is the minimum time for each staged digital output to be ON ata resolution of 1 minute It ranges from 0 to 254 minutes The Minimum Off Time is the minimum time for each staged digital output to be OFF ata resolution of 1 minute It ranges from 0 to 254 minutes The Integral stage On Time is the interstage ON time for the staged digital outputs at a resolution of 1 minute It is the time a lower numbered stage must b
168. equired points to the group 7 Select the required points that you want to delete from the Point List page 8 Click Delete Point A confirmation message appears 9 Click Save to save settings NOTE Click Cancel to abort the action TIP You can create a maximum of fifty point groups in WebVision and add a maximum of fifty points to each point group 19 WEBVISION G edit a point group Select a name of the point group that you want to edit in the Point Groups drop down list 2 Click Edit Point Group The selected details of the Point Group are displayed Follow the procedure as explained in step 4 of To add a point group and make the required changes To delete a point group 1 Click the Devices tab The Device List page appears 2 Click the Points tab The Point List page appears 3 Click Add Point Group The Add Point page is displayed 4 Select a name of the point group that you want to delete in the Point Groups drop down list 5 Click Delete Point Group A confirmation message appears 6 Click Yes to delete the selected points NOTE Click No to abort the action Device Configuration This section describes how to view and setup a device graphic and describes the configuration options To view device graphic 1 On the left corner of the screen WebVision is listed Expand WebVision to view all the devices associated with it 2 Select a device from the list of devices in WebVision C
169. ersion of XL15C configuration values when displaying in the user interface Therefore what the user gets to see is what is present in the controller The following step eases the comparison process 1 Before comparing XL15C configuration with LonSpec right click on the project and open Edit Project dialog as shown in Fig 43 Change the Engineering Units to Metrics before proceeding further BS AB SITE Ey TERMINAL weevision se Delete Backup Restore Replicate New Network Edit Project Project Directory C LONSPEC SALES DEMO Project name SALES DEMO Refresh Time 55 seconds Cancel Failure Detect Time 300 seconds Engineering Units ENGLISH ENGLISH Line Voltage Frequency Fig 43 Edit project This ensures that you see all the values in LonSpec in the Metric system FIXING RAPIDZONE CONFIGURATION ERRORS IN LONSPEC Due to a configuration error in RapidZone sites built in Rapidzone and migrated to LONSpec may have a configuration error for every XL15C controller W7760C As a result device upload step in WebVision causes problems 31 WEBVISION To fix the configuration error use the following procedure 1 Open the configuration of each XL15C and go to Control Loops tab LonSpes 03 01 00 00 brentwood medical Da abeo Soke es kU E EA oe a i a Dota irene Diao Loop Carl Loops 18 ZONE2_23 Frese Loo
170. erter The converter can then be controlled monitored and programmed from the LONWORKS network Configuring NXVFD settings IMPORTANT NOTE After the option card is installed it is mandatory to make the following settings for Control Place and Frequency Reference 1 Selection of Control Place The NXVFD device can be controlled from three different places They are default control place is Key Pad panel 1 O terminal e Key Pad panel Fieldbus The Key Pad control of NXVFD device is used for parameter setting reading status data and giving control commands The NXVFD has to be configured to select field bus as control place before starting any of the operations through the wizard This configuration can be performed using the Key Pad control provided along with device as follows e Inthe keypad from the main menu select the menu called Keypad Control Select the submenu Control Place and set it to FieldBus NOTE None of the values sent through fieldbus by the wizard will be considered until and unless the device is configured with field bus as control place 2 Selection of Frequency Reference The NXVFD can be configured to select the frequency reference from following different sources Alt Al2 Keypad Fieldbus Configuring VFD NX Drive parameters 95 7769 01 WEBVISION It is mandatory to set the option to Fieldbus for NXVFD to consider the frequency setpoint from the wizard
171. es WebVision Name The entered WebVision name is displayed Time and Date Settings Select the Time Format and Date Format Click Set System Date Time The Set System Date Time box appears Set the date and time and click OK Select Use Internet Time Server to enable this option The Time Server Address is enabled Set the host name of the Internet Time Server Ensure that the DNS server that WebVision uses DNS configuration done in Network Server for hostname to IP resolution must be able to resolve the host name of the Internet Time Server to IP address Ensure that WebVision is connected to Internet and is able to access the time server If you are not sure how to do it contact your local Network Administrator for help NOTE WebVision automatically synchronizes its time with the internet time servers Synchronization happens every 24 Hours or when the Sync Now button is pressed e WebVision is Network Time Master Select this box to enable periodic time synchronization between WebVision and devices on the network Time synchronization happens every 24 Hours when the system clock is changed DST starts or ends or when the Sync Now button is pressed Time Zone Select the applicable time zone of the WebVision where the WebVision is installed Every time the Time Zone is changed you must reboot WebVision to apply the new time zone Click Save after selecting the new time zone WebVision prompts you to reboot
172. es c 80 View Load P X x 51 View Device 52 P P X Summary Summary 81 Add Load 81 P X X 52 Discover Devices 52 P X X 82 Delete Load 81 P X X on the Network 53 Add New Device 52 P x x i 2 54 Copy an Existing 52 P X X eae Device 55 Download Upload 52 P P X a The letter P means the role has that privilege Device b The letter X means the role does not have that privilege Configuration The letter C means that the user can be given that privilege 56 Delete Device 52 P X X when configuring his her account 57 Invoke Device 52 P P X Configuration Wizard 58 Match Device 52 P X X 59 Change Setpoints 52 P P X WEBVISION View list of Users To add a user The list of users provides information on WebVision users 1 On the Users page click the Add User button The such as their names roles and e mail IDs Properties page appears To view the list of users 1 Click the Users tab The Users page appears WebVision gt gt Users gt User Summary Fier Fey ene ea eset a DA Prah loi E 10 Showing 1 7 of7 kas Os a oo 0 a 3 Contractor a b BBA Contractor a o BBA Contractor a b Disable sysadmin mysite com SysAdmin Contractor sysadmin mysite com SysAdmint Contractor sysadmin mysite com SysAdmin Contractor sysadmin mysite com SysAdmin3 Contractor sysacmin mysite com Doo o 0 0 Fig 22 Add User Properties page Fig 21 U
173. es of outputs that can be defined and only one instance of each type is allowed Aux Option This defines an output type that is energized whenever the controller is in the occupied mode and is de energized for all other modes Valid selections for this field are e Unassigned This option output is not assigned to the controller e Auxiliary_Maintain This selection assigns one triac output for the auxiliary point e Auxiliary_Pulse This selection assigns two triac outputs for the auxiliary point The controller momentarily pulses one output for the on command and the second output for the off command Free Option This defines an output type that is energized through the network variable DestFree With this assignment an output point within the VAV controller can be commanded from another LON device Valid selections for this field are e Unassigned This option output is not assigned to the controller e Free_Net_Maintain This selection assigns one triac output for the Free point e Free_Net_Pulse This selection assigns two triac outputs for the Free point The controller momentarily pulses one output for the on command and the second output for the off command 85 95 7769 01 WEBVISION Table 62 Excel 10 VAV Il Configuration Parameters Continued Name Definition PWM Settings Section PWM Period Defines the time period of the PWM signal This is usually the sum of the Zero time va
174. etpoint for a device On the left corner of the screen WebVision is listed Expand WebVision to view all the devices associated with it 1 Select a device from the list of devices in WebVision Click the corresponding link to view the properties of that device Click the SetPoints tab The SetPoints page appears 3 Select the following parameters e Permanent Set points e Occupied Specify the Cooling SetPoints and the Heating SetPoints e Standby Specify the Cooling SetPoints and the Heating SetPoints e Unoccupied Specify the Cooling SetPoints and the Heating SetPoints e Select the override duration if any using the Override Duration for Setpoint and Occupancy State drop down list Fan and System Switch e System Switch Specify the system switch mode Heat Auto Cool or Off e Fan Switch Specify the fan switch mode On or Auto 4 Click Save to save the settings N Sensor Calibration NOTE The Sensor Calibration tab appears only for the supported devices that have analog inputs This is a process of configuring the controller to correct error in the value provided by the sensor To calibrate a sensor On the left corner of the screen WebVision is listed Expand WebVision to view all the devices associated with it 1 Select a device from the list of devices in WebVision Click the corresponding link to view the properties of that device 2 Click the Sensor Calibration tab The Sensor Calibrati
175. etworks Network Name SITE_2 Site ID 1 Advanced Features Enter Communication Details C Telephone Wan Modem IP Address Excel 15B Host Name Excel 15B IP Address 199 63 24 118 Close Help Fig 46 Edit Network dialog box 2 Click Advanced Features The Advanced Features dialog box appears Advanced Features Doman ID 4a Domain index for non zero length domain w Fig 47 Advanced Features dialog box 1 default LNS based systems Cancel 3 Set the Domain index for non zero length domain to 0 LNS based systems Click OK to save the changes 4 Modify the original LonSpec project so that it does not contain unsupported devices The following are frequently used XL15A XL15B Command Display 1 and 2 T7300 RapidLink SLTA PCLTA used by LonSpec LonSta tion and XL15A f RF Gateway g CX VFD It is highly recommended not to have these devices physically connected to the Lon Network as it could result in partial upload of binding information into WebVi sion or worse interfere with WebVision functionality panow 5 Disconnect WebVision from the network and re commission all the devices using LonSpec 95 7769 01 32 NOTE When re commissioning please use full commission command not quick commission 6 After re commissioning disconnect LonSpec from the network WebVision Configuration Steps Start the migration process on a fresh
176. evice Discovery feature enables you to discover online devices You can manage users and control their access to different resources in the system The System Administrator can configure network settings site information settings system and control network data and time settings and new module installation c US Honeywell USER GUIDE Approvals UL 916 C UL listed to Canadian Standards Association CSA C22 2 No 205 M1983 Signal Equipment CE FCC part 15 Class A C tick Australia CAUTION Make sure that there is not more than one WebVision accessing the same Lon network simultaneously If more than one WebVision accesses the same Lon network simultaneously there may be problems in downloading and uploading parameters NOTE WebVision is compatible with Microsoft Internet Explorer IE 6 0 SP2 or higher Suggested screen resolution is 1280x1024 pixels IMPORTANT Make sure that there is only one WebVision accessing the LONWORKS network at a given point in time If more than one WebVision accesses the same LONWORKS network simultaneously ensure that its logical address is unique in the network to avoid address conflicts For a LONWORKS network logical address refers to Subnet NodelD Contents Product Description c c cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeenees 1 Features cccsseeeeeeees nwi v2 Operation and Use a A2 Warranty and Returns 33 Appendix A Supported Devices 3
177. f you select CoolingFloating or Econfloating for cooling and economizer respectively Motor Speed for Cooling and Economizer is enabled PWM Settings PWM settings are enabled if heating cooling or Economizer is configured as PWM It consists of Zero Scale Full Scale and Period values to control PWM output type Optional Points available for the XL10 CVAHU NOTE When selecting one of the following the wizard assigns a digital output I O terminal to the function XL10 CVAHU Optional Points fields Table 18 lists the Optional Points available for the XL10 CVAHU Table 18 Optional Points for XL10 CVAHU Name Occupancy_Status Definition Energized if the controller is currently in Occupied mode Free Network controller digital output Follows the input signal nviFree1 Turns on when nviFree1 is on Free2 Network controller digital output Follows the input signal nviFree2 Turns on when nviFree2 is on CVAHU Inputs Description To select the wall module type voltage and resistive inputs for a CVAHU application Purpose Enter all inputs to be wired to the CVAHU Mode Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off line or On line Procedure 1 Click the Inputs button on the left pane to open the Input Configuration page Enter information into available fields Select Space Temp sensor type Select the optional Digital and Analog Inputs Click Commit to save the setting
178. fields here allow you to configure the full range of settings It is possible to swap the Zero and Full range values to achieve reverse operation for a PWM output Zero PWM duty cycle for fully closed position Full PWM duty cycle for fully open position FCU Fan FCU Fan fields Purpose Table 35 FCU Fan Field Options Define fan operation Name Definitions Fan Fan Occupancy Mode General Configure the operation of the fan during occupied Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off line or periods On line Auto Mode The fan is automatically turned on and off Procedure according to heat or cool demand 1 Click the Fan button on the left pane to open the Fan Continuous Mode i Configuration page During the occupied period the fan continuously 2 Enter information into available fields operates at least at the minimum speed If heat or 3 Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to it oath koae F eae sen the alae the last saved settings automatically operates to the required speed This 4 Click Next to display the Switching Levels setting does not affect automatic fan operation Configuration page or Back to display the Equipment during standby and unoccupied periods Control Configuration page Min On Time Min Off Time Fan Define the pre run Fan Run up Time and post Interlock run Fan Overrun Time times for the fan when fan interlock has been selected Equipment Control page
179. flect the reheat valve travel time and not the motor actuator speed Example if the reheat actuator motor speed is 125 seconds but the travel time of the valve from full close to full open is 90 seconds then the Reheat Mtr Spd should be set to 90 seconds 83 95 7769 01 WEBVISION Table 62 Excel 10 VAV II Configuration Parameters Continued Name Definition Output Settings Section Flow Type Defines the control flow algorithm used by the controller The selection available dependents of the Pressure Type and Box Type selected Valid selections for this field are e Flow Normal This flow type is selectable when the Pressure Type is set to pressure independent and the Box Type is set to Single Duct or Dual Duct e Shared Wall Module This flow type is selectable when the Pressure Type is set to pressure independent or pressure dependent and the Box Type is set to Single Duct e DD Satel No Flow Mix This flow type is selectable when the Pressure Type is set to Pressure Independent and the Box Type is set to Dual Duct e DD Satel Flow Mix This flow type is selectable when the Pressure Type is set to Pressure Independent and the Box Type is set to Dual Duct e DD Satel Constant Volume This flow type is selectable when the Pressure Type is set to Pressure Independent and the Box Type is set to Dual Duct e DD Master No Flow Mix This flow type is selectable when the Pressure Type is
180. formation into available fields 3 Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to the last saved settings 4 Click Next to display the Keypad Display Configuration page T7350 General Configuration fields See Table 70 Table 70 T7350 General Configuration Fields Name Thermostat Model additional stage of heating and cooling Definition The T7350 Communicating Subbase T7350CS comes in two models T7350H1009 and T7350H1017 T7350H1009 This subbase is the Three Heat Three Cool model It allows for conventional or heat pump operation A total of 8 relays are available with the thermostat cover assembly and subbase The auxiliary relay may be configured for an economizer TOD or dehumidification The subbase may be configured for 3 Heat 3 Cool or 2 Heat 4 Cool by using the third stage of heat for an additional stage of cooling T7350H1017 This subbase is the modulating subbase A total of 4 relays are available with the thermostat cover assembly and subbase The auxiliary relay may be configured for an economizer TOD dehumidification or an See the Outputs section of this table on page 99 for description on these relays Equipment for conventional or heat pump operation This field specifies the operation in which this subbase is used When the thermostat model is selected as Type T7350H1009 the equipment type can be selected as Standard or Heat Pump The T7350H1009 subbase allows When the model is
181. g Flow with Reheat The air flow setpoint is reset by the local space temperature during the warm up period If controller is at maximum flow and additional warm up is required local reheat is used e Modulating Flow without Reheat The air flow setpoint is reset by local space temperature during the warm up period No local reheat is used during the warm up period e CZS Terminal Load Module Reheat Flow The check box enables Proportional reheat flow When checked the temperature control loop modulates the damper pressure dependent mode or reset air flow setpoint pressure independent mode when the controller is in the reheat mode from Minimum Flow Setpoint to the Reheat Flow Setpoint If the check box is not checked then when the controller is in the reheat mode there is a step change from Minimum Flow Setpoint to the Reheat Flow Setpoint Motor Speed Section Damper Motor Speed Reheat Motor Speed Defines the time it takes the damper motor actuator to travel from the full close to full open position or visa versa This time should reflect the damper travel time and not the motor actuator speed Example if the actuator motor speed is 90 seconds but the travel time of the damper from full close to full open is 45 seconds then the Dmpr Mtr Spd should be set to 45 seconds Defines the time it takes the reheat actuator to travel from the full close to the full open position or visa versa This time should re
182. g at the XL15A configuration in LonSpec manually create corresponding Schedules configuration in WebVision Follow the steps given in User Guide or Online help to understand how to create Schedules in WebVision 4 Loops WebVision does not support inbuilt loops However if this feature is critical the user can replace XL15A with XL15C Or the user can disconnect XL15A from the Lon Network If XL15C is used the same loops can be configured in XL15C using LonSpec and re commissioned If the XL15A is disconnected from network the user should be aware that it may be driving RIOs or may have bindings with other devices to get some sensor information The device should be reconfigured and re commissioned using LonSpec to remove such dependencies 5 Network Time Master If XL15A is acting as Network Time Master when decommissioned WebVision can be configured to act as Network Time Master Refer WebVision s User Guide or Online Help for details 6 DLC If XL15A is performing Demand Limit Control DLC The same can be done in WebVision However the user should note that WebVision supports only one Setpoint The configuration has to be done as appropriate Refer WebVision s User Guide or Online Help for details 7 Pulse Meter Input If a Energy Pulse Meter is connected to XL15A because it is running DLC or because it is providing that information to a different XL15A then if replacing XL15A with XL15C will allow the user t
183. ge appears The following information appears in a tabular format Downloaded pe on Replicate Channel Download 141111111111111111 Excel ORIO offine 000000000000 Auto 1M Channelt Pending Download Pending Download Pending Excell OCVAHU offine 000000000000 Auto 13 Channelt Excel OUnitVent offine 000000000000 Auto 4 2 Channelt Fig 24 Devices Tab Device List page TIP Use Filters to view the required list Use one of the following filter options to search for the required device Channel Device Name Device Type Status Mode Device Name Name of the device e Device Type Type of the device e Status Status of the device it can be online or offline Neuron ID Each LONWorks Controller node has a 48 bit unique identifier called the Neuron ID This is used to address the nodes on the LONWORKS network e Mode Mode of the device it can be auto or manual e Subnet Node ID A mask that is used to determine the subnet of a network Subnetting enables the network administrator to further divide the host part of the address into two or more subnets e Channel The channel on which the device is present e Synced On Date and time on which the device is last downloaded or uploaded e Replicate Click Replicate to replicate the device settings To add a device 1 Click the Devices tab The Device List page appears 2 Click add i The Add Devi
184. gnment button on the left pane to Terminal Connected To open the Wiring Assignment page 2 For Custom Assignment select Custom from the 1 Earth Ground Output Assignment field The Custom Assignment fields 2 LED become editable 3 Bypass 3 Enter information into available fields A 5 4 Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to pital the last saved settings 5 Al Ground 5 Click Next to display the Wiring Diagram page or Back 6 Set Point to display the PID Configuration page 7 Ald Ohm CVAHU Custom Wiring fields 8 Al Grounna Table 27 lists the CVAHU Custom Wiring fields and definitions 9 DI 1 10 and 11 DI Ground 12 DI 2 Table 27 CVAHU Custom Wiring Fields 13 Not used Name Definition 14 and 15 LONWORKS Bus Default This column displays the default assignments 16 through 20 Not used Assignment as the outputs are configured in the Outputs 21 Vac Com age y 22 Vac Custom Custom assignment is used to change the Assignment assignments 23 Rh Existing If the device is online this shows the 24 Rc assignments as in the device Else it shows 25 and 26 Network DO1 4 from the database 27 G DO2 28 Y2 DO3 29 W2 DO4 30 W1 DO5 31 Not used DO6 53 a DO Digital Output NOTE Fields appearing grayed out indicate those fields that change based on the Controller Type selected on the Outputs Configuration page 95 7769 01 WEBVISION Configuring Fan Coil Unit Controllers FCU Description
185. gured for operation as staged outputs This setting is particularly useful for heat exchanger operation or compressor units Each stage of the controlled output stays off for the minimum Min St On or PWM Per or Valve Runtime Outputs CONTROL OUTPUT TYPE FLOATING CONTROL OUTPUT TYPE PWM period of time before the controller turns it on again The selectable range is 0 to 600 seconds This configuration parameter has three different functions depending on the control output type selected in Control The value is the actuator run time in the range 20 to 600 seconds The value is the cycle period of the PWM output in the range 20 to 600 seconds CONTROL OUTPUT TYPE ONE TWO OR THREE STAGE The value is the minimum on time for each of the stages for controlling compressor units PWM ZERO PWM duty cycle for fully closed position FULL PWM duty cycle for fully open position Configures the full range of the PWM outputs For many PWM controlled devices an output of 0 or 100 is not Options allowed since a PWM output shows no switching at these percentages Therefore most PWM devices have a minimum duty cycle and a maximum duty cycle between which they operate from zero to full scale The fields here configure the full range settings You can swap the Zero and Full range values to achieve reverse operation for a PWM output HYD Switching Levels Purpose To configure the Hydronic controller staged output s
186. harge Temperature nvoData siDischargeTempS7 NumericPoint Effective Occupancy nvoData EffectOcc EnumPoint Fan Speed nvoData ubFanSpdS1 NumericPoint 145 95 7769 01 WEBVISION Table 86 VAV II Point Details Continued Point Name Network Variable Field Point Type Fan Status nvoData FanOn EnumPoint Field No nvoData FieldNo EnumPoint Flow Sensor nvolO siFlowSensorS3 NumericPoint Flow Uncorrected nvolO siFlowUncorrectedS3 NumericPoint Flow Volts nvolO siFlowVoltsS12 NumericPoint Free 1 On nvoData Free1On EnumPoint Fresh Air Ratio nvoData siFreshAirRatio NumericPoint Heat Cool Switch nvoData HeatCoolSwitch EnumPoint Heat Cool Switch nvolO HeatCoolSwitch EnumPoint Heat Stages nvoData HeatStages NumericPoint IO Test In nvolO lOTestIn EnumPoint IO Test Switch nvolO lOTestSwitch EnumPoint Low Flow Alarm nvoData LowFlowAlarm EnumPoint Manual Occupancy nvoData NetManOcc EnumPoint Mode nvoData Mode EnumPoint Model nvolO Model NumericPoint Monitor Switch nvoData MonSwitch EnumPoint Monitor Switch nvolO MonSwitch EnumPoint Occupancy Sensor nvolO OccupancySensor EnumPoint Override nvoData OverRide EnumPoint Override IO nvolO OverRide EnumPoint Peripheral Heat On nvoData PeriphHeatOn EnumPoint Peripheral Heat Position nvoData ubPeriphHeatPosS1 NumericPoint Reheat Percentage nvoData ubReheatPosS1 NumericPoint Scheduled Occupan
187. has two different functions depending on the length of time the button is held down Two seconds puts the controller in Bypass Five seconds puts the controller in Unoccupied Bypass The Bypass button when pressed has the following function In two seconds the controller is in Bypass mode Setpoint Knob The setpoint knob is available in different types of scale and with different setpoint meanings based on the country of usage The temperature engineering unit used C or F is the setting made in WebVision when creating the new project That setting is used for the total project Note that the setpoint knob only affects the Occupied and Standby Setpoints The Unoccupied setpoint is not affected by the setpoint knob Note that Version C and D Chilled Ceiling controllers have an on board setpoint They cannot be used with an external TR21 or TR23 setpoint device The range of setpoint knob value lies between 9tdf to 9tdf No Knob The setpoint knob is ignored Note that this must be chosen if there is no setpoint knob connected to the controller This selection prevents the controller from reacting to incorrect setpoint values Relative The setpoint knob is a relative knob showing only a setpoint shift as and changes to the configured setpoint Absolute Middle The setpoint knob is an absolute knob showing the setpoint in absolute degrees It is used as the space temperature setpoint midway between
188. he left pane to open the Switching Levels Configuration page 2 Enter information into available fields 3 Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to the last saved settings 4 Click Next to display the Zone Control Configuration page or Back to display the Equipment Control page CHC Switching Level fields All levels can be set in the range 0 to 100 CHC Zone Control Purpose To configure the heating and cooling setpoints for the Occupied Standby and Unoccupied operating modes Mode Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off line or On line Procedure 1 Click the Zone Control button on the left pane to open the Zone Control Configuration page 2 Enter information into available fields WEBVISION 3 Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to the last saved settings 4 Click Next to display the Miscellaneous Configuration page or Back to display the Switching Levels Configuration page CHC Zone Control fields Setpoints can range from 10 to 35 C 50 to 95 F Also specify dew point temperature setpoint and a safety band to be used in case the dew point calculation fails or a humidity sensor is not available These fields are not used when the controller is not configured for ceiling protection CHC Miscellaneous Purpose To configure energy management parameters Mode Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off line or On line Procedure 1 Click
189. he left pane to open the Output Configuration page 2 Enter information into available fields 3 Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to the last saved settings 4 Click Next to display the Input Configuration page FCU Outputs fields Table 32 on page 56 lists the FCU Outputs fields and definitions 95 7769 01 WEBVISION Table 32 FCU Outputs Fields and Definitions Field Types Relay Outputs FCU Definition Select the hardware version to be used for the controller The different hardware versions have different combinations of inputs and outputs See the inset table below The type of hardware you select affects the choices that appear in the rest of the pages for FCU Based on your hardware selection the configuration software ensures that you cannot configure a controller for an application it cannot perform Selection in Controller Number of Relays for Number of Number of LON Tool Type Fan Reheat Outputs Digital Inputs Transceiver W7752D_F W7752D W7752F 3 1 2 1 W7752E_G_J W7752E FTT 10 W7752G 3 0 2 1 W7752J System Define the type of fan coil unit that is being configured It describes the number of pipes used on the unit Two Pipe A fan coil unit that has only two pipes This system type limits the controller to control only one valve output and operate in a changeover mode When operating in the changeover mode
190. he message ap Configuring Admin These files have dist as the file extension You can upload files up to 5MB in size Complete the following procedure to install a new package 1 Click Browse to upload the Software Update Package This allows you to install software updates if any that are published by Honeywell for WebVision 2 Click Install Reboot WebVision 1 Click the Reboot button to reboot WebVision This logs you out and then initiates reboot 2 Re logon after 5 to 10 minutes after the reboot is completed Backup Configuration The backup file has dist as the file extension Complete the following procedure to backup the configuration settings 1 Click Backup Configuration to backup the configuration settings 2 A window appears prompting you to Save the backup file 3 Click Save to save the backup file and specify the location for the file or Click Cancel to close the pop up Restore Configuration You can restore the backed up files using this feature The backup file has dist as the file extension Complete the following procedure to restore the configuration settings 1 Click Restore Configuration to restore the configuration settings from the backup file The Restore Configuration dialog box appears Select the backup file that has to be restored 2 Click Restore WebVision restores the file and automatically logs out before starting to restore Once restoring is complete WebVision aut
191. he wall module and the return to the original occupancy state When the Bypass state is activated the bypass timer is set to the Bypass time Type Select either Normal or Bypass Priority Select either Last or Net Periph Min Pos Percentage for peripheral valve minimum position Demand Limit Offset Degrees of offset for demand limit Activated when DestDIcShed is True or active Temp Ramp Rate Ramp time for temperature Fan Flow Setpoint Setpoint in cfm for fan flow Fresh Air Required Amount of fresh air required in cfm FreshAirRatio is equal to FreshAirReq divided by SrcBoxFlow When FreshAirRatio is large greater than 100 percent there is insufficient fresh air being supplied to the zone even if the supply air is 100 percent fresh air When FreshAirRatio is small there is sufficient fresh air being supplied to the zone FreshAirRatio is used for coordination within the HVAC subsystem and energy management decisions by the supply equipment Excel 10 VAV II Custom Wiring Settings Use Table 68 to configure the Excel 10 VAV II miscellaneous settings Purpose To enable you to change the output pin configuration Mode Configuration can be performed with the device On line or Off line Procedure 1 Click the Custom Wiring button on the left pane to open the Custom Wiring page 2 You can choose to change the default assignment Select Custom option in the Assignment Type l
192. here are the same as the features available on the wall module device to be connected Space Temp Sensor Specify whether or not the controller is to be used with a space temperature sensor connected to its input Normally a space temperature sensor is used but in cases where the space temperature is supplied from another device via the network the local space temperature sensor input is not used Yes The local space temperature sensor input is used Ensure that a space temperature sensor is actually connected otherwise the controller measures incorrect values No The local space temperature sensor is not used This option must be selected when a sensor is not connected LED LCD Display This configuration defines whether a Wall Module with LED or a Wall Module with LCD Display is connected For the LED either the Override Status or the Effective Occupancy Status is displayed The LCD Display show the both the Effective and the Override Status and an additional Off Condition The Override Status results from the Scheduler the Network Override the Override Button and the Occupancy Sensor The Off Condition results from the Fan Speed Switch the Window Contact and the Medium from nviApplicMode LED Override The LED shows the Override from the Override Button or from the Network On indicates Override Bypass 1 Flash per Second indicates Override Unoccupied 2 Flashes per Second indicates Override
193. hics X Alarms x Trends x Commandable Internal Use Valid Values Units Precision 1 Min 163 8 Max 163 8 Time To Next State Units min Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 65535 0 Total Error Units F Precision 1 Min 512 0 Max 512 0 95 7769 01 174 TOPIC INDEX Product Description 2 ccsss ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 1 Approvals 1 Operation and Use ccccesscececeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeneeeeeeeeeneeees 2 SIQMHMi 2a teeth Gates AS tected esc seid ceeded 2 Password Reminder eeeceeeeeeeeeeeeenteeseneeeeeneeeees 2 Working with Tables 0 ccceccececeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 Graphics sire oea enn codes a AE AE eee ie 3 SCHECUIES E REEE A ETT 5 Assign DEVICES scie penie r ania eee ea 6 Define Special Event 0 0 ceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeneeeeee 6 Delete SCHedules seve sse iscecsicet ctyesceteseassedeecceeseste neve 7 Replicate Schedule oo eee ceeeeeeereeeeeneeeeeneeenneeeeead 7 AAS r a a aaa Aa E iae Secaedanert 8 Alarm Configuration and Use ssec 9 MENAS aiee e ai a ee iaa ei 10 Trend Setup and Use ccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 12 USES irde Ale ee o 13 Devices einne a R i aE ETE EA Ei 16 Point EiStnnrr iini ii e eN a T Eran 19 Device Configuration aesssessseisrriieerrerrinerenes 19 Set POMS riesaa igei aa Na eiaeaen 20 Sensor Calibration eee eececesseeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeneees 20 Balancing e aa e aa irene dies ttete
194. ice uy Device Offline 08 21 PM 8 a i i Feb 10 2009 E Source Device 111111111111111111 Device Offline 05 07 PM 8 un E Re booted Web ision Apalance te Feb A0 2009 zy un booted 03 44 PM Ack Alarm Delete Alarm Email Fig 15 Alarms Tab 95 7769 01 8 NOTE Select the check box in the header row to select all the listed alarms Alarm Name List of all alarm names e Device Name Lists all devices on which alarms are set To view the details of any device click the respective device Description Indicates the condition that raised the alarm e Occurrence Time Indicates the date and time when the alarm was raised e Priority Indicates the priority level of an alarm There are ten priority levels defined in WebVision 1 through 10 1 is low and 10 is the highest priority level Alarm State Indicates alarm acknowledgement status e Acknowledged by Indicates the user who acknowledged the alarm e Acknowledge Time Indicates the date and time when the alarm was acknowledged e Return to Normal Time Indicates the date and time when the alarm returned to the normal condition TIP Check the Enable Auto Refresh check box to enable the auto refresh feature The page is refreshed every 30 seconds To acknowledge an alarm 1 Click the Alarms tab The View Alarms page appears Alarm Oc ec _ _ oc Tune priori airn Feb 12 2009 Source Device cvahu
195. id Values Occupied Cool SetPoint X Units C Precision 2 Min 10 0 Max 35 0 Standby Cool SetPoint X Units C Precision 2 Min 10 0 Max 35 0 Unoccupied Cool SetPoint X Units C Precision 2 Min 10 0 Max 35 0 Occupied Heat SetPoint X Units C Precision 2 Min 10 0 Max 35 0 Standby Heat SetPoint X Units C Precision 2 Min 10 0 Max 35 0 Unoccupied Heat SetPoint X Units C Precision 2 Min 10 0 Max 35 0 Current State X Default Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby 95 7769 01 130 Table 81 HYD Application of Points Continued WEBVISION Point name Next State Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use x Valid Values Default Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Time To Next State Units min Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 65535 0 DLC Shed Shed or Restore Out Of Limits True or False Open Circuit True or False Out Of Service True or False Mechanical Fault True or False Feedback Failure True or False Over Range True or False Under Range Electrical Fault True or False True or False Unable To Measure True or False Communication Failure Fail Self Test True or False True or False Self Test In Progress True or False Locked Out Manual Control Application Mode X X DK X OK X OK X X X X OK gt lt x x True or False Tr
196. ide nvoHydStatus hwOverride EnumPoint Scheduled Occupancy nvoHydStatus schedOcc EnumPoint Effective Sensor Occupancy nvoHydStatus effSenOcc EnumPoint Manual Occupancy nvoHydStatus netManOcc EnumPoint Sensor Occupancy nvoHydStatus hwSenOcc EnumPoint 129 95 7769 01 WEBVISION Table 80 HYD Point Details Continued Point Name Network Variable Field Name Point Type RO LED nvoHydStatus rOLed EnumPoint HYD Status Mode nvoHydStatus mode EnumPoint Alarm Type nvoHydStatus alarmType EnumPoint DLC Shed nvoHydStatus dicShed NumericPoint Effective Window Open nvoHydStatus effWindowOpen NumericPoint HW Window Open nvoHydStatus hwWindowOpen NumericPoint Fan Feedback nvoHydStatus fanFeedback NumericPoint External Active nvoHydStatus externalActive NumericPoint Fan Stages Active nvoHydStatus fanStagesActive EnumPoint Output Position 0 nvoHydStatus outputPositionO NumericPoint Output Position 1 nvoHydStatus outputPosition1 NumericPoint Reheat Active nvoHydStatus reheatActive EnumPoint Effective Setpoint nvoHydStatus activeSetPt NumericPoint Space Temperature nvoHydStatus spaceTemp NumericPoint Reset Bypass Time nvoHydStatus restBypassTime NumericPoint Terminal Load nvoTerminalLoad levPercent NumericPoint Manual Mode nviManualMode ManualMode EnumPoint Table 81 HYD Application of Points Point name Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use Val
197. iff Temp or Single Enth OaEconEnTemp For OdTemp this field sets the threshold The economizer is disabled when OdTemp exceeds this value DiffeconEnTemp For Diff Temp this field sets the difference between the Outdoor and Return air temperatures above which the economizer is disabled OaEnthEn For Single Enth this field sets the enthalpy value above which the economizer is disabled UV Heating Cooling H C Stages Use Table 57 to configure the Unit Ventilator H C Stages to set the minimum on off times Cycles hour recovery ramps of a Unit Vent application for heating and cooling stages Purpose Define heating and cooling h c stage parameters including minimum on and off times Mode Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off line or On line Procedure 1 Click the HcStageParameter button on the left pane to open the H C Stage Parameters Configuration page 2 Enter information into available fields 3 Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to the last saved settings 4 Click Next to display the Zone Operations Configuration page or Back to display the Economizer Configuration page UV Heating Cooling H C Stages parameters Table 57 Unit Ventilator Heating and Cooling Stage Parameters Name Definition Min On Off Min_heat_on enables minimum on off times e Min_heat_off replaces set minimum on off times with a 30 second default e Min_cool_on enables minimum o
198. igital In 1 Units Precision 1 Min 0 0 Max 100 0 False or True 95 7769 01 148 Table 87 VAV II Application of Points Continued WEBVISION Point Name Digital In 2 Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use Digital In 3 Valid Values False or True False or True Digital Out 1 Off or On Digital Out 2 Off or On Digital Out 3 Off or On Digital Out 4 Off or On Digital Out 5 Off or On Digital Out 6 Off or On Digital Out 7 Off or On Digital Out 8 Off or On Discharge Temperature X X X X OK OK OK OK gt lt gt lt x lt X X X X OK OK gt lt OK gt lt x x X X X X X X X x x OK x lt Units F Precision 1 Min 256 0 Max 256 0 Effective Occupancy Default Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Fan Speed Fan Status Units Precision 1 Min 0 0 Max 100 0 Off or On Field No Update All Fields Mode Effective Occupancy Override Scheduled Occupancy Network Manual Occupancy Sensor Occupancy Bypass Timer Temperature Control Point Space Temperature Discharge Temperature Supply Temperature Fresh Air Ratio Box Flow Cont Flow Sensor Flow Uncorrected Flow Volts Units ft min Precision 1 Min 4096 0 Max 4095 9 Units ft min Precision 1 Min 4096 0 Max 4095 9 Units V Precision 1 Min 8 0 Max 8 0 Free 1 On
199. iltered Cnt _ai Calibration Chan Units null Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 65535 0 Nvo A Filtered Cnt _ai Calibration Chan2 Nvo D I Sensor _on Off Units null Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 65535 0 Off or On Nvo D I Sensor _on Off2 Off or On Nvo D I Sensor _on Off Nvo D I Sensor _on Off4 Off or On Off or On Nvo D I Sensor _on Off5 Off or On Nvo D I Sensor _on Off6 Nvo D I Sensor _on Off7 Off or On Off or On Nvo D I Sensor _on Off8 Off or On Nvo Cal Cnt _ Cal Count0 gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt x x gt lt x lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt x x x x lt X gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt x x x x lt Units null Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 65535 0 Nvo Cal Cnt _ Cal Count1 Units null Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 65535 0 Nvo Cal Cnt _ Cal Count2 Nvo Cal Cnt _ Cal Count3 Nvo Cal Cnt _ Cal Count4 Units null Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 65535 0 Units null Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 65535 0 Units null Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 65535 0 Nvo Cal Cnt _ Cal Count5 Units null Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 65535 0 95 7769 01 166 Table 91 XL15C Application of Points Continued WEBVISION Point Name Nvo Cal Cnt _ Cal Count6 Graphics X Alarms X Trends X Commandable Internal Use Valid Values Units null Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 65535 0 Nvo C
200. in Cancel Forgot Userld or Password iagara WebVision Version 01 00 12 Feb 10 2010 2009 Honeywell International Inc Use of this product is subject to Terms and Conditions Fig 1 Login page 95 7769 01 2 2 Type your WebVision login name in the User Name field 3 Type your Password 4 Click Login or press Enter The Properties page appears To log off from WebVision Click the Logout link located on the right top of your screen to log off from WebVision You are redirected to the WebVision Login page Honeywell Honeywell WebVision 113 Alarm s Fig 2 Logout Link Password Reminder To be reminded of your UserID or Password if you have forgotten either of them perform the following 1 Type the WebVision web address URL in the Address field of Internet Explorer The WebVision Login page appears 2 Click Forgot UserlD or Password link on the Login page You are directed to the Password Reminder screen 3 Select your secret question the one you selected while creating your user account 4 Enter the answer to the Password Reminder Question you are expected to enter the same answer that you gave while creating your user account 5 Enter your E Mail ID same as in your user account WebVision looks for account that matches the secret question the answer to the question and the e mail Id After validating it sends the user Id password to that e mai
201. in 128 0 Max 127 0 Heat Source Default Off Low Medium High On Heat Stages On Units null Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 3 0 Indoor Air Quality Override x lt x lt x lt False or True Manual Occupancy Default Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Mixed Air Temperature Mode Units F Precision 1 Min 256 0 Max 256 0 Startup Wait Heat Cool Off Disabled Smoke Emergency Freeze Protect Manual Factory Test Fan Only Monitor 1 Units V Precision 1 Min 32 0 Max 32 0 Monitor Switch x lt x lt x lt Off or On Occupancy Statue Out Occupancy Time Clock Outdoor Air Enthalpy x lt x lt x lt Off or On Default Off Low Medium High On Units mA Precision 1 Min 256 0 Max 256 0 Outdoor Humidity Units Precision 1 Min 0 0 Max 127 5 Outdoor Temperature Units F Precision 1 Min 256 0 Max 256 0 143 95 7769 01 WEBVISION Table 85 UV Application of Points Continued Point Name Outside Air Quality Graphics X Alarms X Trends X Commandable Internal Use Valid Values Units ppm Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 65535 0 Override Default Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Proof Of Air Flow Default Off Low Medium High On Return Air Enthalpy Units mA Precision 1 Min 256 0 Max 256 0 Return Air Humidity Units
202. in 0 0 Max 65535 0 Cool Relay 1 Off or On Cool Relay 2 Off or On Cool Relay 3 Off or On Cool Stages On x X X Xx x X X Xx x X X lt Xx Units null Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 255 0 DLC Shed Restored or Shed Days Left Keypad Holiday Units day Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 255 0 Dehumidifier Active Discharge Air Limit x x x x x x False or True False or True Discharge Air Temperature Units C Precision 1 Min 273 2 Max 327 7 171 95 7769 01 WEBVISION Table 93 T7350 Application of Points Continued Point Name Economizer Output Graphics X Alarms X Trends X Commandable Internal Use Valid Values Units Precision 1 Min 163 8 Max 163 8 Effective Mode Default Off Cool Heat Emergency Heat Reheat Manual Factory Test Effective Occupancy Default Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Effective Setpoint Units C Precision 1 Min 273 2 Max 327 7 Fan Default False True Fan Relay Off or On Heat Relay 1 Heat Relay 3 Off or On Off or On Heat Stages On x x x Xx x lt x Xx x X x Xx Units null Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 255 0 Holiday Next State False or True Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Occ Null Occupancy Sensor Unoccupied Occupied Outdoor Temperature Units C Precisio
203. in 0 0 Max 65535 0 Nvo A I Cnt _ai Chan5 Sensor Units null Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 65535 0 Nvo A I Cnt _ai Chan6 Sensor Nvo A I Cnt _ai Chan7 Sensor Units null Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 65535 0 Units null Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 65535 0 Nvo A I Cnt _ai Chan8 Sensor Units null Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 65535 0 Nvo A I Cnt _ai Calibration Chan Nvo A I Cnt _ai Calibration Chan2 Units null Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 65535 0 Units null Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 65535 0 Nvo A Filtered Cnt _ai Chan1 Sensor Units null Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 65535 0 Nvo A Filtered Cnt _ai Chan2 Sensor Nvo A Filtered Cnt _ai Chan3 Sensor Nvo A Filtered Cnt _ai Chan4 Sensor Units null Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 65535 0 Units null Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 65535 0 Units null Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 65535 0 165 95 7769 01 WEBVISION Table 91 XL15C Application of Points Continued Point Name Nvo A Filtered Cnt _ai Chan5 Sensor Graphics X Alarms X Trends X Commandable Internal Use Valid Values Units null Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 65535 0 Nvo A Filtered Cnt _ai Chan6 Sensor Units null Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 65535 0 Nvo A Filtered Cnt _ai Chan7 Sensor Units null Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 65535 0 Nvo A Filtered Cnt _ai Chan8 Sensor Units null Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 65535 0 Nvo A F
204. integral time the slower the control response In other words a decrease in Integral Time causes a more rapid response in the output signal Enter the range in seconds 0 to 5000 Cooling Derivative Time Derivative Time or Gain Determines what impact the error rate has on the output signal The error rate is how fast the error value is changing It can also be the direction space temperature is going either towards or away from the setpoint and its speed quickly or slowly A decrease in Derivative Time causes a given error rate to have a larger effect on the output signal Enter the range in seconds 0 9 000 Name Definition Heating Derivative Time or Gain Derivative Time Determines what impact the error rate has on the output signal The error rate is how fast the error value is changing It can also be the direction space temperature is going either towards or away from the setpoint and its speed quickly or slowly A decrease in Derivative Time causes a given error rate to have a larger effect on the output signal Enter the range in seconds 0 to 9000 Heating Throttling Range Throttling Range or Proportional Gain Determines what impact the error has on the output signal Decreasing the Throttling Range amplifies the effect on the error that is for a given error the difference between the measured space temperature and the current actual space temperature setpoint a
205. ion Chan nvoAlCnt data aiCalibrationChan1 NumericPoint Nvo A I Cnt _ai Calibration Chan2 nvoAlCnt data aiCalibrationChan2 NumericPoint Nvo A Filtered Cnt _ai Chan1 Sensor nvoAlFilteredCnt data aiChan1Sensor NumericPoint Nvo A Filtered Cnt _ai Chan2 Sensor nvoAlFilteredCnt data aiChan2Sensor NumericPoint Nvo A Filtered Cnt _ai Chan3 Sensor nvoAlFilteredCnt data aiChan3Sensor NumericPoint Nvo A Filtered Cnt _ai Chan4 Sensor nvoAlFilteredCnt data aiChan4Sensor NumericPoint Nvo A Filtered Cnt _ai Chan5 Sensor nvoAlFilteredCnt data aiChan5Sensor NumericPoint Nvo A Filtered Cnt _ai Chan6 Sensor nvoAlFilteredCnt data aiChan6Sensor NumericPoint Nvo A Filtered Cnt _ai Chan7 Sensor nvoAlFilteredCnt data aiChan7 Sensor NumericPoint Nvo A I Filtered Cnt _ai Chan8 Sensor nvoAlFilteredCnt data aiChan8Sensor NumericPoint Nvo A I Filtered Cnt _ai Calibration Chan nvoAlFilteredCnt data aiCalibrationChan1 NumericPoint Nvo A Filtered Cnt _ai Calibration Chan2 nvoAIFilteredCnt data aiCalibrationChan2 NumericPoint Nvo D I Sensor _on Off1 nvoDI Sensor data onOff1 EnumPoint Nvo D Sensor _on Off2 nvoDISensor data onOff2 EnumPoint Nvo D Sensor _on Off3 nvoDISensor data onOff3 EnumPoint Nvo D Sensor _on Off4 nvoDISensor data onOff4 EnumPoint Nvo D I Sensor _on Off nvoDI Sensor data onOff5 EnumPoint Nvo D I Sensor _on Off6 nvoDI Sensor data onOff EnumPoint 155 95 7769 01 WEBVISION Table 90 XL15C Point Details Continued
206. ion to minimize field wiring errors For two pipe applications you can select only the changeover option HEATING The output is modulated open when heat energy is needed in the space COOLING The output is modulated open when cool energy is needed in the space CHANGEOVER The output is modulated open when heat or cool energy is needed in the space OUTP_NOT_USED The output is not controlled by the controller and is always off Output 1 Type Select the type of actuator to be connected to the output FLOATING Three point actuator that can be commanded open or closed terminals 14 15 and or 17 18 The run times for the actuator are configured on the Equipment Control tab Output Options FLOATING_MID A three point actuator that can be commanded open or closed on terminals 14 15 and or 17 18 The run times for the actuator are configured in the Outputs tab The Zero Energy Position no Heat and no Cool is the middle Position 50 The Cool Range is 0 to 50 the Heat Range 50 to 100 The Range can be reversed by selecting the Actuator Direct or Reverse Option During the Synchronization Process the fan is turned off PWM Duty cycled output where the 24VAC output is pulsed on off in the duty cycle range 0 to 100 This type drives output terminal 14 and or 17 ONE_STAGE Single stage on off output that switches terminal 14 and or 17 TWO_STAGE Two stage output Terminal 14 17 is switched for stage
207. ion when the outdoor air temperature input is required over the network from other controllers You have to create appropriate bindings for the input Use this field to configure the source for occupancy input The following options are available None Select this if occupancy sensor is not connected Remote Select this option if an occupancy sensor is hard wired to the thermostat Network Select this option when the occupancy input is required over the network from other controllers You have to create appropriate bindings for the input 95 7769 01 98 WEBVISION Table 70 T7350 General Configuration Fields Continued Name Daylight Savings Definition Use this option to configure the settings for daylight savings The following describes each field Enable Daylight Savings This option is enabled by default Disable this option if the daylight savings feature is not required to be followed by the thermostat Deselecting this option will disable the Start Month Stop Month Start Day and Stop Day fields Start Month This field is available for configuration only if the Enable Daylight Savings option field is selected Its default value is April Change this option according to the daylight savings settings in the country where the thermostat is installed Start Day This field is available for configuration only if the Enable Daylight Savings option field is selected Its default value is First Sunday Change this op
208. is set The range is 0 to 65460 seconds with a resolution of 1 second The Alarm Delta Above Setpoint value establishes the Alarm high limit for the main sensor input If the main sensor input value increases above the effective setpoint value plus the Alarm Delta Above Setpoint Value and remains above for Alarm pre delay time period then a SET_POINT_LOOP_ALARNM is set The Alarm Delta Below Setpoint value establishes the Alarm low limit for the main sensor analog input If the main sensor input value decreases below the effective setpoint value minus the Alarm Delta Below Setpoint value and remains below for Alarm pre delay time period then a SET_POINT_LOOP_ALARM is set Sequencer amp Stager Sequencer The sequencer configuration values x1 x2 y1 and y2 determine the conversion from the primary control loop EPID to the three sequencer analog outputs The sequencer takes the primary EPID analog output value and splits 94 it to three separate analog outputs Each of the sequenced analog outputs ranges from 0 to 100 The uses are controlling heating economizer and cooling or converting the primary EPID analog output into more stages The Sequencer 1 Heat Start field represents start x percent of Sequencer The Sequencer Heat End field represents end y percent of Sequencer 1 The Sequencer2 Econ Start field represents start x percent of Sequencer 2 The Sequencer2 Econ End field represents end y perc
209. ist 3 Select Default to revert back to the default assignment 4 The number of outputs available for changing the configuration depends on the model type For a W7751B Smart only 4 output pins would be enabled 5 Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to the last saved settings 6 Click Next to display the Wiring Diagram page or Back to display the Miscellaneous Parameters page Excel 10 VAV II Custom Wiring Settings fields Table 68 VAV II Custom Wiring Settings Name Definition Selected Outputs All configured outputs Configured Terminal positions available for the Outputs Selected Outputs Default This list is filled with the default Assignments assignment as the user configures the outputs in the General page Assignments options as Default Assignment But the user has an option to change the outputs New This list is by default filled with the same Existing Assignments This list is filled with the outputs assignment in the controller This list would show the actual assignment in the device if the device is online If not it would just show the values from the database Output Assignment Choose one of the following options Default Custom Choose this option if you want to over ride default assignments This enables the New Assignment column The number of output pins enabled depends on the Model Type selected Excel 10 VAV II Wiring Diagram
210. itable DLC Shed nviDIcShed DicShed EnumWritable Out Of Limits nvoStatus outOfLimits BooleanPoint Open Circuit nvoStatus openCircuit BooleanPoint Out Of Service nvoStatus outOfService BooleanPoint Mechanical Fault nvoStatus mechanicalFault BooleanPoint Feedback Failure nvoStatus feedbackFailure BooleanPoint Over Range nvoStatus overRange BooleanPoint Under Range nvoStatus underRange BooleanPoint Electrical Fault nvoStatus electricalFault BooleanPoint Unable To Measure nvoStatus unableToMeasure BooleanPoint Communication Failure nvoStatus comm Failure BooleanPoint Fail Self Test nvoStatus failSelfTest BooleanPoint Self Test In Progress nvoStatus selfTestInProgress BooleanPoint Locked Out nvoStatus lockedOut BooleanPoint Manual Control nvoStatus manualControl BooleanPoint Fan Speed nviFanSpeedCmd value NumericWritable Fan Speed nviFanSpeedCmd state EnumWritable Manual Occupancy nviManOccCmd occupancy EnumWritable Temporary Setpoint nviSetPoint tempP NumericWritable Application Mode nviApplicMode hvacMode EnumWritable Unit Status Mode nvoUnitStatus mode EnumPoint Primary Heat Output nvoUnitStatus heatOutputPrimary NumericPoint Secondary Heat Output nvoUnitStatus heatOutputSecondary NumericPoint Cool Output nvoUnitStatus coolOutput NumericPoint Economizer Output nvoUnitStatus econOutput NumericPoint Fan Output nvoUnitStatus fanOutput NumericPoint In Alarm nvoUnitStatus inAlarm NumericPoint Effective Occupancy nvoHydStatus effectOcc EnumPoint HW Overr
211. k Save to save the settings To perform Min Max Balancing Complete the following procedure to do min max balancing NOTE To do min max balancing ensure that the VAV device is online 1 Damper position and Sensed airflow displays the current damper position and flow sensed by the device 2 Click the Start Zero Balance to attain the zero flow setpoint Job progress status is shown at the bottom of the page once the setpoint is attained confirmation message is displayed 3 Once the Zero airflow setpoints is attained flow sensed by the device is displayed Update the actual flow sensed in the Measured Airflow field and click Apply Measured Flow 4 Enter Max Airflow Setpoint value and click Change Max Setpoint to write the value to the device 5 Click Start Max Balance to attain the maximum airflow setpoint Job progress status of maximum balancing is shown at the bottom of the page once the setpoint is attained confirmation message is displayed 6 Update the actual flow sensed in the Measured Airflow field and click Apply Measured Flow 7 Enter Min Airflow Setpoint value and click Change Min Setpoint to write the value to the device 8 Click Start Min Balance to attain the minimum airflow setpoint Job progress status of minimum balancing is shown at the bottom of the page once the setpoint is attained confirmation message is displayed 9 Once the balancing is completed Click Done to set the device back to Auto mode a
212. l These outputs can be driven by options XL15A or XL15C but since Free1 and Free2 are e If you select Floating enter the Motor digital in nature XL15A and XL15C can only Speed settings command these points to ON or OFF Hence these e If you select PWM enter the PWM points can be driven only by digital outputs of XI15A settings XI15C loops Cooling Refer to the table above for selecting Cooling settings CVAHU Outputs fields e If you select Floating enter the Motor Table 17 lists the CVAHU Outputs fields Speed settings e Ifyou select PWM enter the PWM Table 17 CVAHU Outputs Fields settings Name Definition Economizer Refer to the table above for selecting OO Economizer options Controller Type Select one of the following model types e If you select Floating enter the Motor e W7750A Speed settings e W7750B e If you select PWM enter the PWM e W7750C settings The wizard does not allow commissioning if incorrect Model Type is selected Power Frequency Select one of the following options e 50 Hz e 60 Hz Equipment Type Select one of the following options e Conventional e HeatPump 45 95 7769 01 WEBVISION Table 17 CVAHU Outputs Fields Continued Name Motor Speed Definition You can configure three Motor Speed settings e Heating e Cooling e Economizer If you select HeatingFloating for configuring Heating settings Motor speed for heating is enabled Similarly i
213. l 20 Demand Limit Control DLO sesser 21 SIA C a EPE E E E A E E 24 Migration of LCBS Sites in WebVision secsec 29 Warranty and Return cccceeeeseeeeensereeeeeeeeneeeeenneseeees 33 Appendix A Supported Devices 2 cs eseeeeee 34 Configuring Chilled Ceiling Controllers CHC 34 CHC Outputs eeeeeeeeeeeeesneeeeeeneeeseeeeensaeeeeeaas 35 CHC Inputs ccjcctiit we telenice aneia aa 37 CHC Equipment Control oee 40 CHC Switching Levels eeen 41 CHC Zone Control leessen 41 CHC Miscellaneous seeren 41 CHC PID tirei enin ai aa aea 42 CHC Wiring Diagram ccenn 43 Configuring the Constant Volume Air Handling Unit Controllers CVAHU eeen 43 CVAHU Outputs eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeaes 44 CVAHU Input iiinn nesses ee 46 CVAHU Equipment Control 48 CVAHU ECONOM IZET seerne 49 CVAHU HC Stages 49 CVAHU Zone Options enee 50 CVAHU Miscellaneous 51 CVAHU PID innu esis esto aa 52 CVAHU Custom Wiring cecene 53 CVAHU Wiring Diagram eee 53 Configuring Fan Coil Unit Controllers FCU 54 FCU Outputs ian eee 55 POU INDUS nenne eaea 57 FCU Equipment Control 60 ECU Fan E 61 FCU Switching Levels 62 175 WEBVISION FCU Zone Control 0 002 222 ccccececeeeeeceeceeeeseneeeeeeeeneaees 62 FCU Miscellaneous ccececeeeeceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeees 62 FCU PID icc eat i en 63 FCU Wiring Diagram esce 63 Configuring Hydronic Controllers HYD seses 64
214. l Id 6 Click Submit WEBVISION WebVision Graphics S Al Trends E NOTE To recover you UserlD Password please follow the steps below The data you are WebVision Graphics gt View Graphics entering here should be same as what is present in your account After submitting your data WebVision will validate it and send your UserlD Password to your configured email account In case you do not receive email with in one day you can assume either the information you have entered here is not matching with the information in your account or the emailing service in WebVision is not configured In that case you should contact your system administrator to reset your password After submitting this form you will be redirected to login page again Select secret question What is your mother s maiden name E j Enter answer to the secret question AALS Enter your email address l Fig 4 Graphics Tab Submit Cancel There are 3 locations in the WebVision where you can view Fig 3 Password Reminder screen and setup graphics These are e Network Tree gt WebVision Node Max 1 Graphic TIP The information you provide is validated against the Network Tree gt Device Node One graphic for each device information present in the WebVision database If the This is the default device graphic You can add a maximum information is correct WebVision will send the user ID of three links on the graphic pointing t
215. lash per Second means Override Unoccupied 2 Flashes per Second means Override Standby or Occupied 4 Flashes means the Controller answers of the Network Management Command Wink LED_OCCUPANCY The LED shows the effective Occupancy Mode On means effective Occupied or Bypass 1 Flash per Second means effective Standby Off means effective Unoccupied 4 Flashes means the Controller answers of the Network Management Command Wink LCD_DISPLAY This Mode is used only for a Wall Module with LCD Display The Display has following Symbols to show the Occupancy Modes Sun means effective Occupied or Bypass Half Sun means effective Standby Moon means effective Unoccupied No Symbol and OFF in 7 Segment means the Controller is Off In the Off Mode a Snow Flag indicates whether Frost Protection is configured Blinking Symbols are used to show the Override Blinking Sun means Override Occupied or Bypass blinking Half Sun means Override Standby Blinking Moon means override unoccupied The Controller answers with of the Network Management Command Wink with blinking Sun and Moon 67 95 7769 01 WEBVISION Table 44 Wall Module and Hydronic Controller Inputs Continued Name Wall Module cont 95 7769 01 Definition Override Button Define how the override button on the connected wall module is to be used NO_BUTTON The wall module button is not used for the bypass function BYPASS_UNOCCUPIED The Bypass button when pressed has
216. le unless you are logged on Create this connection for O nyone s use Fig 40 Connection Availability screen 95 7769 01 WEBVISION 10 Type the user name and password and click Next The same credentials are used while enabling dial in settings in WebVision New Connection Wizard Internet Account Information You will need an account name and password to sign in to your Internet account Type an ISP account name and password then write down this information and store it in a safe place If you have forgotten an existing account name or password contact your ISP User name Password Confirm password Make this the default Internet connection Fig 41 Internet Account Information User Name and Password 11 Click Finish to complete the connection New Gonnecton Wizard Completing the New Connection Wizard You have successfully completed the steps needed to create the following connection Service Provider Make this the default connection The connection will be saved in the Network Connections folder To create the connection and close this wizard click Finish Fig 42 Completing the New Connection Wizard screen To configure E mail setup Complete the following procedure to configure the e mail setup details 1 Click the Systems tab The System page with General Properties appears 2 Click the Email Setup tab The Em
217. lect this option when the humidity input is required over the network from other controllers You have to create appropriate bindings for the input Discharge Air Temp Use this field to configure the source for discharge air temperature input The following options are available None Select this if discharge temperature sensor is not connected When this option is selected the Enable Heating DAT HiLimit and Enable Cooling DAT Low Limit in Equip Control page are disabled Remote Select this option if a discharge air temperature sensor is hard wired to the thermostat The thermostat is compatible with the C7770A1006 C7031B1033 C7031C1031 and C7031J1050 averaging 20K NTC temperature sensor elements 20 K ohms at 77 F Outdoor Air Temp Occupancy Sensor Use this field to configure the source for outdoor air temperature input The following options are available None Select this if outdoor air temperature sensor is not connected When this option is selected the Enable Heating OAT Lockout and Enable Cooling OAT Lockout options in the Equip Control page cool and heat OAT at Min Ramp and OAT at Max Ramp fields in Setpoints page are disabled Remote Select this option if an outdoor air temperature sensor is hard wired to the thermostat The thermostat is compatible with the following Honeywell outdoor air sensors C7170A1002 and C7089A1002 PT3000 PTC temperature sensor element 3484 ohms at 77 F Network Select this opt
218. lers provide room temperature control using different heating and cooling sequences The controller is provided with default configuration settings from the factory and is fully operable on installation Using standard Echelon configuration tools the controller can be configured with job specific settings The TR21 and TR23 wall modules interface with the Chilled Ceiling Controllers and provide the following options setpoint adjustment an occupancy bypass button and LED 95 7769 01 34 and an LON jack All wall modules include a space temperature sensor however a remote C7068A return air sensor can also be used Supported Output Types Table 5 lists the supported output types Table 5 Supported Output Types Output Heating Floating thermal PWM on off multi stage electric Options Cooling Floating thermal PWM on off multi stage compressor Chilled Ceiling Controller Models Table 6 lists the Chilled Ceiling Controller models Table 6 Chilled Ceiling Controller Models Setpoint Model Inputs Outputs Knob Sensor Bypass W77630 3 T2 Tx Tx x W7763D 4 2 X W7763E 4 2 Sequences Heat and cool sequences can be selected to be active or not active giving a total of four different sequence options e Heat only Cool only e Heat cool changeover e Heat and cool sequence The controller automatically disables heat and cool control until the window is clo
219. lick the corresponding link to view the properties of that device 3 Click the Graphics tab The View Graphics page appears 4 You can view the graphic linked to that device All other parameters for example Air Flow Setpoint Space as configured for the device also appear on the screen Ly setup a graphic Select a device from the list of devices in WebVision Click the corresponding link to view the properties of that device 2 Click the Graphics tab The View Graphics page appears Click Setup Graphic The Setup Graphics page appears 3 You can add up to 3 links to the default graphic The links can point to another graphic or to an external Web Site Configuration The following options can be used for all the above mentioned devices Import Application Use this option to restore the backed up configuration Export Application Use this option to download configuration settings e Reset Use this option to reset the configuration settings to the last saved configuration settings e Back Use this option for navigation e Next Use this option for navigation 95 7769 01 WEBVISION Save Any change done in the UI is automatically saved locally in the Web UI To save the modified configuration in the WebVision click Save To write the saved data onto device use the Device Download option Set Points NOTE The Setpoints tab appears only for the supported devices To set the s
220. lue and the Full Time value The minimum resolution of the time value is 0 1 seconds PWM Zero Defines the time period for the Zero position pulse When the on time of the PWM period is at this value the PWM device will position itself to the zero position PWM Full Defines the time period for the Full position pulse When the on time of the PWM period is at this value the PwM device will position itself to the full position The minimum resolution of the time value is 0 1 seconds Excel 10 VAV II Inputs Use Table 63 to configure the Excel 10 VAV II inputs Purpose Specify all sensors to be wired to a controller Define Inputs attributes for the VAV II controller Mode Configuration can be performed with the device On line or Off line Procedure 1 Click the Inputs button on the left pane to open the Inputs Configuration page 2 Enter information into available fields 3 Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to the last saved settings 4 Click Next to display the Control Parameters Configuration page or Back to display the Configuration page VAV II Inputs fields Table 63 Excel 10 VAV II Analog and Digital Inputs Table 63 Excel 10 VAV II Analog and Digital Inputs Name Definition Analog Input Configuration continued Analog 2 If there is a second analog input select type e Discharge Temp NTC e Supply Temp NTC e Unused Al Name Definition Analog Inp
221. me Defines the decel eration time for Vacon NX Table 69 NXVFD Drive Parameters Continued Point Min Max Typical Name Value Value Value Description Default 163 84 163 83 0 Default value for Drive nviDrvSpeedScale Speed Scale It provides scaling for nviDrvSpeedStpt Negative values of nviDrvSpeedScale indicate reverse anti clockwise direction of motor rotation This value will be adopted at power up and in case of not receiving any input variable within the specified Receive Heartbeat time Configuring the XL15C Plant Controller XL15C The XL15C plant controller is designed to control HVAC equipment and other miscellaneous loads in a distributed control network You can configure plant controller functions such as start stop loops control loops user defined setpoint values math and logic functions Control Functions 10 Control Loops 8 Start Stop Loops 32 Logic Loops 32 Math Functions 6 Special Network Functions Navigating to XL15C Pages To navigate to XL15C pages 1 On the left pane click the required device name The Device Configuration page appears 2 Click the Configuration tab The Configuration page appears Configuring the XL15C Controller The options for configuring the XL15C Controller are as follows e Local Inputs SetPoints Loop Logic Math Functions Control Loops Logic Loops Start Stop Loops Output
222. n must not be performed The migration procedure has been tested with LonSpec version 05 01 00 00 and later It is recommended that users use at least this version for migration After the auto resolution of Node ID conflict if the configuration upload fails especially for XL15C user should wait a minute and retry the operation WebVision does not support access through PPPoE connection PPPoE is the data link layer protocol used for broadband internet connections If the user is using PPPoE the user is advised to purchase a WiFi router or equivalent that supports PPPoE and connect WebVision to the Ethernet side of the router Follow the User Guide of the router to have the desired setup It is recommended that all the device configurations and bindings are checked field by field to ensure that the migration was successful as expected If any information is found missing the user can retry upload operation of configuration bindings as applicable If that does 33 WEBVISION not solve the problem user should manually fill in the missing information Any attempts to do download without performing this operation may break the control system in the site 7 Points can be overridden through any means in WebVision for a period of time However if WebVision is powered off during that period and re started WebVision will not restore the point i e will not cancel the override even if the specified override time has elapsed In
223. n 1 Min 163 8 Max 163 8 RO LED Default Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Reheat Active Reset Bypass Time Scheduled Occupancy Default Off Low Medium High On Units min Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 65535 0 Default Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Secondary Heat Output Units Precision 1 Min 163 8 Max 163 8 Sensor Occupancy Default Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Space Temperature Units C Precision 1 Min 273 2 Max 327 7 Terminal Load Units Precision 1 Min 163 8 Max 163 8 95 7769 01 128 Hydronic Controller HYD Table 80 provides the HYD points detail and Table 81 on page 130 provides the HYD application of points Table 80 HYD Point Details WEBVISION Point Name Network Variable Field Name Point Type Occupied Cool nciSetPnts occupiedCool NumericWritable Standby Cool nciSetPnts standbyCool NumericWritable Unoccupied Cool nciSetPnts unoccupiedCool NumericWritable Occupied Heat nciSetPnts occupiedHeat NumericWritable Standby Heat nciSetPnts standbyHeat NumericWritable Unoccupied Heat nciSetPnts unoccupiedHeat NumericWritable Current State nviTodEvent currentState EnumWritable Next State nviTodEvent nextState EnumWritable Time To Next State nviTodEvent timeToNextState NumericWr
224. n 1 Min 273 2 Max 327 7 Percent Cool Command Percent Heat Command Units Precision 1 Min 163 8 Max 163 8 Units Precision 1 Min 163 8 Max 163 8 Relay Heat 2 Off or On Remote Setpoint Offset Units F Precision 0 Min 128 0 Max 127 0 95 7769 01 172 Table 93 T7350 Application of Points Continued WEBVISION Point Name Scheduled State Graphics X Alarms X Trends X Commandable Internal Use Valid Values Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Occ Null Space Humidity Units Precision 1 Min 163 8 Max 163 8 Space Temperature Units C Precision 1 Min 273 2 Max 327 7 Stages Active SubBase Type System Mode Units null Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 7 0 sbNul sbSubasenone sbSubase1 sbSubase2 sbSubase3 sbSubase4 sbSubase5 sbSubase6 sbSubase7 sbSubase8 sbSubase9 sbSubase10 sbSubase11 sbSubase12 sbSubase13 sbSubase14 sbSubase15 sbSubase16 Default Auto Heat Morning Warmup Cool Night Purge Pre cool Off Test Emergency Heat Fan Only Free Cool Ice Maximum Heat Economy Dehumidify Calibrate Emergency Cool Emergency Steam Max Cool HVAC Load No Load Temporary Setpoint Units F Precision 1 Min 8 0 Max 7 9 173 95 7769 01 WEBVISION Table 93 T7350 Application of Points Continued Point Name Terminal Load Grap
225. n LonSpec commission T7350 and the assigned controllers before configuring schedules in WebVision 2 If 17350 is acting as Network Time Master it has to be disabled from LONSpec and re commission T7350 The Network Time Master Functionality in WebVision has to be enabled Once enabled WebVision will synchronize the clocks on all supported devices with Real Time Clocks that can be updated over the Lon network XL15C changes XL15C is supported in WebVision However there are some differences that should be noted below 1 LonSpec creates bindings between XL15Cs and assigned RIOs as shown in refer points screen These bindings are present to read command all I Os on RIO even if they are not used WebVision does not have concept of associating RIOs with XL15Cs Therefore following is the behavior during migration a When the XL15C bindings are uploaded in WebVi sion only used configured bindings are actually shown and bindings on un configured I Os are ignored b LonSpec allows naming I Os of RIO W7761 These names are stored in associated XL15C s sec ondary configuration file As WebVision does not support this file all the RIO point names will appear with default names in WebVision after migration User would manually associate them by creating appropriate bindings between XL15Cs and RIOs If an XL15C controller at the site uses a poll point configured to poll an unsupported LON device the Device NV and Field
226. n Mode Units C Precision 1 Min 10 0 Max 35 0 Fan Auto Fan Continuous Auxiliary Economizer Out x lt x lt Off or On Bypass Timer Units min Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 65535 0 Calculated Outdoor Air Enthalpy Calculated Return Air Enthalpy Coil Freeze State X X x lt x lt x lt Units BTU lb Precision 1 Min 256 0 Max 256 0 Units BTU lb Precision 1 Min 256 0 Max 256 0 False or True Cool Percent Units Precision 1 Min 163 8 Max 163 8 117 95 7769 01 WEBVISION Table 77 CVAHU Application of Points Continued Point Name Cool Position Graphics Alarms X X Trends x Commandable Internal Use Valid Values Units Precision 0 Min 128 0 Max 127 0 Cool Stages On Units null Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 7 0 DLC Shed x lt x lt x lt Restored or Shed Data1 Field No Data2 Field No Update All 1 Mode Effective Occupancy Override Scheduled Occupancy Occupancy Time Clock Network Manual Occupancy Sensor Occupancy Economizer Enabled Proof of Air Flow Calculated Outdoor Enthalpy Calculated Return Air Enthalpy Heat Stages On Cool Stages On Free 1 Out Free 2 Out Occupancy Status Out Fan On Auxiliary Economizer Out Economizer Floating Sync DLC Shed IAQ Override Smoke Monitor Window Open Dirty Filter Shutdown Monitor Switch Wshp Enable Coil Freeze State
227. n off times e Min_cool_off replaces set minimum on off times with a 30 second default Cycles Hour Cycles per hour cph Enter value from 2 through 12 For example cph for conventional heating stage one is normally 3 cph Consult your hardware installation guide for recommended values Oa Temp Lock Out OA temperature lockout OA temperature values below the cooling lockout setting disables the cooling stages OA temperature values above the heating lockout setting disable the heating stages Ramp Recovery ramp degrees per hour Enter value from 2 through 20 for cooling or 3 through 20 for heating Fan Run On Time Enter amount of time from 0 to 120 seconds the fan will continue to run after the last stage of heating or cooling has switched off This value is only applicable during unoccupied times and during occupied times if the Fan Control field is set to Auto_Fan 95 7769 01 78 UV Zone Options Use Table 58 to configure the Unit Ventilator Zone Options to set the heating and cooling setpoints Purpose Enter all outputs including optional outputs to be controlled by the Unit Ventilator Controller Mode Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off line or On line Procedure 1 Click the Zone Options button on the left pane to open the Zone Options Configuration page Enter information into available fields 3 Click Commit to save the settings or Reset t
228. nd go to the balancing summary screen Demand Limit Control DLC Demand Limit Control DLC continuously monitors the building s rate of energy consumption It automatically sheds or restores loads to prevent the demand load from exceeding the maximum allowable level or configured setpoint It is based on the building s power requirements and operating characteristics For DLC to have control over energy savings the configured setpoint must be less than the actual demand allocated by the power generating plant DLC sheds or adjusts the loads during peak usages only DLC is driven from the current KW demand which is an instantaneous value averaged over a period of time demand averaging window period It is a good practice to adjust the DLC window close to the utility company s demand window period This in turn will help WebVision to follow the same criteria as that of the utility company when taking KW demand shed decisions The energy history log must also match the peak demand recorded by the utility company Load Assignments Each device is considered to be an external object when assigning it to a load A load consists of a local configuration that defines the behavior of the load and its association with an object or a set of objects These objects are discovered Excel 10 or Excel 15C devices which in turn control the external electrical loads All the objects associated under one load assignment are shed at once restored at onc
229. ned An open window disables the controller operation If the contact is closed the window is open Occupied Sensor Indicates if the room is occupied While unoccupied the controller switches from the occupied operating setpoints to the standby operating setpoints If the contact is closed the space is occupied Unoccupied Sensor Indicates if the room is unoccupied While unoccupied the controller switches from the occupied operating setpoints to the standby operating setpoints If the contact is closed the space is unoccupied Air Flow For monitoring correct fan operation using an air flow switch When the fan is commanded on the controller monitors this input for the fan run up time If the fan does not run within 30 seconds the input indicates that the fan has failed Similarly the input indicates if the fan fails during normal operation If the contact is closed the fan runs No Air Flow For monitoring correct fan operation using an air flow switch When the fan is commanded on the controller monitors this input for the fan run up time If the fan does not run within 30 seconds the input indicates that the fan has failed Similarly the input indicates if the fan fails during normal operation If the contact is closed the fan is not running ChangeOver Cool This selection is for local heat cool changeover operation for two pipe units using a switch or local thermostat switch When the contact closes this input indicates that the
230. ng Chilled Ceiling Controllers CHC Description The W7763C D and E Controllers are Chilled Ceiling Controllers in the Excel 10 product line They cover a wide range of control applications including radiators induction units and fan coil units with manual fan switching chilled ceiling and chilled beam and are suitable for either wall mounting or unit mounting The controllers can operate as stand alone units or networked using the standard Echelon LONWoRKS bus Interfaces are provided for a wide range of actuator types Heating systems can be water or electric and cooling systems can be chilled water supply or compressors Extensive timing and interlock features make the W7763 especially suitable for systems using electric heat and compressors Navigating to CHC Pages Go to the Devices tab Expand the list of devices on the left pane listed under WebVision Select a device to view its properties Features LonMark HVAC profile 8020 Stand alone operation or on high speed 78 kilobit LON network Uses Echelon LonTalk protocol Direct connection of thermal actuators Factory configured default parameters Wide range of supported valves and actuators Available with setpoint knob for wall mounting Built in LON jack for easy network access LON service pin and LED accessible without disassembly The W7763C D and E are LonMark compliant Chilled Ceiling Controllers in the Excel 10 family product line These control
231. ng the XL15C Plant Controller XL15C 91 Configuring the T7350 Thermostat Controller T7350 97 Appendix B Device Point Tables cecceeee 106 W7763C D E Chilled Ceiling Controller CHC 106 Constant Volume Air Handling Unit Controller KAVAN a U sce E 114 Fan Coil Unit Controller FCU nene 122 Hydronic Controller HYD seeren 129 Excel 10 Remote Input Output Device RIO 136 Unit Ventilator UV ceecee 138 Excel 10 VAV II Controller VAV Il aeee 145 Vacon NX Frequency Converter NXVFD 152 XL15C Plant Controller XL15C eee 155 T7350 Thermostat T7350 cn 168 TOPIC Indek iomann uiaiia aieas di cline 175 95 7769 01 WEBVISION LON LonWorks LonMark and Echelon are registered trademarks of Echelon Corporation Microsoft Windows and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Niagara Framework and the Niagara framework logo are registered trademarks of Tridium Inc WebVision and WebStat are trademarks of Honeywell International Inc Automation and Control Solutions Honeywell International Inc 1985 Douglas Drive North Golden Valley MN 55422 Honeywell Limited Honeywell Limit e 35 Dynamic Drive Honeywell U S Registered Trademark Toronto Ontario M1V 429 2010 Honeywell International Inc cee 95 7769 01 M S 05 10 www honeywell com buildingsolutions Printed in U S A
232. ning Fan Output Fan Stages Active X X Xx x X X Xx x X X Xx Units Precision 1 Min 163 8 Max 163 8 Fan Off Fan Speed 1 Fan Speed 2 Fan Speed 3 Fan Auto Fan Default HW Override Default Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby HW Window Open Humidity x lt x lt x lt Closed or Open Units RH Precision 1 Min 163 8 Max 163 8 Manual Occupancy Default Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby 111 95 7769 01 WEBVISION Table 75 CHC Application of Points Continued Point Name Unit Status Mode Graphics X Alarms X Trends X Commandable Internal Use Valid Values Default Auto Heat Morning Warmup Cool Night Purge Pre cool Off Test Emergency Heat Fan Only Free Cool Ice Maximum Heat Economy Dehumidify Calibrate Emergency Cool Emergency Steam Max Cool HVAC Load No Load CHC Status Mode Disabled Cool Heat Pressurize Depressurize Manual Mode Factory Test Mode Floating Out of Sync Fan Switch Off Startup Wait Output Position 1 Output Position 2 Units Precision 1 Min 163 8 Max 163 8 Units Precision 1 Min 163 8 Max 163 8 Primary Heat Output Units Precision 1 Min 163 8 Max 163 8 RO LED Default Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Reheat Active Default Off Low Medium High On Reset Bypass Time
233. nt Details 3 The following information appears in a tabular format Load Assignment Name A unique name for load assignment e Min On Time Displays the minimum period for which the load is active e Min Shed Time Displays the period for which the load is shed Max Shed Time Displays the maximum period for which the load is shed or made inactive e Shed Method Displays the method used to shed load For example it can be Rotating Off Continuous and so on Delete Load To delete a load 1 On the Load Assignment page select the name of the load you want to delete from the Load Assignment Name column 2 Click Delete A confirmation message appears 3 Click OK to confirm the deletion System You can use the System page only if you have a Contractor s privileges Use this page to configure general settings of the system that include Time and Date settings new package installation SMTP settings Network settings and Home Page settings Use this System page to configure e General Properties Site Setup Network Setup Details Dial In Settings E mail Setup 95 7769 01 24 e Admin e System Utilization To configure the System general properties Use the following procedure to configure the system general properties 1 Click the Systems tab The General tab of the System page appears Fig 31 Fig 31 System Tab General Tab 2 Enter Select the following site details e Properti
234. nt s details 1 Click the Alarms tab The View Alarms page appears 2 Click the alarm name that you want to edit The Alarm Setup page of the selected alarm appears 3 Edit the fields as explained in step 3 of To add an alarm E Mail recipient s details 4 Click Save to save the changes NOTE Click Cancel to abort the action NOTE The alarm priority information for internal user is available in the user account configuration page To delete an alarm E Mail notification recipient 1 Click the Alarms tab The View Alarms page appears 2 Click Alarm E Mail Notification Setup The Alarm E Mail Notification Setup page appears 3 Select a user from the Name list that you want to delete 4 Click Delete to delete the selected recipient TIP To delete all recipients at once check the All check box in the header and click Delete Trends Trends depict the values of points over time in a graphical format Use the Trends tab to view trends for the selected points over a period ranging from a day to a year You can store a maximum of 1000 samples per trend By default you can store 500 samples per trend Once you cross the limit the oldest sample is overwritten and rolled over based on trend configuration Five trends can be plotted simultaneously For example outside air temperature and space temperature plotted for a period of one month A trend point can be a data point from any supported LONWORKS network device A data p
235. nt to delete 3 Click Delete Alarm A confirmation message appears 4 Click OK to confirm the deletion NOTES 1 Click Cancel to cancel the deletion 2 Only Acknowledged Alarms can be deleted TIP To delete all alarms at once select the Alarm Name check box and click Delete Alarm 95 7769 01 WEBVISION To replicate an alarm 1 Click the Alarms tab The View Alarms page appears 2 Click the Alarm Setup tab on the View Alarms page The Alarm Setup page appears 3 Click corresponding to the alarm that you want to replicate The Replicate Alarm dialog box appears 4 Type the alarm name in the Alarm Name text box 5 Select an alarm and device that you want to replicate from the Replicate Alarm and Device drop down list 6 Choose a prefix or suffix to name the replicated copy of the alarm Select the Prefix with or Suffix with option as required 7 Type a label name for the alarm in the Label text box 8 Click Replicate to confirm the replication NOTE Click Cancel to cancel the replication To setup alarm E Mail notification 1 Click the Alarms tab The View Alarms page appears 2 Click the Alarm E Mail Notification Setup tab on the View Alarms page Delete Alarm Email Recipient Fig 18 Alarm E Mail Notification Setup Tab 3 The Alarm E Mail Notification Setup page appears with the following information in the tabular format TIP Select the check box in the header row to select all the liste
236. o an external URL or and password to your E Mail account to another graphic e Location Tree You can create user defined location TIP If you do not remember the password recovery hierarchy as tree For each location tree node there can information and the answer provided by you is incorrect be one user defined graphic You can customize the you can request the WebVision Administrator to reset graphic and set a background image monitor and your password In any other case please contact the command points add links to external web sites and add Honeywell Support for assistance links to a different graphic You can insert the following in a graphic distinguished by an underlined column header Tables are by default displayed in ascending order However for alarms default display is in the reverse chronological order the most External Links Links to other graphics Working with Tables Background images i F e Points Click the column header of a column that you want to sort in Devices ascending descending order Columns that you can sort are s Text current alarm is displayed on top NOTE Apart from the Contractor who has all the privileges a in WebVision all the users who add replicate new e Click to move to the next page graphics have access to all the graphics created by them e Click o to move to the previous page To view a graphic 1 Click the Graphics tab The View Graphics page appears 2 Select
237. o configure XL15C to connect Pulse Meter and act as source for KW input for DLC running in WebVision 95 7769 01 WEBVISION 8 Alarm Dial Out This feature is not supported by WebVision or by any alternate mechanisms Hence this has to be dropped as part of migration process 9 Runtime Logs This feature is not supported by WebVision or by any alternate mechanisms Hence this has to be dropped as part of migration process 10 Bindings between XL15A and RIOs XL15A can be replaced with XL15C to drive the loops configured If the loops are driving RIOs the same be achieved using XL15Cs and RIOs The user should replace XL15A with XL15C configure the same loops in XL15C associate RIOs to XL15C in LonSpec and re commission XL15C and RIOs NOTE The user should remember that replacing a controller would involve rewiring and testing the physical installation The new XL15C that is replacing existing XL15A has to be purchased separately and will not be provided along with WebVision Decommissioning XL15B WebVision supports most of the functionality of XL15B However XL15B configuration has to be manually created in WebVision Configuration of the following functions should be recreated in WebVision 1 Alarms 2 Trends 3 Schedules Unlike in XL15B WebVision does not support year round schedules WebVision supports weekly schedules that repeat through out the year Hence the schedules should be modified accordingly 4
238. o ensure air is flowing over the electric heating coil before turning on the electric coil The fan continues to run after the electric coil is turned off for the post run time to ensure the electric coil is cooled down before the fan turns off Similarly for cooling coil condensation protection the fan re run and post run times are observed Additionally if the digital input is configured for fan fail detection and the fan does not operate within the defined run up time then the control output is not turned on This action also occurs if the fan fails during normal operation No There is no interlock between fan operation and the control outputs Valve Direction Define the operating direction of the valves for actuator types Floating PWM and Thermal Direct To open the valve is modulated from 0 to 100 Reverse To open the valve is modulated from 100 to 0 95 7769 01 60 WEBVISION Table 34 FCU Equipment Control Options Continued Name Definitions Output Options continued Min Stage Off Time Define the minimum off time for control outputs configured for operation as staged outputs This setting is particularly useful for heat exchanger operation or compressor units Each stage of the controlled output stays off for the minimum period of time before the controller turns it on again The selectable range is 0 to 600 seconds Valve Runtime This configuration parameter has thre
239. o revert to the last saved settings 4 Click Next to display the Miscellaneous Parameters Configuration page or Back to display the H C Stage Parameters Configuration page N UV Zone Options fields Table 58 Unit Ventilator Zone Options WEBVISION Table 58 Unit Ventilator Zone Options Continued Name Definition Max Limit Provides an upper limit on the allowed Setpoint settings of the Wall Module s setpoint knob Enabled if Use Wall Module Setpoint is Yes Values range from 55 to 85 F when the setpoint knob type is absolute and range for relative setpoint knob type is 9 to 9 DDf Name Definition Cooling Occupied Enter Occupied cooling setpoint Setpoint range 50 to 95 F 10 to 35 C Cooling Standby Enter Standby cooling setpoint Setpoint range 50 to 90 F 10 to 32 C Cooling Enter Unoccupied cooling setpoint Unoccupied range 50 to 90 F 10 to 32 C Setpoint Heating Occupied Enter Occupied heating setpoint Setpoint range 50 to 90 F 10 to 32 C Heating Standby Enter Standby heating setpoint UV Miscellaneous Settings Use Table 59 to configure the miscellaneous Unit Ventilator application settings Purpose Enter all outputs including optional outputs to be controlled by the Unit Ventilator Controller Mode Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off line or On line Procedure 1 Click the Miscellaneous button on th
240. o the target setpoint during recovery The T7300 series 1000 did a similar method Based on the heat and cool setpoints configured and the minimum and maximum ramp rates configured the wizard automatically calculates the lead time information for both cool and heat recovery ramps and displays it in this section 103 WEBVISION NOTE This data is applicable when the unoccupied setpoints change to occupied or standby modes When the setpoint changes from occupied or standby mode to unoccupied mode or when the minimum or maximum ramp rates are 0 there will be step change in the setpoint BYPASS The temporary override time is the maximum time the controller stays in the occupied mode when its unoccupied mode was overridden and put in bypass mode This value is selectable from 1 to 8 hours When no outdoor air temperature sensor is available the minimum recovery ramp rate is used The recovery ramps have the following configuration parameters e Minimum heating recovery ramp rate Maximum heating recovery ramp rate Minimum heating outdoor air temperature Maximum heating outdoor air temperature Minimum cooling recovery ramp rate Maximum cooling recovery ramp rate Minimum cooling outdoor air temperature Maximum cooling outdoor air temperature T7350 Equipment Control Configuring Equipment Control Page Use the Equip Control Configuration page to configure the heating and cooling selections and loop tuning parame
241. ockout based on the outdoor air temperature Heating OAT Lockout This option is available only if the outdoor air temperature input is configured in the General page and Enable Heating OAT Lockout is selected If outdoor air temperature is greater than Heat Lockout Setpoint then the heating is locked out Enable Heating DAT Hi Limit This option is enabled only if the discharge air temperature input is configured in the General page This will enable the usage of the discharge air high limit Heating DAT Hi Limit This option is available only if the discharge air temperature input is configured in the General page and Enable Heating DAT Hi Limit is selected Cooling Extended Fan Operation Selections Use this option to configure the time for extended fan operation after cooling turns off The choices are No Extend Op 0 or Extend 40 sec 40 sec Cooling Cycling Rate This option allows the user to configure the cooling cycling option for standard or fast response systems Available choices are Std 3 cph standard response Fast 4 cph fast Enable Cooling OAT Lockout This option is enabled only if the outdoor air temperature input is configured in the General page This will enable the cooling lockout based on the outdoor air temperature Cooling OAT Lockout This option is available only if the outdoor air temperature input is configured in the General page and Enable Cooling OAT Lockout is selected If outdoor air temperature is less than
242. odem used NOTE The default modem settings works for most of the modems If the modem is not working then change the configuration 5 Click Save to save the settings Deployment Diagram WEBVISION DAIL UP ADAPTER LOCAL IP ADDRESS USERNAME lt PASSWORD DAIL UP ADAPTER lt _ _ _ REMOTE IP ADDRESS PC LAPTOP M28781 Fig 32 Deployment Diagram 95 7769 01 26 To enable Dial In settings Complete the following procedure to enable the dial in settings on your computer laptop 1 Go to Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Network Connection 2 Go to File gt New Connection s Network Connections a Edit View Favorites Tools Advanced Help pi Search Folders E ections New Connection Close x i Network Troubleshooter Fig 33 File New Connection menu selection LAN or High Speed Internet 1394 Connection 2 Connected 1394 Net Adapter 2 Local Area Connection 4 Connected oadcom Netxtreme 57xx Gig D SS 3 The New Wizard screen appears Click Next Ney Copecion Wizard Welcome to the New Connection Wizard This wizard helps you Connect to the Internet Connect to a private network such as your workplace network To connect to a wireless network view i inrangg To continue click Next Fig 34 New Connection Wizard screen 4 Select the Connect to the Internet option and click
243. oint can be used in multiple trend configuration There are few default sample trends stored in WebVision You cannot delete these sample trends However you can create new trends The trends created by you are called User Defined trends When you add a device all the default trends present in that device are added to WebVision All the default trends are disabled You can create and view a maximum of 100 trends To view trends Click the Trends tab The View Trends page appears with the following information Filter Filter By None Add Trend m E TrendName Device Points Trend Type Channel DLC Shed Defaut Occupancy Fan Stages Active Channel Effective Occupancy Fan Stages Active Ad Reheat Active Space Temperature ge seneduied User Defined Occupancy Sensor Neciinanceyw I lser Nefined Channelt Delete Trend Fig 19 Trends page Trend Name The unique name for the Trend Device Indicates the location on the device Points Indicates the points whose readings are required to generate a trend Trend Type Indicates type of trend For instance it can be a user defined trend Channel Indicates the channel on which the devices are present Sampling Interval Indicates the time interval between two successive read operations on the point One hour is the default setting The sampling interval time can range from a few minutes to a day The
244. ol This option is available for model is configured as T7350H1017 only Action This is disabled when the model is selected as T7350H1009 This is applicable for modulating cool output that is when the Cool Stages option is configured as Cool Enable Select Direct 4 20mA if the actuator connected for cooling action is driven from 0 100 and Reverse 20 4mA if is driven from 100 0 Configuring the Keypad Display page Use the KeyPad Display Configuration page to configure 1 the keypad lockout level display temperature unit in the Procedure Click the Keypad button on the left pane to open the Keypad Display Configuration page thermostat time display format system switch configuration 2 Enter information into available fields see Table 71 on and fan switch configuration page 101 3 Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to Mode the last saved settings Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off line or 4 Click Next to display the Setpoints Configuration On line 95 7769 01 page or Back to display the General Configuration page 100 Keypad Display Configuration fields Table 71 Keypad Display Configuration Fields Name Definition Keypad Lockout Use this option to configure the keypad lockout enable disable through special keypad sequence on the thermostat Enable All Selecting this option will allow the user to access any keys on the thermostat No lockout will be imposed En
245. ollowing options e Unused e Offset e Absolute UV PID settings Use Table 60 to configure the Unit Ventilator PID settings Purpose Adjust PID Proportional Integral Derivative control parameters for the Unit Ventilator Controller Mode Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off line or On line 95 7769 01 80 CAUTION Equipment Damage Possible Can cause short cycling of compressors or wide swings in space temperature and excessive overdriving of modulating outputs If a large or frequent change to the PID control parameters is made it is possible to cause equipment problems such as short cycling compressors if the stage minimum run times were disabled Other problems that can occur include wide swings in space temperature and excessive overdriving of modulating outputs The default values provide proper control for most applications If the PID parameters require adjustment away from these values use caution to ensure that equipment problems do not arise If any change to the PID control parameters is made the adjustments should be gradual After each change allow the system to stabilize so the effects are accurately observed Make further refinements as needed until the system is operating as desired If the default values are changed and you want to reset them add a second Unit Ventilator Controller to the subnet record then re enter the default PID values to the first Unit Ventilator
246. omatically reboots This may take about 5 to 10 minutes 3 Logon to WebVision again after 5 to 10 minutes NOTE When saving the file the default File Type option is dist Download Audit Log Complete the following procedure to download the audit log 1 Click the Download Audit Log button 2 Click Open to view the file or Click Save to save the file at the required location The file displays information related to the action performed by all the users Download System Log Complete the following procedure to download the system log 1 Click the Download System Log button 2 Click Open to view the file or Click Save to save the file at the required location The file displays the logged system level error and trace message System Utilization Complete the following procedure to view system performance 1 Click the Systems tab The System page with General Properties appears 2 Click System Utilization The System Utilization page appears 3 You can view the Resource Utilization graph details on your screen NOTE This screen helps you to understand the WebVision resources that are being used Migration of LCBS Sites in WebVision Ensure that the site configuration backup is available in LonSpec You should use either LonSpec or WebVision as the primary configuration tool Having more than one tool would require effort to keep them in sync that is manual and error prone At certain sites whe
247. on applications for start stop control loops include exhaust fans pumps lighting or any other loads requiring time of day control Purpose To specify up to eight start stop loops Mode Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off line or On line Procedure 1 2 On the Configuration page click Start Stop Loops The Start Stop Loop page appears on the right pane Select the required loop from Select Loop There are eight start stop loops available Select one to begin configuring SS_LOOP_1 through SS_LOOP_ 8 Type the Loop Name Loops are named SS_LOOP_1 SS_LOOP_2 and so on To change the name type over it and then click Change Name Name the start stop loop according to the device being controlled The name can have a maximum of 18 characters Select the Link Type and Link Name for Bypass The bypass sensor TOD allows the user to place the Start Stop loop into occupied mode for a timed duration which depends on the Bypass Time value The bypass input changes the state to occupied The bypass input must remain true for the loop to remain in the bypass state for the timed duration Select the Link Type and Link Name for Disable Loop This input is to control the Start Stop loop The disable input disables the start stop loop if the DI assigned to it is ON and enables the loop if this DI assigned to it is OFF The Output is OFF when the loop is disabled Select the required Occupancy Override Period e Netwo
248. on for this Application This selection defines how the controller will operate the VAV Terminal Unit s damper Valid Selections for this field are Pressure Dependent The controller uses space temperature as the primary means of controlling the VAV Terminal Pressure Independent The controller uses airflow as the primary means of controlling the VAV Terminal Damper 95 7769 01 82 WEBVISION Table 62 Excel 10 VAV II Configuration Parameters Continued Name Box Type Definition Defines the physical type of VAV Terminal the controller is connected to This select determines what control options are available for the VAV Terminal Valid selections for this field are e Single Duct This VAV Terminal type consist of a single primary air supply inlet connection with or without a primary flow sensor This box type is primarily used for cooling only applications cooling with local reheat or dual temperature central heating cooling systems e Dual Duct This VAV Terminal type consist of separate primary air supply inlets for cooling and heating Typically the box can be configured with a single flow sensor located on the discharge side of the terminal or in one of the two primary air inlets a flow sensor in each of the primary air inlets or no flow sensors e Flow Tracking This VAV Terminal type consist of a single inlet air connection receiving it s primary source from the condition space The
249. on page appears All the sensors associated with the selected device are listed in the Sensor Name list The Actual Reading column lists the actual value measured by the sensor 3 Specify the correct value that the controller is supposed to measure in Calibrated Value column The difference between the two values is displayed in Calibrated offset column The controller adds the calibrated offset value to the measured value to correct the error 4 Click Save to save the settings 95 7769 01 20 Balancing This process helps the VAV devices to calibrate their flow sensors for better air flow control NOTE To perform balancing ensure that the VAV device is online To view the Balancing page 1 Click the Balancing tab The Balancing page appears 2 The following information is displayed in tabular format e Device Name Name of the device e Channel Name Name of the channel on which the device exists e Balanced On Balancing status It can be Balanced or Not Balanced NOTE Use Filters to quickly search the required device Use one of the following filter options to search for the required device e Device Name e Device Type Is Balanced NOTE To quickly search the devices type the first letter of the required filter criteria in the Keyword text box and type an asterisk This lists all the names starting with the first letter that you have written in the Keyword text box To view Balancing details 1 Click th
250. ontrol loop is dependent on the analog reset sensor input The Zero Reset Sensor Value is the minimum value above which the reset action occurs The engineering unit is the reset sensor engineering unit The Max Reset Sensor Value is the maximum value below which the reset action occurs The Max Reset Amount is the value subtracted from the setpoint when the setpoint is reset as per the reset sensor input Recovery This is used to calculate the ramp rate at which it must reach the setpoint Control Params This is used to configure the EPID loop Auxiliary The Aux D O is always intermittent for unoccupied mode The options available are Continuous and Intermittent The On Time is the minimum ON time for the auxiliary digital output It ranges from 0 to 254 minutes with a resolution of 1 minute The Off Time is the minimum OFF time for the auxiliary digital output It ranges from 0 to 254 minutes with a resolution of 1 minute SetPoint Alarms The Alarm Pre Delay represents the time required for the main sensor input value to be beyond the range set by the Alarm Delta Above setpoint or Alarm Delta Below setpoint before the SET_POINT_LOOP_ALARNM is set The range is 0 to 65460 seconds with a resolution of 1 second The Alarm Post Delay represents the time required for the main sensor input value to be within the range set by the Alarm Delta Above setpoint or Alarm Delta Below setpoint before the SET_POINT_LOOP_ALARNM return to Normal
251. or Condensation When configured with a condensation switch the controller will close the cool valve when condensation is detected Input Output Table 7 lists the Input Output I O detail Table 7 Input Output Detail WEBVISION Table 7 Input Output Detail Continued PIN I O Function Number Characteristics OUTPUTS Digital Override 6 0 to 5 Vdc lt 10mA Wall LED Module Connection Only Triac Heat and 14 15 24 Vac 250 mA max 2 pairs Cool 17 18 continuous 650 mA max surge lt 30 sec CHC Outputs Description CHC applications can have a variable number of heating and cooling stages The number of pipes used on the unit could be PIN i iR two or four The outputs could be staged PWM floating or vO Function Number Characteristics Thermal type In addition the outputs can be of Change over INPUTS mode Digital Window 4 Closed lt 400 ohm occupancy Open 10K ohm Purpose changeover Define the operation of the chilled ceiling controller outputs air flow and the type of equipment to be controlled condensation Digital Override 7 Closed lt 400 ohm Mode See Table 5 Open 2 3 3k ohm Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off line or on page 34 On line Analog Humidity 1 0 to 10 Vdc Sensor Procedure Analog Temperature 3 9 20K ohm NTC 1 Click the Outputs button on the left pane to open the Sensor 25
252. or Current Point Name Graphics X Alarms X Trends X Commandable Internal Use Valid Values Units Precision 1 Min 163 8 Max 163 8 Motor Power Units Precision 1 Min 163 8 Max 163 8 Motor Speed Units Precision 1 Min 163 8 Max 163 8 Motor Torque Units Precision 1 Min 163 8 Max 163 8 Motor Voltage Units Precision 1 Min 163 8 Max 163 8 Output Frequency Reference Eq Actual Units Precision 1 Min 163 8 Max 163 8 True or False Drive Run Hours Units hr Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 65535 0 Counter Clockwise Warning Active x lt x lt x lt True or False True or False 95 7769 01 154 XL15C Plant Controller XL15C Table 90 provides the XL15C points detail and Table 91 on page 158 provides the XL15C application of points Table 90 XL15C Point Details WEBVISION Point Name Network Variable Field Point Type Nvo Alarm Status _ St Pt Lp8 Alm nvoAlarmStatus data StPtLp8Alm BooleanPoint Nvo Alarm Status _ St Pt Lp7 Alm nvoAlarmStatus data StPtLp7Alm BooleanPoint Nvo Alarm Status _ St Pt Lp6 Alm nvoAlarmStatus data StPtLp6Alm BooleanPoint Nvo Alarm Status _ St Pt Lp5 Alm nvoAlarmStatus data StPtLp5Alm BooleanPoint Nvo Alarm Status _ St Pt Lp4 Alm nvoAlarmStatus
253. or Free1PulseOff or Free1PulseOff Free2 or Reverse Free2 Free1PulseOn or Free1PulseOff Free1AO or Free1AORev Free2AO or Free2AORev Override Occupancy sensor override and Occupancy sensor override and Occupancy sensor override and window open override window open override window open override Analog Inputs 3 resistive 4 resistive and 2 voltage 4 resistive and 2 voltage With Outdoor 20KNTC sensor support Digital Inputs 3 digital inputs 5 digital inputs 5 digital inputs with Coil Freeze Status support LED digital output Yes Yes Yes Power Supply N A 22 Vdc power supply 22 Vdc power supply NOTE One digital input is reserved for the Wall Module NOTE Packaged Economizer is selected by using Bypass One analog input reserved for Wall Module EconNonePackaged and selecting the AuxEcon Sensor and one analog input reserved for Wall optional Output This output will enable the Module Setpoint Consult the System Engineering economizer when the CVAHU is in the Occupied Guide before configuring the CVAHU Also refer to mode Excel 10 W7750A B C Constant Volume AHU Controller Specification Data form 74 2956 or Purpose Excel 10 W7750A B C Constant Volume AHU Controller Installation Instructions form 95 7521 for more information This literature is available on customer honeywell com Enter all outputs including optional outputs to be controlled by the CVAHU Controller Try the following link for any document Mo
254. or the space peripheral reheat This option uses Pulse Width Modulation control for both valve outputs The peripheral valve is modulated as the first stage of reheat and the VAV Terminal reheat valve is modulated open as the second stage Two triac outputs are required for this option e Three Stage Reheat There are three stages of electric reheat associated with the VAV Terminal Three triac outputs are required for this option Defines the type of fan associated with the VAV Terminal The selection of the fan type defines the control algorithm that the controller will apply to the VAV Terminal Valid selections for this field are e No Fan There is no fan associated with this VAV Terminal e Series Fan The fan supplied with this VAV Terminal is a series style configuration e Parallel Fan Temp The fan supplied with this VAV Terminal is a parallel style configuration that will use temperature control for the fan operation e VavParallelFlowControl The fan supplied with this VAV Terminal is a parallel style configuration that will use flow control for the fan operation PWM Fan The fan supplied with this VAV Terminal is a parallel style configuration that will use temperature control for the fan operation with a PWM signal to operate the fan Optional Outputs Defines the type and operation of outputs that are not directly associated with the control algorithms in the VAV2 controller There are two basic typ
255. ortant equipment assigned to them than the loads marked as Off Continuous Rotating loads are shed or adjusted only after all the Off Continuous loads are shed and if the KW demand still exceeds the peak setpoint DLC sheds the Rotating loads in sequence starting with the lowest numbered load first When demand is below the normal level peak setpoint minus the dead band the Rotating loads are restored on a priority basis highest priority is given to the load that has been shed for the longest period If restoration of a Rotating load causes KW to raise above the peak setpoint then the next eligible Rotating load usually the next higher numbered Rotating load is shed NOTE Note Rotating loads are restored before Off Continuous loads when KW demand is below the normal level less than the peak setpoint minus the dead band Rotating loads are not eligible for shed until their Minimum On Time has elapsed after restoration Once shed a Rotating load cannot be shed again until all the other eligible Rotating loads are shed Rotating loads are not restored until their Minimum Shed Time has elapsed Rotating loads can t be in Shed time not more than the Max Shed time DLC Load Shedding and Restoring Methods DLC monitors the current KW levels at every staging interval and averages it over a period of time Ifthe current KW demand is above the configured peak setpoint then DLC sheds loads at defined intervals until the demand dro
256. ory to change your password after the initial login process Once changed the default password will no longer work Exercise care to create a new password that meets the security standards and can be easily remembered by the System Administrator Use the Users tab to add users assign devices to them and define their privileges based on their roles There are four types of user roles see Table 3 e Contractor Contractor is a user with all the privileges assigned and can perform all tasks SysAdmin is a user account with contractor privileges that cannot be deleted The privileges cannot be altered This is to ensure that there is at least one contractor available in the system e Facility Manager This role represents a Building Engineer who maintains HVAC equipment and monitors the system with the help of WebVision e Tenant The user assigned to this role has limited access to WebVision The user with the Tenant role has access to only those devices which are assigned to the user Balancer Balancer is a user who performs VAV Balancing Job The user assigned to this role has access to VAV devices for WebVision WEBVISION Table 3 Role Matrix Continued Role Matrix See Table 3 Table 3 Role Matrix Privilege Depends Facility ID Privileges On _ Contractor Manager Tenant 1 Graphics p P P 2 Change Controller
257. ose configurations you want to upload 3 Click Upload to upload the settings 4 Click Log to view the upload status NOTE Click Cancel to abort the action Replicate Devices You can replicate existing devices in WebVision To replicate a device 1 Click the Devices tab The Device List page appears 2 Click F corresponding to the device that you want to replicate The Replicate Device dialog box displays and the selected device displays in the Replicate Device list 3 Select the number of copies that you want to create using the Number of copies to be created selection field 95 7769 01 18 4 Choose a prefix or suffix to name the replicated copy of the device Select the Prefix with or Suffix with option as required 5 Type a label name for the device in the Label text box 6 Click OK to save the settings NOTE Click Cancel to abort the action Device Binding Binding refers to a configured association either within a device or between separate devices on a LONWORKS network To view a list of bound devices 1 Click Devices on the WebVision page The Device List page is displayed 2 Click Device Binding The Device Binding page is displayed NOTE Select the required channel from the Select Channel drop down list 3 The following information displays in tabular format e Source Device Lists the source device involved in the binding e Source Point Lists the network object point of the source
258. outdoor temperature MAX RAMP RATE Maximum Cool and heat recovery ramp rates are selectable from 0 to 20 DDF hr 0 to 11 DDC hr A ramp rate of 0 means no recovery ramp the setpoint steps from one setpoint to the other This field is enabled only if the outdoor air temperature input is configured on the General Page OAT MIN RAMP The minimum and maximum outdoor corresponds to the minimum and maximum recovery rate Configure the Outdoor air temperature setpoint for cool and heat recovery at which the minimum rate is equal to the value specified in the cool and heat Min Ramp Rate fields The value is configurable from 20 to 100 F 29 to 38 C This option is available to configure only if the outdoor air temperature input on the General page is configured OAT MAX RAMP The minimum and maximum outdoor corresponds to the minimum and maximum recovery rate Configure the Outdoor air temperature setpoint for cool and heat recovery at which the maximum rate is equal to the value specified in the cool and heat Max Ramp Rate fields The value is configurable from 20 to 100 F 29 to 38 C This option is available to configure only if the outdoor air temperature input on the General page is configured RECOVERY LEAD TIME INFORMATION The setpoint ramp will be at the target setpoint 10 minutes prior to the occupied standby event time This allows the HVAC equipment an extra 10 minutes to get the space temperature t
259. p Heat Rec Ramp Define the rate at which the setpoint is reset during changes between occupancy modes to provide a form of optimum start algorithm HYD PID Procedure 1 Click the PID button on the left pane to open the PID Configuration page Purpose 2 Enter information into available fields see Table 47 on To configure the variables for closed loop control PID page 71 parameters can be set separately for both heating and cooling 3 Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to control the last saved settings 4 Click Next to display the Wiring Configuration page or Mode Back to display the Miscellaneous Configuration Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off line or page On line HYD PID fields Table 47 Hydronic PID Parameters Name Definition PID Cooling Heating Proportional band This value is the temperature deviation between setpoint and space temperature which causes the control output to modulate from 0 to 100 of full range The variable can be set in the range 2 to 100 DDC 3 6 DDF to 180 DDF respectively 1 3 to 100 DDC 2 3 DDF to 180 DDF for P Control only Reset Time This value is the integral reset time in the range 0 to 3200 sec Setting the Integral constant to zero disables integral operation Derivative Time This value is the derivative constant in the range 0 to 3200 sec Setting the derivative constant to zero disables derivative operation 71 95 7769
260. p Selon y O LospNane S0ATLontm ZONE2_21 NOTASS COMMIS norco Ready orare Fig 44 LONSpec Configuration Screen 2 Select Loop 6 cIDATLowLim in control loops and click Control Params The Control Loop Parameters dialog box appears Control Loop Parameters Main Control Loop Gains Demand Limit Control Throttling Range Integral Time Secs Derivative Time Secs Setpoint Bump pr 6 fo no Control Action Bias Analog Limit Selects r Startup Ramp No Limit Ramp Time Secs fo Low Limit Start Value Percent 0 High Limit C 0 Direct Acting 0 Reverse Acting 50 C Dead Band OF Throttling Range r Delay Time Secs Aux Point Control Aux D 0 Aux Min ON and OFF Times On Time Mins Off Time Mins 0 0 OK Cancel Help ok Continuous C Intermittent Fig 45 Control Loop Parameters dialog box 3 Select an appropriate option for Analog Limit Select and click OK Repeat the above steps for all the XL15Cs After changing the Analog Limit Select re commission all the XL15Cs with LONSpec Oe 95 7769 01 WEBVISION LONSpec Changes Complete the following steps for migrating the existing LCBS sites to WebVision 1 Ensure that LonSpec database which is used to commission the site is ready Open the LonSpec project Click Network gt Edit on the menu bar The Edit Network dialog box appears Edit Network Current N
261. p_1 nvoStStpStatus data loopState dicStatus BooleanPoint Nvo St Stp Status _out Status temp StartStopLoop_1 nvoStStpStatus data outStatus EnumPoint Nvo Bypass Arb _ override Priority temp StartStopLoop_1 nvoBypassArb data overridePriority BooleanPoint Nvo Bypass Arb _wall Mod Override temp StartStopLoop_1 nvoBypassArb data wallModOverride EnumPoint Nvo Bypass Arb _bypass Timer temp StartStopLoop_1 nvoBypassArb data bypassTimer NumericPoint Nvo Bypass Arb _occ Timer temp StartStopLoop_1 nvoBypassArb data occTimer NumericPoint Nvo Bypass Arb _schedule X temp StartStopLoop_1 nvoBypassArb data schedulex EnumPoint Nvo Bypass Arb _occ Sensor temp StartStopLoop_1 nvoBypassArb data occSensor EnumPoint Nvo Bypass Arb _man Override temp StartStopLoop_1 nvoBypassArb data manOverride EnumPoint Nvo Bypass Arb _eff Occ State temp StartStopLoop_1 nvoBypassArb data effOccState EnumPoint Nvo Bypass Arb _bypass State temp StartStopLoop_1 nvoBypassArb data bypassState NumericPoint Table 91 XL15C Application of Points Point Name Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use Valid Values Current State X Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Default Next State X Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Default Time To Next State X Units min Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 65535 0 Current State X Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Default Next State X Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Default 95 7769 01 158 Table 91 XL15C Applic
262. page 2 Select MinHeatOn Off for Heating and MinCoolOn Off for Cooling 3 Enter information into available fields 4 Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to the last saved settings 5 Click Next to display the Zone Options Configuration page or Back to display the Economizer Parameters Configuration page 95 7769 01 WEBVISION CVAHU HC Stages fields Table 23 lists the CVAHU HC Stages fields Table 23 CVAHU HC Stages Fields Name Minimum On Off Definition MinHeatOn enables minimum on off time MinHeatOff replaces set minimum on off times with a 30 second default MinCoolOn enables minimum on off time MinCoolOff replaces set minimum on off times with a 30 second default Cycles Hour Cycles per hour cph Enter a value from 2 through 12 For example cph for conventional heating stage one is normally 3 cph Consult your hardware installation guide for recommended values OAT Lockout Outside Air OA temperature lockout OA temperature values below the Cooling lockout setting disables the cooling stages OA temperature values above the heating lockout setting disable the heating stages Min Recov Ramp Minimum recovery ramp degrees per hour Enter a value from 2 through 20 for cooling 3 through 20 for heating See Excel 10 System Engineering manual form 74 2958 at for a discussion of the recovery ramp feature of the CVAHU e This literature is available
263. perties page Special Event Any Weeki Any Weeki I EE 95 7769 01 6 All the special events along with a summary appear in a tabular format 2 Click Add Special Event to add new special events to the list The Add Special Event dialog box appears 3 Enter select the following information e Event Name Name of the special event Example Thanksgiving Day Event Type You can define the type of day using the three options given Date Date Range and Week and Day Depending on the selected criteria you get the following output Date If you select Date specify the day date month and year Add Special Event Thanksgiving Day Date ha Any Weekday Any Day Any Month Fig 12 Add Special Event dialog box Date Range If you select Date Range specify the date range month and year Fig 13 Add Special Event Thanksgiving Day Date Range iv Any Day iv Any bay y unoccupied Fig 13 Add Special Event dialog box Date Range Week and Day If you select Week and Day specify the month week and year Fig 14 Add Special Event Thanksgiving Day Week and Day v Any Weekday v Any Week v Any Month 06 00 oo oo Fig 14 Add Special Event dialog box Week and Day 4 Enter select the following information under Select State e State Occupied Unoccupied and Standby Start Time The time to start the special event End Time
264. plVerNumber nciApplVer data applVerNumber Numeric Writable applTime1Jan70 nciApplVer data applTime1Jan70 Numeric Writable hwName nciDeviceName data hwName Current State temp ControlLoop_1 nviTodEventIn currentState EnumWritable Next State temp ControlLoop_1 nviTodEventin nextState EnumWritable Time To Next State temp ControlLoop_1 nviTodEventin timeToNextState NumericWritable Current State temp StartStopLoop_1 nviTodEventin currentState EnumWritable Next State temp StartStopLoop_1 nviTodEventIn nextState EnumWritable Time To Next State temp StartStopLoop_1 nviTodEventIn timeToNextState NumericWritable DLC Shed temp ControlLoop_1 nviDIcShedIn data destDicShed NumericWritable DLC Shed temp StartStopLoop_1 nviDIcShedIn data destDicShed NumericWritable Nci Flex Set Pts _occupied temp ControlLoop_1 nciFlexSetPts data occupied NumericWritable Nci Flex Set Pts _standby temp ControlLoop_1 nciFlexSetPts data standby NumericWritable Nci Flex Set Pts _unoccupied temp ControlLoop_1 nciFlexSetPts data unoccupied NumericWritable Nvi Bypass _ value temp ControlLoop_1 nviBypass value NumericWritable Nvi Bypass _ state temp ControlLoop_1 nviBypass state EnumWritable Nvi Man Occ _occupancy temp ControlLoop_1 nviManOcc occupancy EnumWritable Nvi Bypass _value temp StartStopLoop_1 nviBypass value NumericWritable Nvi Bypass _ state temp StartStopLoop_1 nviBypass state EnumWritable Nvi Man Occ _occupancy temp StartStopLoop_1 nviManOcc occupancy EnumWritable Nvo A I Sensor _ai V
265. played 3 Click Upload The binding settings are uploaded on the selected channel Point List Point Group Point groups are used for monitoring and diagnostics of controllers You can create a maximum of fifty point groups in WebVision and add a maximum of fifty points to each point group To view point groups 1 Click the Devices tab The Device List page appears 2 Click the Point List tab The Point List page appears with points present in the first point group 3 The list of points is displayed with the following information in tabular format e Point Name Indicates the name of the point e Device Name Indicates the name of the device e Channel Indicates the channel being used e Value Indicates the value of the point If the point is read only point it appears as a label If the point is writable point it appears in a text box select box with a Write button against it e Write Click Write to write a point value on a controller Le add a point group Click the Devices tab The Device List page appears Click the Points tab The Point List page appears 3 Click Add Point Group The Add Point page is displayed 4 Type the name of the point group in the Point Group Name field 5 All the points in that group are listed in a tabular format Click Add Point to add a point A point selection dialog comes up Select a point and click OK to add the point to the group 6 Repeat step 5 to add all the r
266. plied for heating only 105 95 7769 01 WEBVISION APPENDIX B DEVICE POINT TABLES This appendix provides a table for the points detail and a table for the application of points of the following controllers and devices e W7763C D E Chilled Ceiling Controller CHC page 106 e Constant Volume Air Handling Unit Controller CVAHW fsccsseteestavssanteanecesczet Fan Coil Unit Controller FCU Hydronic Controller HYD Excel 10 Remote Input Output Device RIO page 136 Vacon NX Frequency Converter NXVFD page 138 T7350 Thermostat T7350 Unit Ventilator UV Excel 10 VAV II Controller VAV II XL15C Plant Controller XL15C W7763C D E Chilled Ceiling Controller CHC Table 74 provides the CHC points detail and Table 75 on page 107 provides the CHC application of points Table 74 CHC Point Details Point Name Network Variable Field Name Point Type Occupied Cool nciSetPnts occupiedCool NumericWritable Standby Cool nciSetPnts standbyCool NumericWritable Unoccupied Cool nciSetPnts unoccupiedCool NumericWritable Occupied Heat nciSetPnts occupiedHeat NumericWritable Standby Heat nciSetPnts standbyHeat NumericWritable Unoccupied Heat nciSetPnts unoccupiedHeat NumericWritable Current State nviTodEvent currentState EnumWritable Next State nviTodEvent nextState EnumWritable Time To Next State nviTodEvent timeToNe
267. ps below the peak setpoint If the KW demand drops below the normal level peak setpoint minus the dead band then the previously shed loads are actively restored at every staging interval until the KW demand rises back above the normal level 95 7769 01 WEBVISION a Shedding Method The DLC starts shedding by first searching for all the Off Continuous loads that are eligible for shedding 2 Then it first sheds the lowest numbered Off Continuous load and waits the staging interval to see if the demand has reduced 3 Ifthe demand is still above the peak setpoint then DLC sheds another Off Continuous load This process continues until the demand is well within the peak setpoint limits 4 Ifthe demand has still not reduced then DLC searches for all the Rotated loads road Restoring Method If the demand drops below the normal level then the loads that are currently shed will be actively restored one at a time every staging interval until the demand reaches the normal level When restoring loads DLC on priority searches and restores The Rotating loads where the load that has been shed for the longest period is restored first Then the Off Continuous loads where the load restoration goes from highest load number to the lowest load number e Loads are restored every staging interval if the override condition becomes true or the maximum shed time has been met All loads that satisfy these conditions are restor
268. put_pane button on the left pane to open the Output Configuration page 2 Enter information into available fields 3 Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to the last saved settings 4 Click Next to display the Delta Configuration page or Back to display the Input Configuration page RIO Outputs fields Table 51 RIO Digital Outputs Definition Name Point Select up to eight digital outputs DO1 to DO8 from Type the following types e DISCRETE1 through DISCRETE8 e FLOAT1_OPEN through FLOAT8_OPEN e FLOAT1_CLOSE through FLOAT8_CLOSE e MODULATE1 through MODULATES The following additional parameters are also available for configuration e Speed for Floating DOs e PWM settings for Modulated DOs For floating outputs a corresponding float close should be available for a float open and vice versa If not the wizard gives an error message while you try to save the configuration RIO Deltas Use Table 52 to configure the RIO Deltas Purpose Delta is an adjustable threshold that allows the user to determine on a per sensor basis what change in value is required before the sensor is updated All Excel 10 controllers have a guaranteed periodic update time of 55 seconds which requires that all sensors report any change every update period The delta for each sensor is used to reduce LonWorks Bus traffic by reducing the amount of updates on a sensor that are constantly or quickly changing
269. q3 Stage4 On temp ControlLoop_1 nvoFTStatus data seq3Stage4On BooleanPoint Nvo F T Status _aux Status temp ControlLoop_1 nvoFTStatus data auxStatus EnumPoint Nvo L L Status _man Mode Status temp LogicLoop_1 nvoLLStatus data manModeStatus EnumPoint 157 95 7769 01 WEBVISION Table 90 XL15C Point Details Continued Point Name Network Variable Field Point Type Nvo L L Status _or Gate Status temp LogicLoop_1 nvoLLStatus data orGateStatus EnumPoint Nvo L L Status _dc Ao Status temp LogicLoop_1 nvoLLStatus data dcAoStatus NumericPoint Nvo Bypass _value temp StartStopLoop_1 nvoBypass value NumericPoint Nvo Bypass _ state temp StartStopLoop_1 nvoBypass state EnumPoint Nvo St Stp Status _bypass Remaining temp StartStopLoop_1 nvoStStpStatus data bypassRemaining NumericPoint Nvo St Stp Status _manual Mode temp StartStopLoop_1 nvoStStpStatus data loopState manualMode EnumPoint Nvo St Stp Status _ effect Occupancy temp StartStopLoop_1 nvoStStpStatus data loopState effectOccupancy EnumPoint Nvo St Stp Status _sched Occupancy temp StartStopLoop_1 nvoStStpStatus data loopState schedOccupancy EnumPoint Nvo St Stp Status _sensor Occupancy temp StartStopLoop_1 nvoStStpStatus data loopState sensorOccupancy EnumPoint Nvo St Stp Status _sys Mode temp StartStopLoop_1 nvoStStpStatus data loopState sysMode EnumPoint Nvo St Stp Status _dlc Status temp StartStopLoo
270. r Occupancy nvoFcuStatus hwSenOcc EnumPoint RO LED nvoFcuStatus rOLed EnumPoint FCU Status Mode nvoFcuStatus mode EnumPoint Alarm Type nvoFcuStatus alarmType EnumPoint DLC Shed nvoFcuStatus dicShed NumericPoint Effective Window Open nvoFcuStatus effWindowOpen NumericPoint HW Window Open nvoFcuStatus hwWindowOpen NumericPoint 95 7769 01 122 Table 78 FCU Points Details Continued WEBVISION Point Name Network Variable Field Point Type Fan Feedback nvoFcuStatus fanFeedback NumericPoint External Active nvoFcuStatus externalActive NumericPoint Fan Stages Active nvoFcuStatus fanStagesActive EnumPoint Output Position 0 nvoFcuStatus outputPositionO NumericPoint Output Position 1 nvoFcuStatus outputPosition1 NumericPoint Reheat Active nvoFcuStatus reheatActive EnumPoint Effective Setpoint nvoFcuStatus activeSetPt NumericPoint Space Temperature nvoFcuStatus spaceTemp NumericPoint Reset Bypass Time nvoFcuStatus restBypassTime NumericPoint Unit Status Mode nvoUnitStatus mode EnumPoint Primary Heat Output nvoUnitStatus heatOutputPrimary NumericPoint Secondary Heat Output nvoUnitStatus heatOutputSecondary NumericPoint Cool Output nvoUnitStatus coolOutput NumericPoint Economizer Output nvoUnitStatus econOutput NumericPoint Fan Output nvoUnitStatus fanOutput NumericPoint In Alarm nvoUnitStatus inAlarm NumericPoint Terminal Load nvoTerminalLoad levPerc
271. re XL15B is installed the most current LonSpec database is present on the XL15B Such databases must be brought into LonSpec and used for migration 29 WEBVISION Device Configuration Changes Device configuration covers seven areas Decommissioning XL15A Decommissioning XL15B on page 30 Decommissioning T7300 on page 30 T7350 Changes on page 30 XL15C changes on page 30 LONSpec Changes on page 32 WebVision Configuration Steps on page 32 US OV ONS Decommissioning XL15A Following are the considerations for de commissioning XL15A W7760A 1 Alarms Alarms in XL15A cannot be automatically transferred to WebVision Looking at the XL15A configuration in LonSpec manually create corresponding Alarms configuration in WebVision Follow the steps given in User Guide or Online help to understand how to create Alarms in WebVision 2 Trends Trends in XL15A cannot be automatically transferred to WebVision Looking at the XL15A configuration in LonSpec manually create corresponding Trends configuration in WebVision Follow the steps given in User Guide or Online help to understand how to create Trends in WebVision WebVision comes loaded with default trends for each type of supported device in disabled state If the trend that has to be created is already present and meets the requirement the user is advised to just enable that trend instead of creating a new one 3 Schedules Lookin
272. ree stage switched output Terminals 14 17 are switched for stage 1 terminals 15 18 are switched for stage 2 Both terminal 14 15 and or 17 18 are switched for stage 3 Thermal A switched on off output for switching a 24V thermal actuator on terminal 14 17 Output 2 Mode The output triac pair connected to terminals 16 17 18 of the controller Select the control sequence option to be allocated to output 2 For four pipe applications always allocate this output to the cool option to minimize field wiring errors For two pipe applications only the changeover option is available The selection options are the same as for Output 1 CHC Inputs Procedure Purpose To select the wall module parameters and input points to 3 configure a CHC controller i 1 Click the Inputs button on the left pane to open the Input Configuration page 2 Enter information into available fields Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to the last saved settings 4 Click Next to display the Equipment Control Mode Configuration page or Back to display the Output Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off line or Configuration page On line CHC Input Fields Table 9 describes the field definitions Table 9 CHC Inputs Field Definitions Name Field and Definition Controller Wall Module Configures the functionality of the connected wall module Be careful that the features configured
273. ric reheat associated with the VAV Terminal Three triac outputs are required for this option Three Stage Bin Reheat There are three stages of electric reheat associated with the VAV Terminal The three stages are obtained by first turning on the first electric reheat for stage one shutting down the first stage and starting the second stage and finally turning both stages of electric reheat on for the third stage Two triac outputs are required for this option One Stage Periph There is one stage of electric peripheral reheat associated with the VAV Terminal One triac output is required for this option Float Reheat There is a modulating valve for the VAV Terminal reheat This output uses the series 60 type floating control Two triac outputs are required for this option Float Periph Reheat There is a modulating valve for the space peripheral reheat This option uses the series 60 type floating control for the output to the valve Two triac outputs are required for this option Float Reheat Then Periph There is a modulating valve for the VAV Terminal reheat and a modulating valve for the space peripheral reheat This option uses the series 60 type floating control for both valve outputs The VAV Terminal reheat valve is modulated as the first stage of reheat and the peripheral reheat valve is modulated open as the second stage Four triac outputs are required for this option 95 7769 01 84 WEBVISION Table 62 Ex
274. rk_Wins Equipment on off times will follow network schedule e Last_One_Wins follows the last override request 95 7769 01 WEBVISION 7 Select the following time options e Min On Time Default minimum on time for equipment is 5 minutes Enter new value if necessary according to manufacturer s recommendations Specified range is 0 to 254 minutes e Min Off Time Default minimum off time for equipment is 5 minutes Enter new value if necessary according to manufacturer s recommendations Specified range is 0 to 254 minutes Bypass time Default bypass time is 180 minutes Enter number of minutes the equipment will be in occupancy mode when a bypass is triggered Specified range is 0 to 1080 minutes Configuring XL15C Analog and Digital Outputs Analog Outputs The XL15C controller has 6 Analog Outputs Analog Outputs are used to control variably driven controller devices such as damper actuators valve actuators variable speed fans step controllers and other transducers The analog outputs are 4 20 mA current outputs max load 600 ohms with a 7 bit resolution Each Analog output may be configured as Analog or Digital Analog outputs configured as Analog can drive an analog load and one configured as Digital can drive a digital load Digital Outputs The XL15C has 8 Digital Outputs Digital Outputs are often used to control lighting fans and HVAC equipment Each Digital output may be configured as
275. rost Protect nvoAlarmStatus FrostProtect EnumPoint Indoor Air Quality Override nvoAlarmStatus laqOverRide EnumPoint Invalid Setpoint nvoAlarmStatus InvalidSetPt EnumPoint Low Limit Economizer Close nvoAlarmStatus LowLimEconClose EnumPoint Node Disabled nvoAlarmStatus NodeDisable EnumPoint Outside Air Quality nvoAlarmStatus OAQuality EnumPoint Sensor Failed nvoAlarmStatus SensorFail EnumPoint Application Mode nviApplicMode hvacMode EnumWritable Manual Mode nviManualMode manMode EnumWritable Manual Occupancy nviOccManCmd occupancy EnumWritable Temporary Setpoint nviSetpoint tempP NumericWritable Auxiliary Economizer Out nvoData1 AuxEconOut EnumPoint Bypass Timer nvoData1 BypassTimer NumericPoint Calculated Outdoor Enthalpy nvoData1 CalcODEnthalpyS7 NumericPoint Calculated Return Air Enthalpy nvoData1 CalcRAEnthalpyS7 NumericPoint Coil Freeze State nvoData1 CoilFreezeStat EnumPoint Cool Stages On nvoData1 CoolStagesOn NumericPoint Cooling Percentage nvoData1 CoolPos NumericPoint DLC Shed nvoData1 DicShed EnumPoint Dirty Filter nvoData1 DirtyFilter EnumPoint Discharge Air Setpoint nvoData2 DischargeSetPt NumericPoint Discharge Air Temperature nvoData2 DischargeTemp NumericPoint Drip Pan Full nvoData1 DripPanFull EnumPoint Economizer Enabled nvoData1 EconEnable EnumPoint Economizer Float Synch nvoData1 EconFloatSynch EnumPoint Economizer Position nvoData1 EconPos NumericPoint Effective Occupancy nvoData1 EffectOcc EnumPoint 95 7769 01
276. rue Nvo F T Status _seq2 Stage3 On X X X False or True Nvo F T Status _seq2 Stage4 On X X X False or True Nvo F T Status _seq3 Stage1 On X X X False or True Nvo F T Status _seq3 Stage2 On X X X False or True Nvo F T Status _seq3 Stage3 On X X X False or True Nvo F T Status _seq3 Stage4 On X X X False or True Nvo F T Status _aux Status X X X Off or On Nvo L L Status _man Mode Status X X X Enable Disable Manual Nvo L L Status _or Gate Status X X X Off or On Nvo L L Status _dc Ao Status X X X Units null Precision 1 Min inf Max inf Nvo Bypass _value X X X Units Precision 1 Min 0 0 Max 100 0 Nvo Bypass _state X X X Off On Default Nvo St Stp Status _bypass Remaining X X X Units null Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 65535 0 Nvo St Stp Status _manual Mode X X X Enable Disable Manual Nvo St Stp Status _effect Occupancy X X X Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Default Nvo St Stp Status _sched Occupancy X X X Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Default Nvo St Stp Status _sensor Occupancy X X X Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Default 163 95 7769 01 WEBVISION Table 91 XL15C Application of Points Continued Point Name Nvo St Stp Status _sys Mode Graphics X Alarms X Trends X Commandable Internal Use Valid Values Auto Heat Morning Warmup Cool Night Purge Pre cool off Test Emergency Heat Fan Only Free Cool Ice Maximum Heat Economy Dehumidify Calibrate
277. s Purpose Proportional Integral Derivative PID values regulate an analog output based on two analog values one is a controlled variable the other a reference variable and operating 87 Excel 10 VAV II Flow Pickup Use Table 66 to configure the Excel 10 VAV II flow pickup settings Purpose Specify differential pressure and velocity for flow sensors Define the differential pressures and velocities for the flow sensors These values would be used to calculate the flow linearization values during the download sequence Mode Configuration can be performed with the device On line or Off line Procedure 1 Click the Flow Pickup button on the left pane to open the Flow Pickup Table page 2 Enter information into available fields see Table 66 on page 88 3 Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to the last saved settings 4 Click Next to display the Miscellaneous page or Back to display the PID Parameters page 95 7769 01 WEBVISION Excel 10 VAV Il Flow Pickup fields Table 66 VAV II Flow Pickup Fields Excel 10 VAV II Miscellaneous Settings fields Table 67 VAV II Miscellaneous Settings Name Definition Pt 1 through Ten pairs of airflow values Inw Differential Pt 10 pressure and FPM velocity Flow Sensor List of tables that contains manufacturers Type specifications for airflow units Each table has 10 pairs of airflow values versus feet per minute or feet per
278. s Configuring XL15C Local Inputs The XL15C controller has 8 Analog Inputs and 8 Digital Inputs ANALOG INPUTS Analog Inputs are used to monitor external conditions such as temperature humidity or pressure These inputs are commonly used for monitoring and as inputs to Control Loops Start Stop Loops Math Functions amp Logic Loops 91 WEBVISION Each Analog Input may be configured as Analog or Digital Analog Inputs configured as Analog can receive Input from various types of sensors Analog Inputs configured as Digital can only receive digital signals as inputs DIGITAL INPUTS Digital Inputs are used to monitor external events such as contact closures 10 mA 5Vdc The contact closures initiate alarms monitor equipment status and read pulse meters These inputs are commonly used as inputs to Control Loops Start Stop Loops Math Functions amp Logic Loops Each Digital Input can be configured as Maintained Momentary Counter Slow Counter Fast Pulse Meter An external digital input source is connected to the digital input Poll Points The XL15C controller utilizes poll points as a means to retrieve data from other network devices Data retrieved by a poll point is available for linking to XL15C objects such as math functions control loops logic loops and start stop loops The XL15C polls each point every two seconds If the response is not received within ten seconds the poll is changed to once every
279. s e LonMark HVAC profile 8020 e Stand alone operation or on high speed 78 kilobit LON network e Uses Echelon LonTalk protocol e Direct connection of thermal actuators e Direct connection to fan switch e Direct connection to electric heat e Factory configured default parameters e Wide range of supported valves and actuators e Interlocks and time delays to protect equipment e Slim design fits into narrow fan coil units Terminations all on one side allow controller to be positioned at back of fan coil unit e Power supplied by power mains Description The W7762A and B are LonMark compliant Hydronic Controllers in the Excel 10 family product line These controllers provide room temperature control using different heating and cooling sequences The controller is provided with default configuration settings from the factory and is fully operable on installation Using standard Echelon configuration tools the controller can be configured with job specific settings TR21 and TR23 wall modules interface with the Hydronic Controllers and provide the following options setpoint adjustment an occupancy bypass button and LED and a LON network access jack All wall include a space temperature sensor however a remote C7068A return air sensor can also be used Table 41 Hydronic Heating and Cooling Options Output Options Floating thermal PWM on off multi stage electric Cooling Floating thermal PWM on off
280. s _ dlc Status TRUE Nvo F T Status _ primary Cmd Percent Nvo F T Status _seq1 Cmd Percent Nvo F T Status _seq2 Cmd Percent Units Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 255 0 Units Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 255 0 Units Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 255 0 Nvo F T Status _seq3 Cmd Percent Units Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 255 0 Nvo F T Status _prim Activ Stages Units null Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 255 0 Nvo F T Status _seq1 Active Stages Units null Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 255 0 Nvo F T Status _seq2 Active Stages Units null Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 255 0 Nvo F T Status _seq3 Active Stages Units null Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 255 0 Nvo F T Status _prim Stage1 On False or True Nvo F T Status _prim Stage2 On False or True 95 7769 01 162 Table 91 XL15C Application of Points Continued WEBVISION Point Name Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use Valid Values Nvo F T Status _prim Stage3 On X X X False or True Nvo F T Status _prim Stage4 On X X X False or True Nvo F T Status _seq1 Stage1 On X X X False or True Nvo F T Status _seq1 Stage2 On X X X False or True Nvo F T Status _seq1 Stage3 On X X X False or True Nvo F T Status _seq1 Stage4 On X X X False or True Nvo F T Status _seq2 Stage1 On X X X False or True Nvo F T Status _seq2 Stage2 On X X X False or T
281. s bit2 BooleanPoint Warning Active nvoDrvStatus bit4 BooleanPoint 95 7769 01 152 Table 89 NXVFD Application of Points WEBVISION Point Name Adjust Input Actual Value 2 Graphics X Alarms X Trends X Commandable X Internal Use Valid Values Units Precision 1 Min 163 8 Max 163 8 Clear Counter Units Precision 1 Min 0 0 Max 100 0 Drive Speed Setpoint Units Precision 1 Min 0 0 Max 100 0 Free Analog Input Actual Value 1 Units Precision 1 Min 163 8 Max 163 8 Reset Fault Units Precision 1 Min 0 0 Max 100 0 Torque Reference Reference for PID Units Precision 1 Min 163 8 Max 163 8 AC Fault Code Units Precision 1 Min 163 8 Max 163 8 Fault Active x lt x lt x lt True or False DC Link Voltage Units Precision 1 Min 163 8 Max 163 8 Drive Current Units A Precision 1 Min 3276 8 Max 3276 7 Drive Energy Units kW hr Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 65535 0 Drive Power Units kW Precision 1 Min 0 0 Max 6553 5 Ready x lt x lt x lt True or False Running x lt x lt x lt True or False Drive Speed Active Fault Code 153 Units Precision 1 Min 163 8 Max 163 8 Units null Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 65535 0 95 7769 01 WEBVISION Table 89 NXVFD Application of Points Continued Mot
282. s or Reset to revert to the last saved settings Click Next to display the Equipment Control Configuration page or Back to display the Output Configuration page IRN D CVAHU Inputs fields Table 19 lists the CVAHU Inputs fields Table 19 CVAHU Inputs Fields Name Definition Space Temp Space Temp sensor type Select one of the following options Wall Module LCD Wall Module physical sensor Network Only network sensor signal Note The LCD wall module is supported by the following versions of CVAHU CVAHU Model A v1 02 14 CVAHU Model C v2 01 103 Free1_Pulse_On Momentary digital output 1 Sec Typically used for controlling lighting systems This output turns the lights on Uses nviFree1 Free1_Pulse_Off Momentary digital output 1 Sec Typically used for controlling lighting systems This output turns the lights off Uses nviFree1 Wall Module You cannot modify this option as it is read only Wall Module supports the following types e Sensor Only e Sensor Setpoint e Sensor Bypass e Sensor Setpoint Bypass See the table below for further details Unused_Out No digital output assigned Aux_Econ Tracks occupancy On for OCC OFF for UNOCC Emulates the T7300 s internal economizer output signal for controlling external economizer packages 95 7769 01 46 Table 19 CVAHU Inputs Fields Continued WEBVISION Table 19 CVAHU Inpu
283. sed again Frost protection remains active Modes of Operation The controller has the following modes of operation Occupied mode This is the normal operating condition for a room or zone when it is occupied The controller can be switched into this mode by a network command by the room occupancy sensor or by a bypass button on the wall module Standby mode The standby mode saves energy by reducing heating or cooling demand during periods where the room is temporarily unoccupied Unoccupied mode This mode is used for longer unoccupied periods such as at night or during weekends and holidays Window open If the controller is configured for window open detection the controller automatically disables heat and cool control until the window is closed again Frost protection remains active Frost protection Ifthe temperature drops below 46 F 8 C the controller enables the heating circuit as frost protection Fan fail When configured with an air flow detector the controller protects equipment by disabling the system when the fan fails for fan coil units with manual fan speed control Changeover The controller operates two pipe units configured with a changeover input Dewpoint When configured with a chilled water temperature sensor the controller will close the cool valve when the chilled water temperature falls below the dew point The dew point may be a fixed value or calculated based upon input from a humidity sens
284. selected as T7350H1017 the equipment type is changed to Standard and this option is disabled for selection When the T7350H1017 model type is selected the Heat Action and Cool Action options under Outputs are enabled for selection The modulating subbase does not allow for heat pumps Inputs This section allows you to configure the inputs to the thermostat 97 95 7769 01 WEBVISION Table 70 T7350 General Configuration Fields Continued Name Room Temp Room Humidity Definition This option allows the user to configure the source of room temperature input to the thermostat The T7350 thermostat is equipped with its own internal room temperature sensor The sensor operating range is 30 to 110 F The T7350 thermostat is compatible with the following Honeywell Wall Modules T7770A1006 T7770B1046 T7770C01044 T7770D1000 T7771 Options available are Local Configure as local if the internal temperature sensor on the thermostat is to be used to sense the room temperature T7770A D The models T7770A1006 and T7770D1000 have only temperature sensors and have no setpoint knob Select this option when one of these family of wall modules are connected T770B C The wall modules T770B1046 and T770D1000 have temperature sensors with setpoint knobs override button and a LED T7771 The T7771 wall module will have a temperature sensor override button but instead of a setpoint knob it will have an up down b
285. sers page 2 Enter the account information of the user e User ID The unique user ID It must have a TIP Use Filters to quickly search the required user minimum of 6 characters Use one of the following filter options to search for the TIP You can use a maximum of 30 characters and a required user minimum of 6 characters to set your user ID The User ID permitted characters include a z A Z _ 0 9 The Role following characters are not allowed Email ID and TIP To quickly search the users type the first letter of the User Name The user name required filter criteria in the Keyword text box and type Password Type your password an asterisk This lists all the names starting with the first letter that you have written in the Keyword text box TIP You can use a maximum of 30 characters and a minimum of 6 characters to set your password The 2 The following information appears in a tabular format permitted characters include a z A Z _ 0 9 The e User Name Displays the name of the user name following characters are not allowed e Role Displays the role assigned to the user and e Email ID Displays the user s e mail ID for communication Confirm Password Retype your password Phone Number Displays the user s phone Password Recovery Question Select the number Password Reminder Question e Enable Disable Displays the user s sta
286. ses to control the unitary equipment Define VAV II controller parameters Mode Configuration can be performed with device On line or Off line Procedure 1 Click the Control Parameters button on the left pane to open the Control Parameters page 2 Enter information into available fields 3 Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to the last saved settings 4 Click Next to display the PID Parameters page or Back to display the Inputs page Excel 10 VAV II Control Parameters fields Table 64 VAV II Control Parameters Name Definition WEBVISION parameters The controlled variable is the variable that should be held constant for example a room temperature The reference variable is the prescribed changeable value of the controlled variable for example room temperature setpoint Define PID Proportional Integral Derivative parameters for a VAV II Controller Mode Configuration can be performed with the device On line or Off line Procedure 1 Click the PID button on the left pane to open the PID Parameters page 2 Enter information into available fields 3 Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to the last saved settings 4 Click Next to display the Flow Pickup page or Back to display the Control Parameters page Excel 10 VAV Il PID Settings fields Table 65 VAV II PID Settings Name Definition Cooling Throttling Range Value ranges from 2 to 30 F
287. set to Pressure Independent and the Box Type is set to Dual Duct e DD Master Flow Mix This flow type is selectable when the Pressure Type is set to Pressure Independent and the Box Type is set to Dual Duct e DD Master Constant Volume This flow type is selectable when the Pressure Type is set to Pressure Independent and the Box Type is set to Dual Duct e Dual Duct Discharge Sensor This flow type is selectable when the Pressure Type is set to Pressure Independent and the Box Type is set to Dual Duct e Dual Duct Discharge Sensor Constant Volume This flow type is selectable when the Pressure Type is set to Pressure Independent and the Box Type is set to Dual Duct e Flow Tracking This flow type is automatically selected when the Pressure Type is set to Pressure Independent and the Box Type is set to Flow Tracking Reheat Type Defines the type of reheat used by the controller There are two basic types of reheat available for the VAV Terminal VAV Terminal Reheat and Peripheral Reheat Valid selections for this field are No Reheat There is no local reheat associated with the VAV Terminal One Stage Reheat There is one stage of electric reheat associated with the VAV Terminal One triac output is required for this option Two Stage Reheat There are two stage of electric reheat associated with the VAV Terminal Two triac outputs are required for this option Three Stage Reheat There are three stages of elect
288. small Throttling Range causes a higher output signal value Enter the range in degrees 2 to 30 F 17 to 1 C Heating Integral Time Integral Time Determines what impact the error over time has on the output signal Error over time has two components that make up its value the amount of time the error exists and the size of the error The higher the integral time the slower the control response In other words a decrease in Integral Time causes a more rapid response in the output signal Enter the range in seconds 0 to 5000 81 UV Outputs Wiring Assignment Use Table 61 to configure the outputs of a Unit Ventilator to actual physical outputs on a unit ventilator controller Purpose Modify terminal assignments for configured outputs Mode Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off line or On line Limits Outputs must be configured using the Unit Ventilator Controller Outputs page Procedure 1 Click the Wiring Assignment button on the left pane to open the Wiring Assignment page 2 Enter information into available fields 3 Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to the last saved settings 4 Click Next to display the Wiring Diagram page or Back to display the PID Configuration page UV Outputs fields Table 61 Unit Ventilator Outputs Terminal Assignments Name Definition Default This column displays the default Assignment assignments as
289. so on You can setup alarms define their limits and prioritize them You can also acknowledge alarms and delete acknowledged alarms Alarm priorities can be set for each type of alarm condition The alarm priority can range from 1 to 10 and is used to determine E Mail alarm message recipients High priority alarms have a higher reporting priority For example system alarms for example low battery are always high priority E Mail alarm messages can be sent to a maximum of 50 E Mail addresses Any E Mail alarm message can be sent to any combination of 50 E Mail addresses based on the priority assigned When you add a device all the default alarms present in that device are added to WebVision All the default alarms are enabled An alarm is raised when the value of a point on a device on which an alarm condition is configured satisfies the alarm condition The View Alarms page displays a list of alarms raised on devices along with information such as description of the alarm occurrence time of the alarm the time when the alarm was acknowledged return to normal time the priority of the alarm and so on To filter and view alarms 1 Click the Alarms tab The View Alarms page appears The following information appears in a tabular format E Sraphics Download Alarm m Parm name Device name Description oce Time Feb 12 2009 11 29 PM Feb 12 2009 O Source Device cvahu Device Offline O Source Dev
290. splayed Load Assignment Name Min On Shed Time Max Shed Time e Shed Status To configure the DLC 1 Click the DLC tab The DLC Status page appears 2 Click the Configure tab The Configure page appears WebVision Ste Comite Lond assignment Disable DLC Service Select Pulse Meter cee TT coco TT x GEE Peak Set Point kw Dead Band RW Demand Window Period minute s Staging Interval second s Required field Fig 28 DLC Configure page 3 Select the pulse meter options Click Select Point A Selected Pulse Meter pop up appears Select a Channel Device and Point for configuring DLC and click OK NOTE Check the Disable DLC Service check box to disable the DLC service 4 Enter Select the following parameters Peak Set Point Enter the setpoint to set as the peak limit The range for peak set point value is 0 6000 Demand Window Period Select the demand window period from the Demand Window Period drop down list The valid range is in steps of 1 minute to 15 minutes It is the time interval over which the instantaneous KW demand is averaged to determine the effective KW peak demand value This value in turn drives the DLC to shed or restore loads The demand value is read from the pulse meter for every 15 seconds and the average demand value is calculated accordingly Staging Interval Select the staging interval from the Staging Interval drop down list The valid range
291. system can operate in cooling mode When the contact opens this input indicates that the system can operate in heating mode Changeover Heat This selection is for local heat cool changeover operation for two pipe units using a switch or local thermostat switch When the contact closes the input indicates that the system can operate in heating mode When the contact opens the input indicates that the system can operate in cooling mode 59 95 7769 01 WEBVISION Table 33 FCU Inputs Fields Continued Name Definition Digital Input Movement Points This selection is used for movement detector configuration where a closed contact indicates movement continued Movement detector is the same as occupancy sensor but with an additional Hold Time of 15 minutes This adds a delay to the occupancy signal such that the space is considered occupied until 15 minutes has elapsed since the last movement is detected No Movement This selection is used for movement detector configuration where a closed contact indicates no movement Movement detector is the same as occupancy sensor but with an additional Hold Time of 15 minutes This adds a delay to the occupancy signal such that the space is considered occupied until 15 minutes has elapsed since the last movement is detected Not Used This setting indicates that the digital input is not used Use this setting if nothing is connected to the controller to ensure that spurious signals
292. t Economy Dehumidify Calibrate Emergency Cool Emergency Steam Max Cool HVAC Load No Load 95 7769 01 108 Table 75 CHC Application of Points Continued WEBVISION Point Name Fan Speed Graphics X Alarms X Trends X Commandable X Internal Use Valid Values Off Zero Low Medium High Auto Manual Mode Manual Occupancy Temporary Setpoint Default Normal Disabled Update Status Self Test Update Alarm Report Mask Override Enable Remove Override Clear Status Clear Alarm Alarm Notify Enabled Alarm Notify Disabled Manual Control Remote Control Program Clear Reset Reset Default Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Units C Precision 1 Min 10 0 Max 35 0 Effective Setpoint Units C Precision 1 Min 273 2 Max 327 7 109 95 7769 01 WEBVISION Table 75 CHC Application of Points Continued Point Name Alarm Type Graphics X Alarms X Trends X Commandable Internal Use Valid Values Node Off Frost Invalid Setpoint Temperature Sensor Restored Setpoint Knob Restored Fan Speed Switch Restored Fan Normal SpaceTemp Com Restored HVAC Mode Com Restored Setpoint Offset Com Restored Sched Occ Com Restored DLC Communication Restored Relative Humidity Com Restored Outdoor Temp Com Restored Occ Sensor Com Restored Window Com Restored Manual Heat Com Restored Manual Cool Com Res
293. t Setpoint Units C Precision 2 Min 10 0 Max 35 0 Current State Default Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Next State Default Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Time To Next State Units min Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 65535 0 DLC Shed dINoDIcShed diMinDicShed Air Flow Loss x lt False True Coil Freeze State Dirty Filter False or True False or True Frost Protect Alarm False or True Indoor Air Quality Override False or True Input Nv Fail False or True Invalid Setpoint False or True Low Limit Economizer Close Node Disabled False or True False or True Sensor Failure XJ X X Xx x x gt lt x False or True 95 7769 01 116 Table 77 CVAHU Application of Points Continued WEBVISION Point Name Application Mode Graphics X Alarms X Trends X Commandable x Internal Use Valid Values Default Auto Heat Morning Warmup Cool Night Purge Pre cool Off Test Emergency Heat Fan Only Free Cool Ice Maximum Heat Economy Dehumidify Calibrate Emergency Cool Emergency Steam Max Cool HVAC Load No Load Manual Mode Enable Disable Manual Suppress Alarms Unsuppress Alarms Set Discharge Air Config Clear Discharge Air Config Manual Occupancy State Default Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Temporary Setpoint Fa
294. t The primary opportunity for a Commercial thermostat is in buildings with less than 55 000 square feet These buildings include restaurants shopping malls office buildings and banks Commercial thermostats are used on single zone rooftop units split systems heat pumps or hot chilled systems The electronic thermostat consists of two pieces the cover assembly and a subbase The subbase s include the equipment control connections The subbase is mounted on the wall and the thermostat cover assembly is mounted on the sub base Different subbases will be used for different applications including up to Three Heat Three Cool or Two Heat Four Cool modulating outputs and dehumidification high limit control Each subbase is compatible with the common cover assembly Navigating to T7350 pages Go to the Devices tab Expand the list of devices on the left pane listed under WebVision Select a device to view its properties T7350 Configuration Options The options for configuring a T7350 Controller are as follows e General WEBVISION e KeyPad Display e Setpoints Equipment Control Configuring the General Page Use Table 70 and the General page to configure the thermostat model equipment type outputs inputs day light savings details Mode Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off line or On line Procedure 1 Click the General button on the left pane to open the General Configuration page 2 Enter in
295. t This type drives output Terminal 14 and or 17 One Stage Single stage on off output This type switches Terminals 14 and or 17 Two Stage Two stage on off output This type switches Terminal 14 17 for stage 1 and Terminal 15 18 for stage 2 Three Stage Three stage switched output The output switches Terminal 14 17 for stage 1 and Terminal 15 18 for stage 2 It switches both Terminals 14 15 and or 17 18 for stage 3 Thermal Switched on off output This type switches a 24V thermal actuator on Terminal 14 17 Output 2 The output triac pair connected to terminals 16 17 and 18 of the controller Mode Select the control sequence option for Output 2 For four pipe applications the Cool Mode option is recommended to minimize field wiring errors For two pipe applications the ChangeOver Mode option is the only selection Output 2 The selection options are the same as for Output 1 Type FCU Inputs Purpose Procedure 1 Click the Inputs button on the left pane to open the Input Configuration page Enter information into available fields see Table 33 on 2 To configure the wall module parameters and input points for a page 58 FCU controller 3 Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to the last saved settings Mode 4 Click Next to display the Equipment Control Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off line or Configuration page or Back to display the Output On line Configuration page 57 95 7769
296. t is not used Use this setting if nothing is connected to the controller to ensure that spurious signals do not cause the controller to operate incorrectly The status of this digital input is reported to the network for use as a free digital input if required It has no effect on the control algorithm Procedure 1 Click the Equipment Control button on the left pane to open the Equipment Control Configuration page Purpose 2 Enter information into available fields Define the main control features of controller outputs 3 Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to the last saved settings Mode 4 Click Next to display the Switching Levels Configuration can be performed with LonSpec Off line or On line 69 Configuration page or Back to display the Input Configuration page 95 7769 01 WEBVISION HYD Outputs fields Table 45 Hydronic Controller Outputs Fields Name Definition Output Defines the operating characteristics of the two valve actuator outputs Output 1 and Output 2 as configured in the Options Outputs tab The settings for both Outputs have the same meaning as described in the following text Valve Direction Define the operating direction of the valves for actuator types Floating PWM and Thermal DIRECT To open the valve is modulated from 0 to 100 REVERSE To open the valve is modulated from 100 to 0 Min Stage Off Time Define the minimum off time for control outputs confi
297. t temp ControlLoop_1 nvoFTStatus data resetAmount NumericPoint Nvo F T Status _bypass Remaining temp ControlLoop_1 nvoFTStatus data bypassRemaining NumericPoint Nvo F T Status _manual Mode temp ControlLoop_1 nvoFTStatus data loopState manualMode EnumPoint Nvo F T Status _effect Occupancy temp ControlLoop_1 nvoFTStatus data loopState effectOccupancy EnumPoint Nvo F T Status _sched Occupancy temp ControlLoop_1 nvoFTStatus data loopState schedOccupancy EnumPoint Nvo F T Status _sensor Occupancy temp ControlLoop_1 nvoFTStatus data loopState sensorOccupancy EnumPoint Nvo F T Status _sys Mode temp ControlLoop_1 nvoFTStatus data loopState sysMode EnumPoint Nvo F T Status _dlc Status temp ControlLoop_1 nvoFTStatus data loopState dicStatus BooleanPoint Nvo F T Status _primary Cmd Percent temp ControlLoop_1 nvoFTStatus data primaryCmdPercent NumericPoint Nvo F T Status _seq1 Cmd Percent temp ControlLoop_1 nvoFTStatus data seq1CmdPercent NumericPoint Nvo F T Status _seq2 Cmd Percent temp ControlLoop_1 nvoFTStatus data seq2CmdPercent NumericPoint Nvo F T Status _seq3 Cmd Percent temp ControlLoop_1 nvoFTStatus data seq3CmdPercent NumericPoint Nvo F T Status _prim Activ Stages temp ControlLoop_1 nvoFTStatus data primActivStages NumericPoint Nvo F T Status _seq1 Active Stages temp ControlLoop_1 nvoFTStatus data seq1ActiveStages NumericPoint Nvo F T Status _seq2 Active Stages temp ControlLoop_1 nvoFTStatus data seq2ActiveStages NumericPoint Nvo F T Status _seq3 Active St
298. tOcc EnumPoint Effective Sensor Occupancy nvoChcStatus effSenOcc EnumPoint Effective Window Open nvoChcStatus effWindowOpen EnumPoint External Active nvoChcStatus externalActive EnumPoint Fan Feedback nvoChcStatus fanFeedback EnumPoint Fan Output nvoUnitStatus fanOutput NumericPoint Fan Stages Active nvoChcStatus fanStagesActive EnumPoint HW Override nvoChcStatus hwOverride EnumPoint HW Window Open nvoChcStatus hwWindowOpen EnumPoint Humidity nvoChcStatus humidity NumericPoint Manual Occupancy nvoChcStatus netManOcc EnumPoint Unit Status Mode nvoUnitStatus mode EnumPoint CHC Status Mode nvoChcStatus mode EnumPoint Output Position 1 nvoChcStatus outputPosition1 NumericPoint Output Position 2 nvoChcStatus outputPositionO NumericPoint Primary Heat Output nvoUnitStatus heatOutputPrimary NumericPoint RO LED nvoChcStatus rOLed EnumPoint Reheat Active nvoChcStatus reheatActive EnumPoint Reset Bypass Time nvoChcStatus restBypassTime NumericPoint Scheduled Occupancy nvoChcStatus schedOcc EnumPoint Secondary Heat Output nvoUnitStatus heatOutputSecondary NumericPoint Sensor Occupancy nvoChcStatus hwSenOcc EnumPoint Space Temperature nvoChcStatus spaceTemp NumericPoint Terminal Load nvoTerminalLoad levPercent NumericPoint Table 75 CHC Application of Points Point Name Occupied Cool Setpoint Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use x Valid Values Units C Precision 2 Min 10 0 Max 35 0
299. te for more than the configured maximum shed time It can be restored after the minimum shed time has elapsed lesser than the setpoint minus the dead band In the Minimum On Time box enter the minimum time that the load must be active On Last In the Minimum Shed Time box enter the Resort minimum length of time a load must be off Load after it is shed by the DLC NOTE The maximum shed time for a Last Resort load is twice its minimum shed time and is displayed as disabled text in the Maximum Shed Time box Load after it is shed by the DLC In the Minimum On Time box enter the minimum length of time the load must be active before it can be shed or restored by the DLC NOTE The valid range for the minimum shed time and minimum on time is 0 to 99 minutes If you have selected the Load Shed Method as Then OFF In the Minimum Shed Time box enter the Continuous minimum length of time a load must be off 23 Min Shed Time Enter a valid value within the specified 0 99 minutes range e Max Shed Time Enter a valid value within the specified 0 99 minutes range e Min On Time Enter a valid value within the specified 0 99 minutes range Assign Unassign Devices After configuring a load you can assign it to an external load object which in turn controls the electrical loads All the devices with the Device Name and their Assigned Load the name of the load that is assigned to that devi
300. te nviTodEvent time ToNextState NumericWritable DLC Shed nviDIcShed dicShed EnumWritable Air Flow Loss nvoAlarmStatus LossAirFlow EnumPoint Coil Freeze State nvoAlarmStatus FreezeStat EnumPoint Dirty Filter nvoAlarmStatus DirtyFilter EnumPoint Frost Protect Alarm nvoAlarmStatus FrostProtectAlarm EnumPoint Indoor Air Quality Override nvoAlarmStatus IAQOverride EnumPoint Input Nv Fail nvoAlarmStatus InputNvFail EnumPoint Invalid Setpoint nvoAlarmStatus InvalidSetPoint EnumPoint Low Limit Economizer Close nvoAlarmStatus LowLimEconClose EnumPoint Node Disabled nvoAlarmStatus NodeDisabled EnumPoint Sensor Failure nvoAlarmStatus SensorFailure EnumPoint Application Mode nviApp Mode hvacMode EnumWritable Manual Mode nviManualMode manMode EnumWritable Manual Occupancy State nviManOcc occupancy EnumWritable Temporary Setpoint nviSetPoint tempP NumericWritable Fan Mode nciConfig FanMode EnumWritable Auxiliary Economizer Out nvoData1 AuxEconOut EnumPoint Bypass Timer nvoData2 Bypass Timer NumericPoint Calculated Outdoor Air Enthalpy nvoData1 CalcODEnthalpy NumericPoint Calculated Return Air Enthalpy nvoData1 CalcRAEnthalpy NumericPoint Coil Freeze State nvoData1 CoilFreezeStat EnumPoint Cool Percent nvoUnitStatus coolOutput NumericPoint Cool Position nvoData2 CoolPos NumericPoint Cool Stages On nvoData1 CoolStagesOn NumericPoint DLC Shed nvoData1 DicShed EnumPoint Data Field No nvoData1 FieldNo EnumPoint Data2
301. ters Mode Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off line or On line Procedure 1 Click the Equip Control button on the left pane to open the Equip Control Configuration page 2 Enter information into available fields see Table 73 on page 104 3 Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to the last saved settings 4 Click Next to display the Scheduling page or Back to display the Setpoints page 95 7769 01 WEBVISION T7350 Equipment Control fields Table 73 T7350 Equipment Control Fields Name Definition Heating Fan On with Heat Selections This field specifies the selection of fan operation OFF with Heat The equipment i e plenum switch controls the fan operation in heat mode The thermostat controls the fan operation in cool mode ON with Heat The thermostat controls the fan operation in both heat and cool modes Extended Fan Operation Use this option to configure the time for extended fan operation after heating turns off The choices are No Extend Op 0 or Extend 90 sec 90 sec Heating Cycling Rate Use this option to configure the heating cycling option for standard or fast response systems Available choices are Slow 3 cph standard response Med 6 cph medium Fast 9 cph fast and Fast 20 cph super fast Enable Heating OAT Lockout This option is enabled only if the outdoor air temperature input is configured in the General page This enables the heating l
302. the machine After reboot set the time and date as explained above 3 Choose US English or Metric as the standard for setting the Engineering Units All the point values in the WebVision user interface are shown in the selected unit 4 For local weather check the Enable check box Select a State and City from the corresponding lists 5 Click Save to save the settings To configure Site setup Use the following procedure to configure the site setup 1 Click the Systems tab The System page with General Properties appears 2 Click the Site Setup tab The Site Setup page appears 3 Enter the following site details NOTE Note The supported background image formats include jpg jpeg and gif The size of the image file must not exceed 1MB e Contractor Details e Company Name Contractor Phone Contractor Website Contractor Email Company Logo Click the Browse button to browse for the site logo Upload the selected logo e Login Screen Image Image Click the Browse button to browse for the site image Upload the selected image NOTE Click Reset Image to restore the default image 4 For outside air temperature click Select Point and select Channel Device and Point from the corresponding list NOTE Click Clear to clear the fields 5 To provide weather conditions from an external link type the required URL and a Display Name for the link 6 Click Save to save the settings To configure Network setup
303. the graphic you want to view from the list The selected graphic appears e Click ei to move to the last page e Click lid to move to the first page Type the number of rows you want to view on each page in the text box next to pil To setup a graphic Type the page number that you want to navigate to in the 1 Click the Graphics tab The View Graphic page Page field This enables you to quickly move to the page of appears your interest without having to wade through all intervening 2 Click Setup Graphics The Setup Graphics page pages appears Use the following options to configure graphics Graphics A graphic is a pictorial illustration of a building s layout TIP Move the pointer over any button A tool tip appears coupled with the placement of various devices within a describing the action performed by the button building With the help of a graphic you can view the various devices installed in your building 3 95 7769 01 WEBVISION To insert a background image NOTE The supported background image formats include jpg jpeg and gif The size of the image file must not exceed 1MB 1 Click the Insert Background Image button The Insert Background Image dialog box appears Insert Background Image lps Cancel Fig 5 Insert Background Image dialog box 2 Browse and select an image that you want to use as background image 3 Click Upload to insert the image NOTE To abort the action
304. this case a stale value will be observed in WebVision To cancel the original override operation the user should override the point again for a minute and that would restore the default value 8 If XL15Cs use Math Functions that are type Network Special the configuration will get uploaded properly into WebVision However the WebVision interface does not show Math Functions of type Network Special in the user interface WARRANTY AND RETURNS Refer the user to Honeywell s standard warranty policy in the Environmental and Combustion Controls Product Catalog form 70 6910 This literature is available on customer honeywell com Try the following link http customer honeywell com request cfm form 70 6910 95 7769 01 WEBVISION APPENDIX A SUPPORTED DEVICES This appendix provides configuration information for the following controllers and devices e W7763C D E Chilled Ceiling Controller CHC page 34 e Constant Volume Air Handling Unit Controller CVAAU miian i veins dene a page 43 e Fan Coil Unit Controller FCU oo eee page 54 e Hydronic Controller HYD oo ee eeeeeeereeeeee page 64 e Excel 10 Remote Input Output Device RIO page 73 Vacon NX Frequency Converter NXVFD page 89 T7350 Thermostat T7350 sessen page 97 e Unit Ventilator UV oo eee eeeeeeneeeeneeeeea page 74 e Excel 10 VAV II Controller VAV II wee page 82 e XL15C Plant Controller XL15C ceeee page 91 Configuri
305. tion according to the daylight savings settings in the country where the thermostat is installed End Month This field is available for configuration only if the Enable Daylight Savings option is selected Its default value is October Change this option according to the daylight savings settings in the country where the thermostat is installed Start Day This field is available for configuration only if the Enable Daylight Savings option is selected Its default value is Last Sunday Change this option according to the daylight savings settings in the country where the thermostat is installed Configuration ID When you click this button the button label is replaced by a 16 character alphanumeric number code with every 2 digits separated by a period This code represents the configuration information that define the equipment that is connected to the thermostat This code can be entered through the thermostat keypad using the installer configuration Press the Run and Copy buttons simultaneously and navigate to the code You are presented with a number identified by C1 Enter the first 2 digits of the configuration ID that the wizard has generated Continue entering 2 digits each for C2 through C8 Save this code using the Run button The configuration in the thermostat is changed to that in the wizard The thermostat installer set up allows the user to enter the configuration through the keypad When the Configuration ID button is pressed the wi
306. to 30 DDF Proportional Gain 1 1 to 16 7 DDK Cooling Enter the range in seconds 0 to 5 000 Integral Gain Cooling Enter the range in seconds 0 to 9 000 Derivative Time Heating Enter the range in degrees 2 to 30 DDF Proportional Gain 1 1 to 16 7 DDK Heating Enter the range in seconds 0 to 5 000 Integral Gain Heating Enter the range in seconds 0 to 9 000 Derivative Gain DA Heating Enter the range in degrees 5 to 30 DDF Control Band 2 8 to 16 7 DDK DA Cooling Enter the range in degrees 5 to 30 DDF Control Band 2 8 to 16 7 DDK Econ Control Band Enter the range in degrees 5 to 30 DDF 2 8 to 16 7 DDK NOTE Throttling Range or Proportional Gain determines what impact the error has on the output signal Decreasing the Throttling Range amplifies the effect on the error that is for a given error the difference between the measured space temperature and the current actual space temperature setpoint a small Throttling Range causes a higher output signal value Integral Time Determines what impact the error over time has on the output signal Error over time has two components that make up its value the amount of time the error exists and the size of the error The higher the integral time the slower the control response In other words a decrease in Integral Time causes a more rapid response in the output signal Derivative Time or Gain Determines what impa
307. tor connected and connect the relay W1 such that it turns the heating pump ON or OFF 2 Aux DO Use this option to configure the auxiliary outputs The auxiliary DO can be configured for economizer Time Of Day or for dehumidification The dehumidification options available are Simple dehumid or Dehumid Hotgas BP In the case of T7350H1017 model type the auxiliary DO can be configured for second stage of heating or cooling In that case it cannot be configured for the above mentioned purposes and hence the option is disabled in the screen NOTE The dehumid options Simple dehumid or Dehumid Hotgas BP are available for configuration only if a humidity sensor is configured Heat Pump _ This option is available for T7350H1009 model when the Equipment Type is selected as Heat Pump Rev Value The options available are Active Cooling Active Heating Select Active Cooling when the O B valve is energized on cooling or Active Heating if the O B valve is energized on heating If the standard application is configured this option is not available Heat This option is available for model is configured as T7350H1017 only Action This is disabled when the model is selected as T7350H1009 This is applicable for modulating heat output that is when the Heat Stages option is configured as Heat Enable Select Direct 4 20mA if the actuator connected for heating action is driven from 0 100 and Reverse 20 4mA if is driven from 100 0 Co
308. tored Cool Temp Com Restored Water Too Cold Condensation Normal rtnReserve022 rtnReserve023 rtnReserve024 Alarm Notify Disabled No Alarm Node Off Frost Invalid Setpoint Temperature Sensor Alarm Type continued Condensation State Cool Output Failed Setpoint Knob Failed Fan Speed Switch Failed Fan Failure SpaceTemp Com Failed HVAC Mode Com Failed Setpoint Offset Com Failed Sched Occ Com Failed DLC Communication Failed Relative Humidity Com Failed Outdoor Temp Com Failed Occ Sensor Com Failed Window Com Failed Manual Heat Com Failed Manual Cool Com Failed Cool Temp Com Failed Water Too Cold Condensation Alarm almReserve022 almReserve023 almReserve024 No Condensation Condensation Units Precision 1 Min 163 8 Max 163 8 Cool Temperature Units C Precision 1 Min 273 2 Max 327 7 95 7769 01 110 Table 75 CHC Application of Points Continued WEBVISION Point Name DLC Shed Graphics X Alarms X Trends x Commandable Internal Use Valid Values Restored or Shed Economizer Output X X X Units Precision 1 Min 163 8 Max 163 8 Effective Occupancy Default Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Effective Sensor Occupancy X Default Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Effective Window Open Closed or Open External Active Inactive or Active Fan Feedback Failure or Run
309. tpoints and bypass timer 101 Cool 75 F 45 99 F Occupied cooling setpoint Occupied 24 C 7 37 C e Display resolution Stpt 1 FIPC e Unoccupied Cool gt Occupied Cool gt Occupied Heat 2 F 1 C e Max Occupied Cool gt Occupied Cool gt Occupied Heat 2 F 1 C Heat 70 F 40 90 F Occupied heating setpoint Occupied 21 C 4 32 C Display resolution Stpt 1 FI C e Unoccupied Heat lt Occupied Heat lt Occupied Cool 2 F 1 C e Min Occupied Heat lt Occupied Heat lt Occupied Cool 2 F 1 C 95 7769 01 WEBVISION Table 72 Heating and Cooling Setpoints Continued Min and Default Max Setpoint Value Ranges Description Heat 67 F 40 90 F Standby heating setpoint Standby 19 C 4 32 C e Display resolution Stpt 1 F C e Unoccupied Heat lt Standby Heat lt Standby Cool 2 F 1 C Heat 55 F 40 90 F Unoccupied heating setpoint Unoccupied 13 C 4 32 C e Display resolution Stpt 1 F C e Unoccupied Heat lt Occupied Heat lt Occupied Cool 2 F 1 C e Unoccupied Heat lt Standby Heat lt Standby Cool 2 F 1 C Min 55 F 40 90 F Lowest the programmed Heat 13 C 4 32 C occupied heating setpoint Occupied can be allowed Stpt e Display resolution 1 F C e Min Occupied Heat lt Occupied Heat lt Occupied Cool 2 F 1
310. tring Writable Adjust Input nviProcessIn3 levPercent NumericWritable Free Analog Input nviProcessIn2 levPercent NumericWritable Torque Reference nviProcessIn1 levPercent NumericWritable Adjust Input Actual Value 2 nviProcessIn3 levPercent NumericWritable Clear Counter nviClrCntr value NumericWritable Drive Speed Setpoint nviDrvSpeedStpt value NumericWritable Free Analog Input Actual Value 1 nviProcessIn2 levPercent NumericWritable Reset Fault nviRstFault value NumericWritable Torque Reference Reference for PID nviProcessin1 levPercent NumericWritable AC Fault Code nvoProcessOut8 levPercent NumericPoint Fault Active nvoDrvStatus bit3 BooleanPoint DC Link Voltage nvoProcessOut7 levPercent NumericPoint Drive Current nvoDrvCurnt amp NumericPoint Drive Energy nvoDrvEnrgy elecKwh NumericPoint Drive Power nvoDrvPwr powerkilo NumericPoint Ready nvoDrvStatus bitO BooleanPoint Running nvoDrvStatus bit1 BooleanPoint Drive Speed nvoDrvSpeed levPercent NumericPoint Active Fault Code nvoActF ault count NumericPoint Motor Current nvoProcessOut3 levPercent NumericPoint Motor Power nvoProcessOut5 levPercent NumericPoint Motor Speed nvoProcessOut2 levPercent NumericPoint Motor Torque nvoProcessOut4 levPercent NumericPoint Motor Voltage nvoProcessOut6 levPercent NumericPoint Output Frequency nvoProcessOut1 levPercent NumericPoint Reference Eq Actual nvoDrvStatus bit5 BooleanPoint Drive Run Hours nvoDrvRunHours timeHour NumericPoint Counter Clockwise nvoDrvStatu
311. trol Procedure 1 Click the Equipment Control button on the left pane to Purpose open the Equipment Control Configuration page rp 2 Enter information into available fields Define the main control features of controller outputs 3 Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to the last saved settings Mode 4 Click Next to display the Switching Levels Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off line or Configuration page or Back to display the Inputs On line Configuration page CHC Equipment Control Options Table 10 describes the configuration options Table 10 CHC Equipment Control Options Name Option and Definition Output Options Defines the operating characteristics of the two valve actuator outputs Output 1 and Output 2 Define operation of output 1 and output 2 as configured in the Outputs page The settings for both Outputs have the same meaning as described in the following text Valve Direction Define the operating direction of the valves for actuator types Floating PWM and Thermal Direct To open the valve is modulated from 0 to 100 Reverse To open the valve is modulated from 100 to 0 Min Stage Off Time Define the minimum off time for control outputs configured for operation as staged outputs This setting is particularly useful for heat exchanger operation or compressor units Each stage of the controlled output stays off for the minim
312. troller operates two pipe FCUs configured with a changeover input FCU Input Output Specifications Table 31 lists the FCU Input Output specifications Table 31 FCU Input Output Specifications Input Output Function Characteristic Inputs Digital Window Closed lt 400 ohm occupancy open 10K ohm changeover air flow Analog Digital Fan speed Resistor Network Wall Module Override connection only Analog Temperature 20K ohm NTC Sensor Analog Setpoint 10k Ohm Wall Module adjustment connection only Outputs Digital Override LED 0 5 Vdc Wall Module connection only Triac 2 pairs See Table 30 for options Heat and cool 24 Vac 250 mA max continuous 650 mA max surge lt 30 sec Relay 3 Fan Switching 20 to 253 Vac 3A max High Power relay W7725D F only Electric heat resistive load 20 to 300 Vac 10A max 6A max 55 WEBVISION FCU Outputs Description FCU applications can have a variable number of heating and cooling stages The number of pipes used on the unit could be two or four The outputs could be of staged PWM floating or Thermal type In addition the outputs can be of Change over mode Purpose Define the operation of the controller outputs and the type of fan coil unit to be controlled Mode Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off line or On line Procedure 1 Click the Outputs button on t
313. ts Fields Continued Name Optional Digital Inputs Definition You can configure digital inputs The W7750A can be configured with a maximum of two digital inputs The W7750B W7750B Enhanced and the W7750C can be configured with all four digital inputs CoilfreezeStat is available on W7750C only Configure one of the following as an optional digital point OccSensor OccTimeclock ProofAirFlow EconEnable laqOverride SmokeMonitor DirtyFilter Shutdown WindowOpen MonitorSw ScheduleMaster Dehumidify Unused DI 47 Name Optional Analog Inputs Definition You can configure both resistive and voltage type analog inputs The W7750A has one resistive analog input that can be configured The W7750B W7750B Enhanced and W7750C have two resistive and two voltage inputs that can be configured The W7750C supports the OutdoorTemp20KNTC sensor type Configure one of the following as a Resistive optional analog point DschgTempPT3000 OutdoorTempPT3000 RtnTempPT3000 DschgTemp20KNTC OutdoorTemp20KNTC RtnTemp20KNTC Unused RAI Configure one of the following as a Voltage current optional analog point e Rtn HumidityC7600C RtnEnthalpy OdHumidityC 7600C OdEnthalpy FilterPress SpaceCO2 MonitorSensor Rtn HumidityH7621 Rtn HumidityC7600B OdHumidityH7621 OdHumidityC7600B Unused VAI The RtnHumidityH7621 31 and OdHumidityH7621 31 humidity sensors for voltage inputs are supported by C
314. tus Click Password Recovery Answer Type an answer for Enable to enable the user or Disable to disable the the above question user e Role The role or designation of the user Select the role from the list NOTE Select the check box in the header row to select all e Show this user The view authorized to the user the users listed Network Sidebar The user is authorized to view only the network side bar view Add Edit Users e Locations Sidebar The user is authorized to view s only the locations view While adding Bee Preferred Language The user defined language Configure information related to User Name Password Select the language from the list i ion through Contact Information and User Role Information t 3 Enter the Personal Information of the s r the Properties tab e Assign Devices to the user being created using the Access on this WebVision tab e Add new User only in the WebVision that is configured as Network Server in networked WebVision Email ID Type the user s e mail ID e Office Phone The user s office contact number e Residence Phone The user s residence contact number Mobile Phone The user s mobile contact number 4 Set the Show Alarm Status Select the alarm priorities for which you want status update The numbers are listed from 1 through 10 The user can see only those alarms whose corresponding priority is checked in this step Check Select
315. two different functions depending on the length of time the button is held down Two seconds puts the controller in Bypass Five seconds puts the controller in Unoccupied BYPASS The Bypass button when pressed has the following function Two seconds puts the controller in Bypass Setpoint Knob The setpoint knob is available in different types of scale and with different setpoint meanings based on the country of usage The temperature engineering unit used C or F is the setting made in WebVision when creating the new project This setting is used for the total project Note that the setpoint knob only affects the Occupied and Standby Setpoints The Unoccupied setpoint is not affected by the setpoint knob NOTE Hydronic controller Version B has an on board setpoint It cannot be used with an external TR21 or TR23 setpoint device NO_KNOB The setpoint knob is ignored Note that this must be chosen if there is no setpoint knob connected to the controller to prevent the controller from reacting to incorrect setpoint values RELATIVE The setpoint knob is a relative knob showing only a setpoint shift as and changes to the configured setpoint ABSOLUTE_MIDDLE The setpoint knob is an absolute knob showing the setpoint in absolute degrees It is used as the space temperature setpoint midway between the heating and cooling zero energy band Setpoint Limits These two fields specify the allowed range of adjustment available
316. ue or False Default Auto Heat Morning Warmup Cool Night Purge Pre cool Off Test Emergency Heat Fan Only Free Cool Ice Maximum Heat Economy Dehumidify Calibrate Emergency Cool Emergency Steam Max Cool HVAC Load No Load Fan Speed Off Zero Low Medium High Auto 131 95 7769 01 WEBVISION Table 81 HYD Application of Points Continued Point name Manual Mode Graphics X Alarms x Trends Commandable X X Internal Use Valid Values Default Normal Disabled Update Status Self Test Update Alarm Report Mask Override Enable Remove Override Clear Status Clear Alarm Alarm Notify Enabled Alarm Notify Disabled Manual Control Remote Control Program Clear Reset Reset Manual Occupancy Default Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Temporary Setpoint Units C Precision 1 Min 10 0 Max 35 0 Effective Setpoint 95 7769 01 132 Units C Precision 1 Min 273 2 Max 327 7 Table 81 HYD Application of Points Continued WEBVISION Point name Alarm Type Graphics X Alarms x Trends x Commandable Internal Use Valid Values Node Off Frost Invalid Setpoint Temperature Sensor Restored Setpoint Knob Restored Fan Speed Switch Restored Fan Normal SpaceTemp Com Restored HVAC Mode Com Restored Setpoint Offset Com Restored Sched Occ Com Restor
317. ues for the number of stages Heat Cool Stages 1 2 3 4 Default Throttling Range degrees 3 4 7 8 Integral Time Use this to configure the heat and cool integral time values The wizard automatically modifies the heat and cool throttling ranges when the number of stages configured is changed Refer the following table for the default values of integral time values for different stages If you change the number of stages to zero the integral time remains unchanged A value of 0 means that the integral time is disabled Valid range is 100 to 5000 seconds 0 also is a valid value Values from 1 to 99 are invalid values If you enter an invalid value the wizard automatically modifies it to nearest valid value NOTE Integral time remains always at 1250 for T7350H1017 See below for integral time default values for the number of stages Heat Cool Stages 1 2 3 4 Default Integral Time seconds 3100 2500 1650 1250 Derivative Time Use this to configure the heat and cool derivative time for PID loop tuning The value is selectable from 10 to 3000 seconds 0 also is a valid value A value of O means derivative time is disabled If you enter an invalid value the wizard automatically modifies it to nearest valid value Anticipator Authority Configure the anticipator authority value You can enter a value between 2 and 15 The default value is 4 Select the Apply to Heat only field if it is to be ap
318. ule that you want to edit by clicking the corresponding link in the Schedule Name column 3 Follow the steps described in the above sections and make the required changes Assign Devices You can select a number of devices and assign them to a current configuring schedule You can change the settings as and when required To assign devices 1 Click the Schedule tab The Schedule page appears 2 Go to Add Schedule The Add Schedule page appears 3 Type a unique name for the schedule 4 Click Assign Devices The Assign Devices page appears 5 Check the devices from the Device Name list that you want to assign to the current schedule All the devices that are already assigned to schedules are listed in the Currently Assigned Schedule column If a device is already assigned to a schedule WebVision un assigns the device from the earlier schedule and assigns it to the current schedule 6 Click Finish to save the settings NOTE To abort the action click Cancel Define Special Event Holiday schedules and schedules for special events differ from the normal days You can define schedules for special events using WebVision NOTE You can define any number of special events in a schedule To define a schedule for special events 1 Click Special Event on the Properties page The Special Event page appears Day Name a co newvewsnas T o en i O meow E O Reremoana y IT oe SE Fig 11 Schedule Pro
319. um High On Units min Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 65535 0 Default Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Secondary Heat Output Units Precision 1 Min 163 8 Max 163 8 Sensor Occupancy Default Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Space Temperature Units C Precision 1 Min 273 2 Max 327 7 Terminal Load Units Precision 1 Min 163 8 Max 163 8 135 95 7769 01 WEBVISION Excel 10 Remote Input Output Device RIO Table 82 provides the RIO points detail and Table 83 on page 136 provides the RIO application of points Table 82 RIO Point Details Point name Network Variable Field Point Type Communication Failed nvoAlarmStatus Comm Fail EnumPoint Node Disabled nvoAlarmStatus NodeDisable EnumPoint Sensor Failed nvoAlarmStatus SensorFail EnumPoint Manual Mode nviManualMode manMode EnumWritable Analog In 1 nvoriolO ail NumericPoint Analog In 2 nvoriolO ai2 NumericPoint Analog In 3 nvoriolO ai3 NumericPoint Analog In 4 nvoriolO ai4 NumericPoint Analog In 5 nvoriolO aid NumericPoint Analog In 6 nvoriolO ai6 NumericPoint Digital In 1 nvoriolO di1 EnumPoint Digital In 2 nvoriolO di2 EnumPoint Digital In 3 nvoriolO di3 EnumPoint Digital In 4 nvoriolO di4 EnumPoint Digital Out 1 nvoriolO d01 EnumPoint Digital Out 2 nvoriolO d02 EnumPoint Digital
320. um period of time before the controller turns it on again The selectable range is 0 to 600 seconds Valve Runtime This configuration parameter has three different functions depending on the control output type selected in Control Outputs CONTROL OUTPUT TYPE FLOATING The value is the actuator run time in the range 20 to 600 seconds CONTROL OUTPUT TYPE PWM The value is the cycle period of the PWM output in the range 20 to 600 seconds CONTROL OUTPUT TYPE ONE TWO OR THREE STAGE The value is the minimum on time for each of the stages for controlling compressor units PWM Opt ions Configures the full range of the PWM outputs For many PWM controlled devices an output of 0 or 100 is not allowed since a PWM output shows no switching at these percentages Therefore most PWM devices have a minimum duty cycle and a maximum duty cycle between which they operate from zero to full scale The fields here configure the full range settings You can swap the Zero and Full range values to achieve reverse operation for a PWM output Zero PWM duty cycle for fully closed position Full PWM duty cycle for fully open position 95 7769 01 40 CHC Switching Levels Purpose To configure the staged output switching levels Mode Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off line or On line Procedure 1 Click the Switching Levels button on t
321. ust be chosen if there is no setpoint knob connected to the controller Selecting NO prevents the controller from reacting to incorrect setpoint values Relative The setpoint knob is a relative knob showing only a setpoint shift as and changes to the configured setpoint Absolute Middle The setpoint knob is an absolute knob showing the setpoint in absolute degrees It is used as the space temperature setpoint midway between the heating and cooling zero energy band Setpoint These two fields specify the allowed range of adjustment available from the wall module setpoint knob It is Limits used by the building manager for energy management purposes to balance allowed comfort conditions with energy usage SETPOINT KNOB RELATIVE When the setpoint knob as been chosen as relative the setpoint limits define the range of adjustment of the setpoint knob from the zero point in DDC for C installations and DDF for F installations SETPOINT KNOB ABSOLUTE MIDDLE When the setpoint knob has been chosen as absolute the setpoint limits are limits on the absolute range of the setpoint knob in Deg C for C installations and Deg F for F installations Digital Input Specifies usage of the digital input of the controller Points Digital Input 1 Window Closed Indicates if a window is opened An open window disables the controller operation If the contact is closed the window is closed Window Open Indicates if a window is ope
322. ut 1 and 2 Select a Link Type and Link Name for analog inputs e Analog Compare This is used to compare the two configured inputs The logic usually is greater than less than or equal to Engineering Units The measurement types are listed here When you select an Engineering Units option the corresponding Engineering unit appear in the Sensor fields Compare Deadband The amount of difference between the input values where the output state does not switch e Output ON when the condition is true when the condition between Input 1 and Input 2 is true e Output OFF when the input 1 compared to input 2 minus the deadband is false On Delay Time The delay in time for switching from one state to another before the output value switches to ON Off Delay Time The delay in time for switching from one state to another before the output value switches to OFF e AND Logical AND function If and only if all configured digital input conditions 3 maximum are true the output will be on Three AND buttons AND1 AND2 and AND3 are available in each Logic Loop Click an AND button to open the And Configuration dialog box Digital Input 1 2 and 3 Select a Link Type and Link Name for digital inputs e On Delay Time The delay in time for switching from one state to another before the output value switches to ON Off Delay Time The delay in time for switching from one state to another before the output value swit
323. ut Configuration Analog 1 NOTE If the wall module type is selected without the sensor option in the General page this field appears as Analog1 Otherwise it appears as Remote Setpt Select type e Absolute e Relative If the wall module is configured for a sensor selection the options available are Absolute or Relative Otherwise the options are e Discharge Temp NTC e Supply Temp NTC e Unused Al Digital Input Configuration Digital 1 through Digital 3 You can configure up to three optional digital points e UnusedDI Select if the point is unused e Window Open When open disables the temperature control and moves damper to a fixed position e HeatCool ChangeOver Can manually control operation mode for hot air or cold air supplied from an AHU e Occ Sensor Allows an occupancy sensor to change the effective occupancy between standby and occupied mode Monitor Switch a simple switch acting like a digital input Switch Closed means On True and Switch Open means Off False 95 7769 01 86 NOTE No two inputs can be configured as duplicate In case the user selects a duplicate input the wizard displays a warning and reverts back to the previous selection Excel 10 VAV II Control Parameters Use Table 64 to configure the Excel 10 VAV II Control Parameters Purpose Define Equipment Control parameters that the Excel 10 VAV II controller u
324. uted network Refer to Excel 10 W7753A Unit Ventilator Controller Specification Data form 74 2962 or Excel 10 W7753A Unit Ventilator Controller Installation Instructions form 95 7520 for more information This literature is available on customer honeywell com Try the following link http customer honeywell com request cfm form xx xxxx Navigating to Unit Ventilator Pages Go to the Devices tab Expand the list of devices on the left pane listed under WebVision Select a device to view its properties Configuring a Unit Ventilator Controller The options for configuring a Unit Ventilator Controller are as follows e Outputs Inputs Equipment Control Economizer H C Stages Zone Options Miscellaneous PID Wiring Assignment Wiring Diagram UV Outputs Use Table 53 to configure the Unit Ventilator Outputs for heating and cooling stages The outputs could be of stages PWM or floating types In addition the number of fan speeds and Economizer types must be set You can also select optional points Purpose Select all outputs including optional outputs to be controlled by the Unit Ventilator Controller Mode Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off line or On line Procedure 1 Click the UVOutputPane button on the left pane to open the Output Configuration page 2 Enter information into available fields 3 Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to the last saved settings 4 Click
325. uts er Input and Output Information Inputs PIN Outputs Description Function Number Inputs _ Digital Window occupancy 4 changeover air flow condensation Characteristics Closed lt 400 ohm open gt 10K ohm Override 7 Closed lt 400 ohm open gt 3 3k ohm Analog Temperature Sensor 9 20K ohm NTC 25 C Setpoint Adjustment 8 10k Ohm Outputs Digital Override LED 6 ON 5 Vdc 10 mA OFF 0 Vdc lt 1 mA Triac 2pais Heat and Cool 14 15 17 18 24 Vac 250 mA max continuous 650 mA max surge lt 30 sec HYD Outputs Description HYD applications can have a variable number of heating and cooling stages The number of pipes used on the unit could be two or four The outputs could be of staged PWM floating or Thermal type In addition the outputs can be of Change over mode Purpose Define the operation of the hydronic controller outputs and the type of equipment to be controlled 65 Mode Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off line or On line Procedure 1 Click the Outputs button on the left pane to open the Output Configuration page 2 Enter information into available fields 3 Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to the last saved settings 4 Click Next to display the Input Configuration page 95 7769 01 WEBVISION HYD Outputs fields Table 43 Hydronic Controller Types and Outputs Name Definition Types HY
326. uttons and 7 LEDs to indicate 3 to 3 F the user has selected Network Select this option if the space temperature is obtained over the network from other controllers You have to create appropriate bindings for the input NOTE Open short or out of range on the internal or remote room temperature sensor input s to the thermostat will cause the outputs to be turned off The fault detection is done only on the sensor being used That is if the internal local sensor is being used faults on the remote sensor are ignored Use this option to configure the source of room humidity input to the thermostat Options available are None Select this option when dehumidification is not required When this option is selected if the Aux DO output is configured as Simple Dehumid or Dehumid Hotgas BP it is defaulted to Time Of Day option and the Simple Dehumid Dehumid Hotgas BP options are not available for selection The Dehumidification High Limit and Dehumidification Options in the Setpoints page are disabled Local The thermostat has an internal room relative humidity sensor which has the range of 5 to 105 RH For humidity less that 5 and above 105 the sensor will show invalid and there will be a sensor fail alarm Remote A remote humidity sensor can be hard wired to the thermostat Select this option when the humidity input is required from a remote sensor The thermostat is compatible to H7631A1000 0 to 10V or equivalent sensors Network Se
327. ve nvoData2 stagesActive NumericPoint SubBase Type nvoData1 subBaseType EnumPoint System Mode nvoData1 sysMode EnumPoint Temporary Setpoint nvoData2 temporarySetPt NumericPoint Terminal Load nvoData1 terminalLoad NumericPoint Time To Next State nvoData2 scheduledTuncos NumericPoint Total Error nvoData2 totalError NumericPoint nviTimeSet year Numeric Writable nviTimeSet month Numeric Writable nviTimeSet day Numeric Writable nviTimeSet hour Numeric Writable nviTimeSet minute Numeric Writable nviTimeSet second Numeric Writable Table 93 T7350 Application of Points Point Name Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use Valid Values Occupied Cool Setpoint X Units C Precision 2 Min 7 2 Max 37 2 Standby Cool Setpoint X Units C Precision 2 Min 7 2 Max 37 2 Unoccupied Cool Setpoint X Units C Precision 2 Min 7 2 Max 37 2 Occupied Heat Setpoint X Units C Precision 2 Min 4 4 Max 32 2 Standby Heat Setpoint X Units C Precision 2 Min 4 4 Max 32 2 169 95 7769 01 WEBVISION Table 93 T7350 Application of Points Continued Point Name Unoccupied Heat Setpoint Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use x Valid Values Units C Precision 2 Min 4 4 Max 32 2 Current State Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Occ Null Next State Occupied Unoccupied Bypass Standby Occ Null Time To Next State Units min Precision 0 Min 0
328. vement detector configuration where a closed contact indicates movement Movement detector is the same as occupancy sensor but with an additional Hold Time of 15 minutes This adds a delay to the occupancy signal such that the space is considered occupied until 15 minutes has elapsed since the last movement is detected Cold Water The cold water temperature sensor input is used Ensure that a cold water temperature sensor is actually connected otherwise the controller measures incorrect values Not Used The cold water temperature sensor is not used This option must be selected when a sensor is not connected and is shared via the network Analog Input 3 Specify whether or not the controller is to be used with a humidity sensor connected to its input If the controller is configured for ceiling protection as defined in the Outputs page the humidity must be either connected or shared via the network Humidity The humidity sensor input is used Ensure that a humidity sensor is actually connected otherwise the controller measures incorrect values Not Used The humidity sensor input is not used a You cannot configure the same for Analog Input1 and Analog Input2 For example you cannot configure Analog Input1 as Window Contact and Analog Input2 as Window Contact All digital inputs for Input2 are supported since controller version 1 0 4 39 95 7769 01 WEBVISION CHC Equipment Con
329. witching levels Mode Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off line or On line Procedure 1 Click the Switching Levels button on the left pane to open the Switching Levels Configuration page 2 Enter information into available fields 3 Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to the last saved settings 4 Click Next to display the Zone Control Configuration page or Back to display the Equipment Control Configuration page HYD Switching Levels fields All levels can be set in the range 0 to 100 95 7769 01 70 HYD Zone Control Purpose To configure the heating and cooling setpoints for the Occupied Standby and Unoccupied operating modes Mode Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off line or On line Procedure 1 Click the Zone Control button on the left pane to open the Zone Control Configuration page 2 Enter information into available fields 3 Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to the last saved settings 4 Click Next to display the Miscellaneous Configuration page or Back to display the Switching Levels Configuration page HYD Zone Control fields Setpoints can range from 10 to 35 C 50 to 95 F WEBVISION HYD Miscellaneous Parameters Procedure 1 Click the Miscellaneous button on the left pane to open the Miscellaneous Configuration page Purpose 2 Enter information into available fields To soll lg miscellaneous an
330. wo Stage 99 95 7769 01 WEBVISION Table 70 T7350 General Configuration Fields Continued Name Heat Cool Stages continued Definition When the model is selected as T7350H1009 and the equipment type as Standard the tool allows to configure for up to three stages of heating and three stages of cooling The fourth stage of cooling is available for selection as long as the 0 1 2 heat stages are selected When the fourth stage of cooling is selected the third stage of heating is no longer available When the model is selected as T7350H1009 and the equipment type is selected as Heat Pump you will have option to configure for 0 1 2 auxiliary heating stages and 0 1 2 compressor stages One relay is used for heat pump reversing valve When the model is selected as T7350H1017 you can configure for 0 1 2 heat or cool stages The modulating outputs are always active They are always being driven 0 100 When the number of stages is 0 the relay outputs are used to enable the heating or cooling outputs Staged action may be used in addition to the modulating outputs The number of stages is set to 1 or 2 It is not possible to have both 2 stages of heating and cooling Examples 1 Selecting heating stages and cooling stages as 1 configures for modulating heat and modulating cool action To have Mod heat heating pump enable relay and 1 stage of heating configure Heat Stages as Heat Enable Heat Action depends on the actua
331. xtState NumericWritable DLC Shed nviDIcShed DicShed EnumWritable Out Of Limits nvoStatus outOfLimits BooleanPoint Open Circuit nvoStatus openCircuit BooleanPoint Out Of Service nvoStatus outOfService BooleanPoint Mechanical Fault nvoStatus mechanicalF ault BooleanPoint Feedback Failure nvoStatus feedbackFailure BooleanPoint Over Range nvoStatus overRange BooleanPoint Under Range nvoStatus underRange BooleanPoint Electrical Fault nvoStatus electricalFault BooleanPoint Unable To Measure nvoStatus unableToMeasure BooleanPoint Command Failure nvoStatus comm Failure BooleanPoint Self Test Failed nvoStatus failSelfTest BooleanPoint Application Mode nviApplicMode hvacMode EnumWritable Fan Speed nviFanSpeedCmd SNVTSwitch Manual Mode nviRequest objectRequest EnumWritable Manual Occupancy nviManOccCmd occupancy EnumWritable Temporary Setpoint nviSetPoint tempP NumericWritable Effective Setpoint nvoChcStatus activeSetPt NumericPoint Alarm Type nvoChcStatus alarmType EnumPoint 95 7769 01 106 Table 74 CHC Point Details Continued WEBVISION Point Name Network Variable Field Name Point Type Condensation State nvoChcStatus condensationState EnumPoint Cool Output nvoUnitStatus coolOutput NumericPoint Cool Temperature nvoChcStatus coolTemp NumericPoint DLC Shed nvoChcStatus dicShed EnumPoint Economizer Output nvoUnitStatus econOutput NumericPoint Effective Occupancy nvoChcStatus effec
332. y Heat cool changeover Heat and cool sequence All the above with electric reheat Modes of Operation The controller has the following modes of operation e Occupied mode This is the normal operating condition for a room or zone when it is occupied The controller can be switched into this mode by a network command by the room occupancy sensor or by a bypass button on the wall module In the occupied mode the fan is controlled by the setting of the fan speed switch on the wall module or by the control algo rithm when the switch is set to auto The fan can be configured to remain on or turn off during the zero energy band e Standby mode The standby mode saves energy by reducing heating or cooling demand during periods where the room is tempo rarily unoccupied In this mode the fan is switched off during the zero energy band e Unoccupied mode This mode is used for longer unoccupied periods such as at night or during weekends and holidays Window open The controller is configured for window open detection the controller automatically disables heat and cool control until the window is closed again Frost protection remains active Frost protection If the temperature drops below 46 F 8 C the controller enables the heating circuit as frost protection Fan fail When configured with an air flow detector the controller protects equipment by disabling the system when the fan fails e Changeover The con
333. y as Sensor only Sensor Yes None Use Wall module Setpoint as Sensor as well as get set point Sensor No Normal Use Wall module Bypass Bypass as Sensor as well as for bypass Sensor Yes Normal Use the Wall Setpoint Bypass module as the Bypass Sensor source for temperature setpoint as well as input to bypass scheduled occupancy state CVAHU Equipment Control Description Sensor type Cascade control options COR Mode Fan and Smoke control options Purpose Define equipment control settings Mode Configuration can be performed with the wizard Off line or On line Procedure 1 Click the Equipment Control button on the left pane to open the Equipment Control Configuration page 2 Enter information into available fields 3 Click Commit to save the settings or Reset to revert to the last saved settings 4 Click Next to display the Economizer Parameters Configuration page or Back to display the Input Configuration page CVAHU Equipment Control fields Table 21 lists the CVAHU Equipment Control fields Table 21 CVAHU Equipment Control Fields Fan Control You can select one of the following fan control options e Auto Auto cycles the fan with call for cooling and heating if Fan Heating is On e Continuous Indicates that the fan runs continuously in the Occupied mode and intermittently with call for heating cooling in the Unoccupied mode Fan Heating Select one of
334. y nvoData1 SenOcc EnumPoint Shutdown nvoData1 ShutDown EnumPoint Smoke Monitor nvoData1 SmokeMonitor EnumPoint Space CO2 nvoData2 SpaceCo2 NumericPoint Space Temperature nvoData2 SpaceTemp NumericPoint Temperature Setpoint nvoData2 TempControlPt NumericPoint Window Open nvoData1 WindowOpen EnumPoint Table 85 UV Application of Points Point Name Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use Valid Values Occupied Cool Setpoint X Units C Precision 2 Min 10 0 Max 35 0 Standby Cool Setpoint X Units C Precision 2 Min 10 0 Max 35 0 Unoccupied Cool Setpoint X Units C Precision 2 Min 10 0 Max 35 0 139 95 7769 01 WEBVISION Table 85 UV Application of Points Continued Point Name Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use Valid Values Occupied Heat Setpoint X Units C Precision 2 Min 10 0 Max 35 0 Standby Heat Setpoint X Units C Precision 2 Min 10 0 Max 35 0 Unoccupied Heat Setpoint X Units C Precision 2 Min 10 0 Max 35 0 Current State X ocOccupied ocUnoccupied ocBypass ocStandby ocNul Next State X ocOccupied ocUnoccupied ocBypass ocStandby ocNul Time To Next State X Units min Precision 0 Min 0 0 Max 65535 0 DLC Shed X dINoDIcShed diMinDicShed Air Flow Loss X false or true Communication Failed X false or true Dirty Filter X false or true Drip Pan Full X false or true Freeze Stat
335. y nvoData2 OutdoorEnthalpy NumericPoint Outdoor Humidity nvoData2 OutdoorHumidity NumericPoint Outdoor Temperature nvoData2 OutdoorTemp NumericPoint Proof of Air Flow nvoData1 ProofAirFlow EnumPoint Return Air Enthalpy nvoData2 ReturnEnthalpy NumericPoint Return Air Humidity nvoData2 ReturnHumidity NumericPoint Return Air Temperature nvoData2 ReturnTemp NumericPoint Scheduled Occupancy nvoData1 SchedOcc EnumPoint ShutDown nvoData1 ShutDown EnumPoint Smoke Monitor nvoData1 SmokeMonitor EnumPoint Space Co2 nvoData2 SpaceCo2 NumericPoint Space Temperature nvoData2 SpaceTemp NumericPoint Temperature Control Point nvoData2 TempControlPt NumericPoint Water Source Heat Pump Enable nvoData1 WSHPEnable EnumPoint Window Open nvoData1 WindowOpen EnumPoint Table 77 CVAHU Application of Points Point Name Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use Valid Values Occupied Cool Setpoint X Units C Precision 2 Min 10 0 Max 35 0 Standby Cool Setpoint X Units C Precision 2 Min 10 0 Max 35 0 115 95 7769 01 WEBVISION Table 77 CVAHU Application of Points Continued Point Name Unoccupied Cool Setpoint Graphics Alarms Trends Commandable Internal Use x Valid Values Units C Precision 2 Min 10 0 Max 35 0 Occupied Heat Setpoint Units C Precision 2 Min 10 0 Max 35 0 Standby Heat Setpoint Units C Precision 2 Min 10 0 Max 35 0 Unoccupied Hea
336. zard derives the configuration string that user can enter into the thermostat through keypad This way the configuration in thermostat is same as it is the wizard with respect to inputs outputs setpoints loop tuning parameters energy management parameters bypass time Outputs Heat Cool Stages Use this section to configure outputs Use these fields to configure the number of heat stages and cool stages for the application that the subbase is being used for Outputs Heat Stages Model T7350H1009 Equipment Type Standard Default Value Three Stage Number of Stages Available for Configuration None One Stage Two Stage Three Stage Not available if configured for 4 stages of cooling T7350H1017 Standard Heat Enable Heat Enable One Stage Two Stage Used as auxiliary relay or second stage of heat or cool relay Not available if used as second stage of cooling Aux Heat Stages T7350H1009 Heat Pump One Stage None No auxiliary heating One Stage of auxiliary heat Two Stage of auxiliary heat Cool Stages T7350H1009 T7350H1017 Standard Standard Three Stage Cool Enable None One Stage Two Stage Three Stage Heat Enable One Stage Two Stage Used as auxiliary relay or second stage of heat or cool relay Not available if used as second stage of heating Compressor Stages T7350H1009 Heat Pump Two Stage None One Stage T

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Manette  SDI8488P16 - Oil India Limited  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file